Page 1
Page 2
Page 3
The Project Gutenberg eBook of The Secret of the Ninth Planet
This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere in the United States and most
other parts of the world at no cost and with almost no restrictions
whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or re-use it under the terms of
the Project Gutenberg License included with this eBook or online at
www.gutenberg.org. If you are not located in the United States, you will
have to check the laws of the country where you are located before using
this eBook.
Title: The Secret of the Ninth Planet
Author: Donald A. Wollheim
Release date: September 5, 2010 [eBook #33644]
Most recently updated: April 30, 2011
Language: English
Other information and formats: www.gutenberg.org/ebooks/33644
Credits: Produced by Greg Weeks, Roger L. Holda, Mary Meehan and
the Online Distributed Proofreading Team at
http://www.pgdp.net
*** START OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE SECRET
OF THE NINTH PLANET ***
This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere in the United States and most
other parts of the world at no cost and with almost no restrictions
whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or re-use it under the terms of
the Project Gutenberg License included with this eBook or online at
www.gutenberg.org. If you are not located in the United States, you will
have to check the laws of the country where you are located before using
this eBook.
Title: The Secret of the Ninth Planet
Author: Donald A. Wollheim
Release date: September 5, 2010 [eBook #33644]
Most recently updated: April 30, 2011
Language: English
Other information and formats: www.gutenberg.org/ebooks/33644
Credits: Produced by Greg Weeks, Roger L. Holda, Mary Meehan and
the Online Distributed Proofreading Team at
http://www.pgdp.net
*** START OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE SECRET
OF THE NINTH PLANET ***
Page 4
The Secret of the Ninth Planet
A Science Fiction Novel
A Science Fiction Novel
Page 5
By Donald A. Wollheim
Jacket design by James Heugh
[Transcriber note: Extensive research did not uncover any evidence that the
U.S. copyright on this publication was renewed.]
Cecile Matschat, Editor
Carl Carmer, Consulting Editor
THE JOHN C. WINSTON COMPANY
Philadelphia Toronto
Copyright, 1959
By Donald A. Wollheim
FIRST EDITION
Library of Congress Catalog Card Number 59-5328
Manufactured in the United States of America
For—
Three denizens of this minor planet:
Eleanor, Bill, and of course Janet.
Jacket design by James Heugh
[Transcriber note: Extensive research did not uncover any evidence that the
U.S. copyright on this publication was renewed.]
Cecile Matschat, Editor
Carl Carmer, Consulting Editor
THE JOHN C. WINSTON COMPANY
Philadelphia Toronto
Copyright, 1959
By Donald A. Wollheim
FIRST EDITION
Library of Congress Catalog Card Number 59-5328
Manufactured in the United States of America
For—
Three denizens of this minor planet:
Eleanor, Bill, and of course Janet.
Page 6
Contents
The Mysterious Ninth World
Chapter 1. Special Delivery—by Guided Missile
Chapter 2. The Valley of Stolen Sunlight
Chapter 3. The Secret of A-G 17
Chapter 4. The Hidden Skyport
Chapter 5. Up the Rope of Space
Chapter 6. Sunward Ho!
Chapter 7. Hot Spot on Mercury
Chapter 8. The Veil of Venus
Chapter 9. The Ocean Primeval
Chapter 10. The Dying Planet
Chapter 11. Martians Don't Care
Chapter 12. At Rope's End
Chapter 13. The Pole of Callisto
Chapter 14. Rockets Away!
Chapter 15. Ice Cold on Oberon
Chapter 16. In Orbit Around Pluto
Chapter 17. Stronghold of the Lost Planet
Chapter 18. Sacrifice on the Sacred Moon
Chapter 19. The Museum of Galactic Life
About the Author
Other Winston Science Fiction Novels
The Mysterious Ninth World
Chapter 1. Special Delivery—by Guided Missile
Chapter 2. The Valley of Stolen Sunlight
Chapter 3. The Secret of A-G 17
Chapter 4. The Hidden Skyport
Chapter 5. Up the Rope of Space
Chapter 6. Sunward Ho!
Chapter 7. Hot Spot on Mercury
Chapter 8. The Veil of Venus
Chapter 9. The Ocean Primeval
Chapter 10. The Dying Planet
Chapter 11. Martians Don't Care
Chapter 12. At Rope's End
Chapter 13. The Pole of Callisto
Chapter 14. Rockets Away!
Chapter 15. Ice Cold on Oberon
Chapter 16. In Orbit Around Pluto
Chapter 17. Stronghold of the Lost Planet
Chapter 18. Sacrifice on the Sacred Moon
Chapter 19. The Museum of Galactic Life
About the Author
Other Winston Science Fiction Novels
Page 7
Page 8
The Mysterious Ninth World
While the circumnavigation of the solar system seems farfetched, it may not
be once the problem of effective anti-gravitational control is solved. In this
book I have assumed that the many researchers now actually at work on this
problem will achieve such a result in the next decade. It is not at all
impossible that they may—for we all know that the more minds that work
at a problem, the sooner it will be solved. The discovery of a means of
negating, reversing or otherwise utilizing the immense force of gravitation
for space flight purposes is now thought to be within the bounds of
probability. It should occur some time within the next hundred years,
possibly in even the short period I assume here.
Once solved, the severe handicaps imposed on space exploration by the
weight and chemical limitations of rockets would no longer apply. The
whole timetable of our conquest of the planets in our solar system would be
tremendously speeded up, from hot Mercury all the way out to frigid Pluto.
In describing the visits of the spaceship Magellan to the planets, I have
endeavored to adhere to known facts and the more reasonable assumptions
about each of these worlds. The planet Pluto, however, deserves further
comment, occupying as it does both an important role in this adventure and
a unique one in actual astronomical lore.
Back at the dawn of this century, many astronomers, and notably Dr.
Percival Lowell, studied certain irregularities in the orbit and motion of
Neptune, at that time believed to be the outermost planet. They decided that
these eccentricities (or perturbations, as they are called) could only be
caused by the presence of another, yet undiscovered planet beyond
Neptune.
Following this line of research, a young astronomer, Dr. Clyde Tombaugh,
working at Lowell's own observatory, was able to announce on March 13,
1930, that he had finally found this ninth world, which he named Pluto.
While the circumnavigation of the solar system seems farfetched, it may not
be once the problem of effective anti-gravitational control is solved. In this
book I have assumed that the many researchers now actually at work on this
problem will achieve such a result in the next decade. It is not at all
impossible that they may—for we all know that the more minds that work
at a problem, the sooner it will be solved. The discovery of a means of
negating, reversing or otherwise utilizing the immense force of gravitation
for space flight purposes is now thought to be within the bounds of
probability. It should occur some time within the next hundred years,
possibly in even the short period I assume here.
Once solved, the severe handicaps imposed on space exploration by the
weight and chemical limitations of rockets would no longer apply. The
whole timetable of our conquest of the planets in our solar system would be
tremendously speeded up, from hot Mercury all the way out to frigid Pluto.
In describing the visits of the spaceship Magellan to the planets, I have
endeavored to adhere to known facts and the more reasonable assumptions
about each of these worlds. The planet Pluto, however, deserves further
comment, occupying as it does both an important role in this adventure and
a unique one in actual astronomical lore.
Back at the dawn of this century, many astronomers, and notably Dr.
Percival Lowell, studied certain irregularities in the orbit and motion of
Neptune, at that time believed to be the outermost planet. They decided that
these eccentricities (or perturbations, as they are called) could only be
caused by the presence of another, yet undiscovered planet beyond
Neptune.
Following this line of research, a young astronomer, Dr. Clyde Tombaugh,
working at Lowell's own observatory, was able to announce on March 13,
1930, that he had finally found this ninth world, which he named Pluto.
Page 9
In the years that have followed, Pluto has proven to be a truly puzzling
planet. Unlike its neighbors from Jupiter outward, it is not a giant world,
light and gaseous in nature. Instead, it belongs physically to the small,
dense inner planets of which Earth is one.
The latest viewpoint on this planet, whose size and weight seem quite like
those of Earth, is that it may not be a true child of the Sun, but an outsider
captured as it roamed the trackless realms of galactic space. Its orbit is
highly eccentric and rather lopsided, taking it as far away from the Sun as
four and a half billion miles and as close to the Sun as two and three-quarter
billion miles, thereby cutting inside the orbit of Neptune itself. In fact,
during the period from 1969 to 2009 (covering most of the lifetimes of the
younger readers of this book) Pluto will not be the ninth planet, but the
eighth, for it will be at its closest in those years. Huge Neptune will thus
regain temporarily the title of being the Sun's farthest outpost!
This orbital eccentricity has lead some astronomers to speculate on the
possibility that Pluto may once have been briefly held as a satellite of
Neptune. And following that line of thought, the possibility also has been
suggested that Neptune's larger moon, Triton, may once have been a
companion of Pluto which failed to break away from Neptune's grip!
I think that the first men to land on Pluto are going to make some very
astonishing discoveries. But I am also sure that they will never go there in
rockets. They will have to make the immense trip by some more powerful
means—like the anti-gravitational drive.
D.A.W.
planet. Unlike its neighbors from Jupiter outward, it is not a giant world,
light and gaseous in nature. Instead, it belongs physically to the small,
dense inner planets of which Earth is one.
The latest viewpoint on this planet, whose size and weight seem quite like
those of Earth, is that it may not be a true child of the Sun, but an outsider
captured as it roamed the trackless realms of galactic space. Its orbit is
highly eccentric and rather lopsided, taking it as far away from the Sun as
four and a half billion miles and as close to the Sun as two and three-quarter
billion miles, thereby cutting inside the orbit of Neptune itself. In fact,
during the period from 1969 to 2009 (covering most of the lifetimes of the
younger readers of this book) Pluto will not be the ninth planet, but the
eighth, for it will be at its closest in those years. Huge Neptune will thus
regain temporarily the title of being the Sun's farthest outpost!
This orbital eccentricity has lead some astronomers to speculate on the
possibility that Pluto may once have been briefly held as a satellite of
Neptune. And following that line of thought, the possibility also has been
suggested that Neptune's larger moon, Triton, may once have been a
companion of Pluto which failed to break away from Neptune's grip!
I think that the first men to land on Pluto are going to make some very
astonishing discoveries. But I am also sure that they will never go there in
rockets. They will have to make the immense trip by some more powerful
means—like the anti-gravitational drive.
D.A.W.
Page 10
The Secret of the Ninth Planet
Page 11
Chapter 1.
Special Delivery—by Guided Missile
On the morning that the theft of the solar system's sunlight began, Burl
Denning woke up in his sleeping bag in the Andes, feeling again the
exhilaration of the keen, rarefied, mountain air. He glanced at the still
sleeping forms of his father and the other members of the Denning
expedition, and sat up, enjoying the first rays of the early morning.
The llamas were already awake, moving restlessly back and forth on their
padded feet, waiting for their tender to arise and unleash them. The mules
were standing patiently as ever, staring quietly into the distant misty
panorama of the mountains.
It was, thought Burl, a dim day, but this he supposed was due to the
earliness of the morning. As the Sun rose, it would rapidly bring the
temperatures up, and its unshielded rays would force them to cover up as
they climbed along the high mountain passes.
The sky was cloudless as usual. Burl assumed that the dimness was due to
volcanic dust, or some unseen high cloud far away. And, indeed, as the
expedition came to life, and the day began in earnest, nobody paid any
attention to the fact that the Sun was not quite so warm as it should have
been.
The Denning expedition, questing among the untracked and forgotten
byways of the lost Inca ruins in the vast, jagged mountains of inland Peru,
was not alone in failing to notice the subtle channeling away of the Sun's
warmth and brilliance. They were, in this respect, one with virtually the
entire population of Earth.
In New York, in San Francisco, in Philadelphia and Kansas City, people
going about their day's chores simply assumed that there must be clouds
somewhere—the temperature only slightly less than normal for a July day.
A few men shaded their eyes and looked about, noticing that the heat was
not so intense—and thought it a blessing.
Special Delivery—by Guided Missile
On the morning that the theft of the solar system's sunlight began, Burl
Denning woke up in his sleeping bag in the Andes, feeling again the
exhilaration of the keen, rarefied, mountain air. He glanced at the still
sleeping forms of his father and the other members of the Denning
expedition, and sat up, enjoying the first rays of the early morning.
The llamas were already awake, moving restlessly back and forth on their
padded feet, waiting for their tender to arise and unleash them. The mules
were standing patiently as ever, staring quietly into the distant misty
panorama of the mountains.
It was, thought Burl, a dim day, but this he supposed was due to the
earliness of the morning. As the Sun rose, it would rapidly bring the
temperatures up, and its unshielded rays would force them to cover up as
they climbed along the high mountain passes.
The sky was cloudless as usual. Burl assumed that the dimness was due to
volcanic dust, or some unseen high cloud far away. And, indeed, as the
expedition came to life, and the day began in earnest, nobody paid any
attention to the fact that the Sun was not quite so warm as it should have
been.
The Denning expedition, questing among the untracked and forgotten
byways of the lost Inca ruins in the vast, jagged mountains of inland Peru,
was not alone in failing to notice the subtle channeling away of the Sun's
warmth and brilliance. They were, in this respect, one with virtually the
entire population of Earth.
In New York, in San Francisco, in Philadelphia and Kansas City, people
going about their day's chores simply assumed that there must be clouds
somewhere—the temperature only slightly less than normal for a July day.
A few men shaded their eyes and looked about, noticing that the heat was
not so intense—and thought it a blessing.
Page 12
In some places in Europe, there were clouds and a little rain, and the
dimness was ascribed to this. It was raining in much of Asia, and there were
scattered afternoon showers throughout Latin America, which were
standard for the season. There was a flurry of snow in Melbourne and a cold
blow in Santiago de Chile.
The men in the weather bureaus noted on their day's charts that
temperatures were a few degrees lower than had been predicted, but that
was nothing unusual. Weather was still not entirely predictable, even with
the advances of meteorology that were to be expected of the latter years of
the twentieth century.
The world was reading about other things than the vagaries of the weather.
In the United States, baseball occupied the headlines, and the nonathletic-
minded could find some speculative interest in the completion of another
manned space platform racing along in its eternal orbit twelve thousand
miles away from Earth's surface. The U.S. Moon Base in the center of the
Crater Ptolemaeus had described the appearance of this platform in an
interesting radio dispatch which appeared on the first pages of most
newspapers. The third prober rocket sent to Venus had been unreported for
the tenth day after penetrating the clouds that hid that planet's surface from
human eyes. It was, like its two predecessors, a minimum-sized, unmanned
instrument device designed to penetrate the clouds and radio back data on
the nature of the Venusian atmosphere and the surface. But after its first
report, nothing more had been heard.
Some discussion was going on in science circles about what had happened.
Speculation centered on the possible success of other types of prober
rockets, but it was universally agreed that the time had not come when a
manned rocket could safely undertake the difficult trip to Venus and return.
The years of space flight since the orbiting of Sputnik I back in 1957 had
produced many fascinating results, but they had also brought a realization
of the many problems that surrounded the use of rockets for space flight. It
was generally believed that no one should risk a manned flight until
absolutely everything possible that could be learned by robot and radio-
controlled missiles had been learned. It now looked as if Venus and Mars
trips were still a dozen years away.
dimness was ascribed to this. It was raining in much of Asia, and there were
scattered afternoon showers throughout Latin America, which were
standard for the season. There was a flurry of snow in Melbourne and a cold
blow in Santiago de Chile.
The men in the weather bureaus noted on their day's charts that
temperatures were a few degrees lower than had been predicted, but that
was nothing unusual. Weather was still not entirely predictable, even with
the advances of meteorology that were to be expected of the latter years of
the twentieth century.
The world was reading about other things than the vagaries of the weather.
In the United States, baseball occupied the headlines, and the nonathletic-
minded could find some speculative interest in the completion of another
manned space platform racing along in its eternal orbit twelve thousand
miles away from Earth's surface. The U.S. Moon Base in the center of the
Crater Ptolemaeus had described the appearance of this platform in an
interesting radio dispatch which appeared on the first pages of most
newspapers. The third prober rocket sent to Venus had been unreported for
the tenth day after penetrating the clouds that hid that planet's surface from
human eyes. It was, like its two predecessors, a minimum-sized, unmanned
instrument device designed to penetrate the clouds and radio back data on
the nature of the Venusian atmosphere and the surface. But after its first
report, nothing more had been heard.
Some discussion was going on in science circles about what had happened.
Speculation centered on the possible success of other types of prober
rockets, but it was universally agreed that the time had not come when a
manned rocket could safely undertake the difficult trip to Venus and return.
The years of space flight since the orbiting of Sputnik I back in 1957 had
produced many fascinating results, but they had also brought a realization
of the many problems that surrounded the use of rockets for space flight. It
was generally believed that no one should risk a manned flight until
absolutely everything possible that could be learned by robot and radio-
controlled missiles had been learned. It now looked as if Venus and Mars
trips were still a dozen years away.
Page 13
Burl Denning was keenly interested in all of this. As a senior in high school,
the newly expanding frontiers of the universe represented something special
to his generation. It would be men of his own age who would eventually
man those first full-scale expeditions to neighbor worlds. By the time he
was out of college, with an engineering degree, he might himself hope to be
among those adventurers of space.
Burl was torn between two interests. Archaeology was both a profession
and a hobby in the Denning family. His grandfather had been among the
first to explore the jungle ruins of Indochina. His father, although a
businessman and industrial engineer, made annual vacation pilgrimages to
the ruins of the old Indian civilizations of the Americas. Burl had been with
him once before, when they had trekked through the chicle forests of
Guatemala in search of a lost Mayan city. And now they were again on a
quest, this time for the long-forgotten treasure of the Incas.
Burl was thoroughly familiar with the techniques of tracking down the
ancient records of mankind. He got along well with natives and primitive
people; he knew the arts of wilderness survival; he knew the delicate
techniques of sifting sand and dirt to turn up those priceless bits of pottery
and chipped stone that could supply pages of the forgotten epics of human
history.
However, later in the day it seemed as if their particular camp had petered
out. There were ruins there—a broken-down wall, a dry well and a bit of
eroded bas-relief lying on its side. Burl's father looked at him thoughtfully.
The tall, sandy-haired youth was sitting astraddle a pile of dust,
methodically sifting it through a wide-mesh strainer. A large pile of sifted
sand gave evidence of the length of his efforts, and one broken bit of clay
was the only result he had obtained.
Two of the Indian guides sat patiently in the shade, watching them. One was
digging slowly, turning up more dirt to be sifted.
"I think we've had enough here," said the elder Denning. "Burl, you can
knock off. Tomorrow we'll pull up stakes and see what is in the next valley.
We'll try to follow that old Inca road over the mountains. I don't believe
anyone has ever penetrated there—and the airplane surveys indicated some
evidence of human dwellings."
the newly expanding frontiers of the universe represented something special
to his generation. It would be men of his own age who would eventually
man those first full-scale expeditions to neighbor worlds. By the time he
was out of college, with an engineering degree, he might himself hope to be
among those adventurers of space.
Burl was torn between two interests. Archaeology was both a profession
and a hobby in the Denning family. His grandfather had been among the
first to explore the jungle ruins of Indochina. His father, although a
businessman and industrial engineer, made annual vacation pilgrimages to
the ruins of the old Indian civilizations of the Americas. Burl had been with
him once before, when they had trekked through the chicle forests of
Guatemala in search of a lost Mayan city. And now they were again on a
quest, this time for the long-forgotten treasure of the Incas.
Burl was thoroughly familiar with the techniques of tracking down the
ancient records of mankind. He got along well with natives and primitive
people; he knew the arts of wilderness survival; he knew the delicate
techniques of sifting sand and dirt to turn up those priceless bits of pottery
and chipped stone that could supply pages of the forgotten epics of human
history.
However, later in the day it seemed as if their particular camp had petered
out. There were ruins there—a broken-down wall, a dry well and a bit of
eroded bas-relief lying on its side. Burl's father looked at him thoughtfully.
The tall, sandy-haired youth was sitting astraddle a pile of dust,
methodically sifting it through a wide-mesh strainer. A large pile of sifted
sand gave evidence of the length of his efforts, and one broken bit of clay
was the only result he had obtained.
Two of the Indian guides sat patiently in the shade, watching them. One was
digging slowly, turning up more dirt to be sifted.
"I think we've had enough here," said the elder Denning. "Burl, you can
knock off. Tomorrow we'll pull up stakes and see what is in the next valley.
We'll try to follow that old Inca road over the mountains. I don't believe
anyone has ever penetrated there—and the airplane surveys indicated some
evidence of human dwellings."
Page 14
Burl nodded, and set the sifter down. He'd learned to curb his natural
energies for the exacting tasks required of serious scientific research.
"Okay," he said, "I was hoping you'd move on soon, Dad. This looked like a
washout from the first. I'd say this place was sacked and ruined even before
the Incas fell."
The older man nodded. "I suppose so. Well, let's wash up and see what's for
supper."
They went down to the icy mountain stream to wash the dirt from their
hands. "It's been a nice day," Burl commented. "In spite of the Sun being
out steadily, it wasn't hot at all. Cooler than yesterday."
Mark Denning looked up at the sky and the Sun lowering toward the
horizon. "There must have been some volcanic dust in the heavens," he
said. "The Sun's been a bit dimmed, have you noticed?"
Burl squinted his eyes against the glare. "Wasn't any eruption around here.
Maybe in Ecuador?"
His father shrugged. "Could have been thousands of miles away," was his
slow reply. "Volcanic dust travels around the world, just as radioactive dust
permeated the atmosphere from atomic testings. They say that the dust from
the great Krakatoa explosion remained in the atmosphere for three years
before the last of it settled."
When they had finished supper and the Sun was casting its last red rays
over the rapidly purpling landscape, Burl got out the expedition radio, set
up its antenna, plugged in its compact atomic battery, and tried to get the
news from Lima. All he got was static.
He fiddled with the dials for a long time, twisting the antenna, ranging the
wavelengths, but there was static everywhere. "Strange," he said to his
father, "something's disturbed reception completely."
Pedro Gonzales, their official Peruvian guide, leaned over. "Could be the
battery she is broken, eh?"
Burl shook his head. "Not this battery," he said. "It's a brand-new one, a real
keen development. And I already checked the wiring. It's some sort of
energies for the exacting tasks required of serious scientific research.
"Okay," he said, "I was hoping you'd move on soon, Dad. This looked like a
washout from the first. I'd say this place was sacked and ruined even before
the Incas fell."
The older man nodded. "I suppose so. Well, let's wash up and see what's for
supper."
They went down to the icy mountain stream to wash the dirt from their
hands. "It's been a nice day," Burl commented. "In spite of the Sun being
out steadily, it wasn't hot at all. Cooler than yesterday."
Mark Denning looked up at the sky and the Sun lowering toward the
horizon. "There must have been some volcanic dust in the heavens," he
said. "The Sun's been a bit dimmed, have you noticed?"
Burl squinted his eyes against the glare. "Wasn't any eruption around here.
Maybe in Ecuador?"
His father shrugged. "Could have been thousands of miles away," was his
slow reply. "Volcanic dust travels around the world, just as radioactive dust
permeated the atmosphere from atomic testings. They say that the dust from
the great Krakatoa explosion remained in the atmosphere for three years
before the last of it settled."
When they had finished supper and the Sun was casting its last red rays
over the rapidly purpling landscape, Burl got out the expedition radio, set
up its antenna, plugged in its compact atomic battery, and tried to get the
news from Lima. All he got was static.
He fiddled with the dials for a long time, twisting the antenna, ranging the
wavelengths, but there was static everywhere. "Strange," he said to his
father, "something's disturbed reception completely."
Pedro Gonzales, their official Peruvian guide, leaned over. "Could be the
battery she is broken, eh?"
Burl shook his head. "Not this battery," he said. "It's a brand-new one, a real
keen development. And I already checked the wiring. It's some sort of
Page 15
disturbance that's blocking reception. Maybe we're in a dead zone or
something."
"Wasn't dead yesterday," said his father. "Maybe that eruption was
radioactive."
Burl looked up sharply. "I'll check the Geiger counters, Dad. Something's
blocking reception, something strong and powerful to interfere with this
set." But when he returned, he had to admit he had found nothing.
When the Sun went down, they retired, for the temperature drops swiftly in
the high, thin air of the Andes.
In the rest of the world people watched their color-vision shows without
interruption. Reception was good with the Moon base, the space platforms
had no difficulty making reports, and the radio news beamed out as usual.
In Lima, there was a little static, and direct transmission with Brazil seemed
partially disrupted, but that was all.
In the following five days, the Denning expedition had managed the
difficult climb over the next range of mountains and had come down in the
high plateau valley between. In this same period, the world began to realize
that the dimness of the sky was not a temporary phenomenon.
Weather stations noted that the past few days had all been several degrees
under the average. Reports had come in that farmers were querying the
unusual drop in the temperatures at night. And astronomers, measuring the
surface heat of the Sun, came up with strange discrepancies from previous
data.
One astronomer communicated with another, and a general exchange of
advice began. In a short while, a communication was laid on the desk of the
President of the United States, who scanned it and had it immediately
transmitted to the Secretary General of the United Nations. The Secretary
General circulated the report among the scientific bureaus of all member
nations, and this led in turn to a meeting of the Security Council. This
something."
"Wasn't dead yesterday," said his father. "Maybe that eruption was
radioactive."
Burl looked up sharply. "I'll check the Geiger counters, Dad. Something's
blocking reception, something strong and powerful to interfere with this
set." But when he returned, he had to admit he had found nothing.
When the Sun went down, they retired, for the temperature drops swiftly in
the high, thin air of the Andes.
In the rest of the world people watched their color-vision shows without
interruption. Reception was good with the Moon base, the space platforms
had no difficulty making reports, and the radio news beamed out as usual.
In Lima, there was a little static, and direct transmission with Brazil seemed
partially disrupted, but that was all.
In the following five days, the Denning expedition had managed the
difficult climb over the next range of mountains and had come down in the
high plateau valley between. In this same period, the world began to realize
that the dimness of the sky was not a temporary phenomenon.
Weather stations noted that the past few days had all been several degrees
under the average. Reports had come in that farmers were querying the
unusual drop in the temperatures at night. And astronomers, measuring the
surface heat of the Sun, came up with strange discrepancies from previous
data.
One astronomer communicated with another, and a general exchange of
advice began. In a short while, a communication was laid on the desk of the
President of the United States, who scanned it and had it immediately
transmitted to the Secretary General of the United Nations. The Secretary
General circulated the report among the scientific bureaus of all member
nations, and this led in turn to a meeting of the Security Council. This
Page 16
meeting was held in quiet, without benefit of newspaper reporters or
audience.
There was no longer any doubt. The radiation of the Sun reaching the face
of the Earth had decreased. The facts were indisputable. Where a day
should have registered, in some places, at least 90° in the Sun, a reading of
only 84° was noted. Measurements definitely showed that the face of the
Sun visible to man on Earth had dimmed by just that margin.
This might not prove serious at first, but as the scientists called in by the
Security Council pointed out, it promised terrible things as the year went
on. A difference of five or ten degrees all over the Earth could mean the ruin
of certain crops, it could mean an increase in snowfall and frost that could
very rapidly destroy the economies and habitability of many places on the
Earth's teeming surface.
"But what," asked the Chairman of the Council, "is causing this decrease in
solar energy?"
This the astronomers could not answer. But they pointed to one factor. The
reports from the U.S. Moon Base did not agree with the observations from
Earth. Moon instruments claimed no decrease whatsoever in the amount of
sunlight reaching the arid, airless surface of the Earth's only satellite.
The cause was somewhere on Earth. And the Security Council requested the
careful scanning of the Earth from space platforms and the Moon to
determine the center of the trouble.
Burl Denning had not found the next valley of much interest, either.
Evidence of an Inca road over the mountain had petered out. There were
signs there had been human dwellings, but they were not Inca—just
reminders of the onetime passage of an unknown band of primitives who
had grazed their sheep, built temporary tents, and pulled up stakes perhaps a
hundred years before.
So again at night, Burl, his father, and Gonzales took counsel. They were
debating which way to proceed next; Mark Denning reasoning that they
audience.
There was no longer any doubt. The radiation of the Sun reaching the face
of the Earth had decreased. The facts were indisputable. Where a day
should have registered, in some places, at least 90° in the Sun, a reading of
only 84° was noted. Measurements definitely showed that the face of the
Sun visible to man on Earth had dimmed by just that margin.
This might not prove serious at first, but as the scientists called in by the
Security Council pointed out, it promised terrible things as the year went
on. A difference of five or ten degrees all over the Earth could mean the ruin
of certain crops, it could mean an increase in snowfall and frost that could
very rapidly destroy the economies and habitability of many places on the
Earth's teeming surface.
"But what," asked the Chairman of the Council, "is causing this decrease in
solar energy?"
This the astronomers could not answer. But they pointed to one factor. The
reports from the U.S. Moon Base did not agree with the observations from
Earth. Moon instruments claimed no decrease whatsoever in the amount of
sunlight reaching the arid, airless surface of the Earth's only satellite.
The cause was somewhere on Earth. And the Security Council requested the
careful scanning of the Earth from space platforms and the Moon to
determine the center of the trouble.
Burl Denning had not found the next valley of much interest, either.
Evidence of an Inca road over the mountain had petered out. There were
signs there had been human dwellings, but they were not Inca—just
reminders of the onetime passage of an unknown band of primitives who
had grazed their sheep, built temporary tents, and pulled up stakes perhaps a
hundred years before.
So again at night, Burl, his father, and Gonzales took counsel. They were
debating which way to proceed next; Mark Denning reasoning that they
Page 17
should go further inland, following tales natives had told; Gonzales urging
that they retrack their path and proceed northward toward the regions where
Inca ruins abounded.
For the past week Burl had not been able to get radio reception. The static
had increased as they had gone eastward over the mountain, but not a word
of news or any human voice came through. The Moon was rising on the
horizon as Burl sat playing with the antenna. Finally he gave up and
switched it off.
The discussion had died away and the three men were quiet. The Indian
guides had retired to their own campfire, and one of them had taken out his
pipes and was blowing a soft, plaintive tune.
Burl stared at the full Moon in silence, wondering if he would ever have a
chance to walk its surface, or if his own future was to lie in probing
mankind's past rather than surveying the grounds of his future. As he
watched, he thought he saw a faint light among the brightening stars where
none had been before.
He squinted, and, sure enough, he saw that one tiny white light was
swinging more and more toward the center of the sky. He pointed it out to
his father and Gonzales. "Too fast to be a celestial object," he said. "Is it one
of the space platforms or a sputnik?"
The two men gazed at it in curiosity. Suddenly it seemed to grow brighter
and sharper and to twist toward them in its path.
"Look!" gasped Burl, but the others were already on their feet.
The light plunged down. There was a sudden outburst of yellow flame that
caused the three to duck instinctively, and brought the Indians to their feet
with yells. The glare brightened until they could see that something was just
above them. The fire vanished as swiftly as it came, but a white spot of light
remained.
"It's a parachute!" Burl shouted. "It's a rocket or something, braking to a
stop above us, and coming down by parachute!"
that they retrack their path and proceed northward toward the regions where
Inca ruins abounded.
For the past week Burl had not been able to get radio reception. The static
had increased as they had gone eastward over the mountain, but not a word
of news or any human voice came through. The Moon was rising on the
horizon as Burl sat playing with the antenna. Finally he gave up and
switched it off.
The discussion had died away and the three men were quiet. The Indian
guides had retired to their own campfire, and one of them had taken out his
pipes and was blowing a soft, plaintive tune.
Burl stared at the full Moon in silence, wondering if he would ever have a
chance to walk its surface, or if his own future was to lie in probing
mankind's past rather than surveying the grounds of his future. As he
watched, he thought he saw a faint light among the brightening stars where
none had been before.
He squinted, and, sure enough, he saw that one tiny white light was
swinging more and more toward the center of the sky. He pointed it out to
his father and Gonzales. "Too fast to be a celestial object," he said. "Is it one
of the space platforms or a sputnik?"
The two men gazed at it in curiosity. Suddenly it seemed to grow brighter
and sharper and to twist toward them in its path.
"Look!" gasped Burl, but the others were already on their feet.
The light plunged down. There was a sudden outburst of yellow flame that
caused the three to duck instinctively, and brought the Indians to their feet
with yells. The glare brightened until they could see that something was just
above them. The fire vanished as swiftly as it came, but a white spot of light
remained.
"It's a parachute!" Burl shouted. "It's a rocket or something, braking to a
stop above us, and coming down by parachute!"
Page 18
In the pale light of the full Moon they saw that something metallic and
glistening hung from the white mushroom of a parachute. There was a
clanging sound as it hit the rocky earth with a soft, sighing whoosh. The
cloth of the parachute settled.
They ran across the dry stone of the valley floor, but Burl's long, athletic
legs outdistanced the others. He reached it first.
It was a cylinder of metal, about three feet long and a foot in diameter.
"It's the nose of a message missile—dropped from a guided missile," Burl
announced. "And—look!" He dramatically pointed the beam of his
flashlight upon its side.
There, written in black, heat-resistant paint, were the words: To the Denning
Andes Expedition, from U.S. Air Force Base, California Region. By Guided
Missile Post by Moon Base control, Ptolomaeus Crater. Official. Open
Without Delay.
glistening hung from the white mushroom of a parachute. There was a
clanging sound as it hit the rocky earth with a soft, sighing whoosh. The
cloth of the parachute settled.
They ran across the dry stone of the valley floor, but Burl's long, athletic
legs outdistanced the others. He reached it first.
It was a cylinder of metal, about three feet long and a foot in diameter.
"It's the nose of a message missile—dropped from a guided missile," Burl
announced. "And—look!" He dramatically pointed the beam of his
flashlight upon its side.
There, written in black, heat-resistant paint, were the words: To the Denning
Andes Expedition, from U.S. Air Force Base, California Region. By Guided
Missile Post by Moon Base control, Ptolomaeus Crater. Official. Open
Without Delay.
Page 19
Chapter 2.
The Valley of Stolen Sunlight
For a moment all three were silent with amazement. "From California—and
Moon Base—for us?" gasped Burl, finally. "But why? What can they want
of us?"
His father frowned. "Only way to find out is to open it and see." He
squatted down to study the cylinder closer. Burl pointed a finger at the nose.
"Looks like a crack there. Maybe it unscrews. Let's lift it."
It was not as heavy as it had appeared, for, like all rocket missiles, it was
made of the light but tough alloys that were necessary to conserve weight-
lift costs and fuel reserves. They stood it upright and tried to turn the top.
After a little resistance, it unscrewed slowly. Inside, they found a rolled
document bearing the seal of the United States Air Force.
Burl took it out, and unfolded it with unsteady hands. His father read over
his shoulder.
Gonzales poked at the empty cylinder, impatiently. Finally, he burst out,
"What does it say? What do they want?"
Burl turned to him. "It's unbelievable! It's—it's just so darned surprising!
The dimness of the days, the drop in temperature—it wasn't just around
here! It was all over the world!"
Quickly, he went on to tell the Peruvian what they had just learned. The
communication was from the U.S. Space Commission and it had been
directed on its flight from California by the Moon Base, because only from
the satellite could the exact location of the Dennings be spotted. It seemed
that the Dennings were the only scientifically trained personnel close to the
point on Earth where the disturbance originated. This also accounted for the
blanketing of radio waves in their vicinity. Several airplanes had tried to
locate them, but strange disturbances in the ether and atmosphere had made
The Valley of Stolen Sunlight
For a moment all three were silent with amazement. "From California—and
Moon Base—for us?" gasped Burl, finally. "But why? What can they want
of us?"
His father frowned. "Only way to find out is to open it and see." He
squatted down to study the cylinder closer. Burl pointed a finger at the nose.
"Looks like a crack there. Maybe it unscrews. Let's lift it."
It was not as heavy as it had appeared, for, like all rocket missiles, it was
made of the light but tough alloys that were necessary to conserve weight-
lift costs and fuel reserves. They stood it upright and tried to turn the top.
After a little resistance, it unscrewed slowly. Inside, they found a rolled
document bearing the seal of the United States Air Force.
Burl took it out, and unfolded it with unsteady hands. His father read over
his shoulder.
Gonzales poked at the empty cylinder, impatiently. Finally, he burst out,
"What does it say? What do they want?"
Burl turned to him. "It's unbelievable! It's—it's just so darned surprising!
The dimness of the days, the drop in temperature—it wasn't just around
here! It was all over the world!"
Quickly, he went on to tell the Peruvian what they had just learned. The
communication was from the U.S. Space Commission and it had been
directed on its flight from California by the Moon Base, because only from
the satellite could the exact location of the Dennings be spotted. It seemed
that the Dennings were the only scientifically trained personnel close to the
point on Earth where the disturbance originated. This also accounted for the
blanketing of radio waves in their vicinity. Several airplanes had tried to
locate them, but strange disturbances in the ether and atmosphere had made
Page 20
it impossible to establish contact. Also, the back reaches of the Andes were
poorly mapped and treacherous in air currents, even in normal times.
"During the last week, a certain fraction of the Sun's light and energy
reaching the Earth has been diverted. It has been bent or focused in much
the same way that a lens bends light rays—and the point to which it has
been directed is a spot only seven miles from here! Over that last mountain
range," said Burl, pointing.
Gonzales followed his finger. "Just over the mountains lies the source of the
trouble," said Burl excitedly. "And we're the nearest to it. They want us to
go over there, see what it is, stop it, or report back. It took the telescopes in
Moon Base to locate us and to track the center of the trouble!"
Mark Denning pursed his lips. "We'll have to start tomorrow, and we'll have
to go fast. A loss of light and heat, however slight, could have very serious
effects on life if continued too long. We can make it by tomorrow night, if
we start early and leave the Indians and pack animals behind."
The other two nodded. Mark looked at them in the half-light of the Moon.
"You'll have to stay with the equipment, Pedro, otherwise the Indians might
abandon it. Burl and I will start out at dawn."
Gonzales agreed and the three made their way back to the camp. At the first
sign of light breaking in the morning horizon, Burl and his father started
off. They carried only enough equipment for survival, plus the additional
items that might be needed for the emergency ahead.
The trek over the mountains was a hard one, the path narrow, steep,
sometimes nonexistent. There were few signs of Indians or animals, and it
was plain that few ever traveled over this range. The air was cold and thin,
vegetation sparse and hardy. All around them was the cold blue of the sky—
a shade darker than usual—and the gaunt peaks of ancient mountains. The
Inca kings may have claimed the land here, but even their hardy legions had
never conquered these lonely and hostile sky domains.
Panting and weary with hours of climbing, Burl and his father made a quick
lunch in a sheltered jumble of rock near the top. Then, shouldering their
packs again, they trudged on. At last they reached a point where the view of
poorly mapped and treacherous in air currents, even in normal times.
"During the last week, a certain fraction of the Sun's light and energy
reaching the Earth has been diverted. It has been bent or focused in much
the same way that a lens bends light rays—and the point to which it has
been directed is a spot only seven miles from here! Over that last mountain
range," said Burl, pointing.
Gonzales followed his finger. "Just over the mountains lies the source of the
trouble," said Burl excitedly. "And we're the nearest to it. They want us to
go over there, see what it is, stop it, or report back. It took the telescopes in
Moon Base to locate us and to track the center of the trouble!"
Mark Denning pursed his lips. "We'll have to start tomorrow, and we'll have
to go fast. A loss of light and heat, however slight, could have very serious
effects on life if continued too long. We can make it by tomorrow night, if
we start early and leave the Indians and pack animals behind."
The other two nodded. Mark looked at them in the half-light of the Moon.
"You'll have to stay with the equipment, Pedro, otherwise the Indians might
abandon it. Burl and I will start out at dawn."
Gonzales agreed and the three made their way back to the camp. At the first
sign of light breaking in the morning horizon, Burl and his father started
off. They carried only enough equipment for survival, plus the additional
items that might be needed for the emergency ahead.
The trek over the mountains was a hard one, the path narrow, steep,
sometimes nonexistent. There were few signs of Indians or animals, and it
was plain that few ever traveled over this range. The air was cold and thin,
vegetation sparse and hardy. All around them was the cold blue of the sky—
a shade darker than usual—and the gaunt peaks of ancient mountains. The
Inca kings may have claimed the land here, but even their hardy legions had
never conquered these lonely and hostile sky domains.
Panting and weary with hours of climbing, Burl and his father made a quick
lunch in a sheltered jumble of rock near the top. Then, shouldering their
packs again, they trudged on. At last they reached a point where the view of
Page 21
the other side spread out before them—a breathtakingly clear vision of the
little valley below.
As they looked down, the air seemed to shimmer and vibrate. Burl rubbed
his eyes. "It hurts," he said.
His father squinted. "There's a powerful vibrational effect. It may be a very
dangerous concentration of the invisible rays of the Sun as well as of light."
Once Burl had gotten used to the odd visual effect, which was like gazing
into the twisting heat rays rising from an overheated oven, he saw that there
was a small flat region between the mountains. And in the center of this
valley was a large black structure of some sort. The twisting effect of the
light around it made it impossible to tell more.
"That's it," said Burl. His father nodded, shifted the pack to ease his
shoulders, unstrapped the hunting rifle slung over his back, and carefully
checked its loads.
Burl saw what his father was doing and suddenly understood the danger.
What could be doing a thing like this? What but something not of this
Earth? Something of distant space, of a science beyond that of man—and
unfriendly besides. Now, for the first time, Burl realized what he had not
had time to before—this was an enemy he and his father were facing—an
enemy of all mankind—and utterly unknown.
He gulped, gripped his rifle, and followed his father down the sliding rocky
trail.
As they drew nearer the base of the mountain, the effects of the strange
vibrations grew more pronounced. Burl avoided looking directly ahead,
keeping his eyes on the ground before his feet, yet even so, he could not
help noticing how the stones around them seemed to shimmer in the
invisible waves. From the base of the valley the sky now seemed streaked
with black and gray rings, as if they were reaching the center of some
atmospheric whirlpool. Out of the mountains, after hours of arduous
scrambling, they started across the barren rocky plain.
Before them rose a vast circular structure several stories high, ominously
black and without any sign of windows or doors. Above the building
little valley below.
As they looked down, the air seemed to shimmer and vibrate. Burl rubbed
his eyes. "It hurts," he said.
His father squinted. "There's a powerful vibrational effect. It may be a very
dangerous concentration of the invisible rays of the Sun as well as of light."
Once Burl had gotten used to the odd visual effect, which was like gazing
into the twisting heat rays rising from an overheated oven, he saw that there
was a small flat region between the mountains. And in the center of this
valley was a large black structure of some sort. The twisting effect of the
light around it made it impossible to tell more.
"That's it," said Burl. His father nodded, shifted the pack to ease his
shoulders, unstrapped the hunting rifle slung over his back, and carefully
checked its loads.
Burl saw what his father was doing and suddenly understood the danger.
What could be doing a thing like this? What but something not of this
Earth? Something of distant space, of a science beyond that of man—and
unfriendly besides. Now, for the first time, Burl realized what he had not
had time to before—this was an enemy he and his father were facing—an
enemy of all mankind—and utterly unknown.
He gulped, gripped his rifle, and followed his father down the sliding rocky
trail.
As they drew nearer the base of the mountain, the effects of the strange
vibrations grew more pronounced. Burl avoided looking directly ahead,
keeping his eyes on the ground before his feet, yet even so, he could not
help noticing how the stones around them seemed to shimmer in the
invisible waves. From the base of the valley the sky now seemed streaked
with black and gray rings, as if they were reaching the center of some
atmospheric whirlpool. Out of the mountains, after hours of arduous
scrambling, they started across the barren rocky plain.
Before them rose a vast circular structure several stories high, ominously
black and without any sign of windows or doors. Above the building
Page 22
protruded two great projections ending in huge, shining discs. One of the
monstrous cuplike discs was facing the Sun, the other pointed in the
opposite direction.
As the two men came nearer and nearer, the strangeness in the air increased.
They felt they were being penetrated through and through with invisible
lances, with tiny prickles of heat. "Radiation?" queried Burl softly, afraid of
the answer. His father trudged grimly on for a moment, and then put down
his pack. He took out a Geiger counter and activated it.
He shook his head. "No radioactivity," he said. "Whatever this is, it isn't
that."
They reached the wall of the building. Oddly, here they seemed sheltered
from the unusual vibrations. Burl realized that the source was above them,
probably the two mighty discs raised high in the sky.
The Dennings surveyed the building, but found no entrance. It must have
been a quarter of a mile around its walls, but there was no sign of a door or
entry. The wall was of a rocklike substance, but it was not like any rock or
plastic Burl had ever seen.
"We've got to get in," said Burl as they returned to the starting point, "but
how?"
His father smiled. "This way." He opened his pack and took two cans of
blasting powder from it. "I thought these would come in handy. Lucky we
had some left over from the blasting we did last week."
He set both cans at the base of the high wall, wired them together, and ran
the wire as far as it reached. When the two men were a safe distance away,
Mark sparked off the explosive.
There was a thunderous roar: rocks and dirt showered around them, and bits
of black powdery stuff. When the smoke cleared, Burl and his father leaped
to their feet, rifles in hand.
There was a crack in the side of the wall where the explosive had gone off.
And the rip was large enough to get through!
monstrous cuplike discs was facing the Sun, the other pointed in the
opposite direction.
As the two men came nearer and nearer, the strangeness in the air increased.
They felt they were being penetrated through and through with invisible
lances, with tiny prickles of heat. "Radiation?" queried Burl softly, afraid of
the answer. His father trudged grimly on for a moment, and then put down
his pack. He took out a Geiger counter and activated it.
He shook his head. "No radioactivity," he said. "Whatever this is, it isn't
that."
They reached the wall of the building. Oddly, here they seemed sheltered
from the unusual vibrations. Burl realized that the source was above them,
probably the two mighty discs raised high in the sky.
The Dennings surveyed the building, but found no entrance. It must have
been a quarter of a mile around its walls, but there was no sign of a door or
entry. The wall was of a rocklike substance, but it was not like any rock or
plastic Burl had ever seen.
"We've got to get in," said Burl as they returned to the starting point, "but
how?"
His father smiled. "This way." He opened his pack and took two cans of
blasting powder from it. "I thought these would come in handy. Lucky we
had some left over from the blasting we did last week."
He set both cans at the base of the high wall, wired them together, and ran
the wire as far as it reached. When the two men were a safe distance away,
Mark sparked off the explosive.
There was a thunderous roar: rocks and dirt showered around them, and bits
of black powdery stuff. When the smoke cleared, Burl and his father leaped
to their feet, rifles in hand.
There was a crack in the side of the wall where the explosive had gone off.
And the rip was large enough to get through!
Page 23
Without a word, they charged across the ground, still smoking from the
concussion, and squeezed through the mysterious walls of the enigmatic
building.
The walls were thin, thin but hard, as befit masters of atomic engineering.
Inside, they found a roomless building—one single chamber within the
frame of the outer walls.
A dim, bluish light emanated from the curving ceiling. On the uncleared
rocky ground which was the floor of the building were a number of huge
machines.
They were spherical glassy inventions, many times the height of a man,
connected by strings of thick metal bars and rows of smaller globes, none of
which was familiar. There was a steady humming noise, and above, the two
giant, metal masts penetrating the ceiling rotated slowly. Doubtless, the
great Sun-trapping discs were affixed to the top of these masts.
There was no living thing in sight.
Burl and his father stood silently, half crouched, with rifles at the ready, but
nothing moved to challenge them. There was only the humming of the Sun
transmitters.
Burl called out, but there was no answer. They advanced cautiously, fearing
a trap. The place did not have the look of living things about it. "An
automatic station," said Mark under his breath. "I think it's strictly
automatic."
It gradually became evident that Mark was right. Everything was automatic.
Whoever had built this structure to divert the rays of the Sun had simply set
it down, put it in motion, and left. There was no evidence of any provisions
for a garrison or a director.
They studied the machines but could make nothing of them. They found
what looked like controls, but although they pushed and pulled the levers
and knobs, the humming did not cease. It seemed as if the controls were
either dummies or had to be specially motivated.
concussion, and squeezed through the mysterious walls of the enigmatic
building.
The walls were thin, thin but hard, as befit masters of atomic engineering.
Inside, they found a roomless building—one single chamber within the
frame of the outer walls.
A dim, bluish light emanated from the curving ceiling. On the uncleared
rocky ground which was the floor of the building were a number of huge
machines.
They were spherical glassy inventions, many times the height of a man,
connected by strings of thick metal bars and rows of smaller globes, none of
which was familiar. There was a steady humming noise, and above, the two
giant, metal masts penetrating the ceiling rotated slowly. Doubtless, the
great Sun-trapping discs were affixed to the top of these masts.
There was no living thing in sight.
Burl and his father stood silently, half crouched, with rifles at the ready, but
nothing moved to challenge them. There was only the humming of the Sun
transmitters.
Burl called out, but there was no answer. They advanced cautiously, fearing
a trap. The place did not have the look of living things about it. "An
automatic station," said Mark under his breath. "I think it's strictly
automatic."
It gradually became evident that Mark was right. Everything was automatic.
Whoever had built this structure to divert the rays of the Sun had simply set
it down, put it in motion, and left. There was no evidence of any provisions
for a garrison or a director.
They studied the machines but could make nothing of them. They found
what looked like controls, but although they pushed and pulled the levers
and knobs, the humming did not cease. It seemed as if the controls were
either dummies or had to be specially motivated.
Page 24
"What do we do now?" asked Burl, after they had tried pulling all the levers
on one particular switchboard without any results. "Do you have enough
powder left to blow up the machinery?"
His father shook his head. "I had only those two cans with me. We could try
shooting into the machinery." Leveling his rifle, he fired at a glassy globe
perched upon the central sphere. The bullet pinged off it, and they saw that
it had failed even to dent the glistening surface.
"It won't work," said the elder Denning, after several more shots had
produced the same result and the concussion reverberating from the
enclosed walls had nearly deafened them.
They continued to hunt for a clue, but found none. Dejected, Burl kicked a
loose pebble and watched it rattle against a column near the main control
board. A small metallic ball rested on top of the column, apparently
unattached. A replacement part, he thought to himself, wandering over to it.
It was about the level of his head.
With the thought that if he examined it he might learn something of the
nature of the working machines, he reached out with both hands to pick it
up.
As his hands touched the metallic ball, there was a sudden terrible flash of
power. He felt himself grasped by forces beyond his control, paralyzed
momentarily like one who has laid hold of an electrically charged wire. He
opened his mouth to scream in agony, but he could say nothing. A great
force surged through his body, radiating, charging every cell and atom of
his being. He felt as if he were being lifted from the floor. Then the globe
seemed to dissolve in his hands. It became a glare of light, grew misty, and
then vanished.
For a moment he stood there on tiptoe, arced with the potent violence of the
force, glowing from within with energies, and then he felt as if the
supercharge were dissolving itself, slipping into him, sliding into the
ground, then disappearing.
He stood before the column, swaying, but still conscious and alive. His
hands were still raised, but there was no ball between them, neither of metal
nor of power.
on one particular switchboard without any results. "Do you have enough
powder left to blow up the machinery?"
His father shook his head. "I had only those two cans with me. We could try
shooting into the machinery." Leveling his rifle, he fired at a glassy globe
perched upon the central sphere. The bullet pinged off it, and they saw that
it had failed even to dent the glistening surface.
"It won't work," said the elder Denning, after several more shots had
produced the same result and the concussion reverberating from the
enclosed walls had nearly deafened them.
They continued to hunt for a clue, but found none. Dejected, Burl kicked a
loose pebble and watched it rattle against a column near the main control
board. A small metallic ball rested on top of the column, apparently
unattached. A replacement part, he thought to himself, wandering over to it.
It was about the level of his head.
With the thought that if he examined it he might learn something of the
nature of the working machines, he reached out with both hands to pick it
up.
As his hands touched the metallic ball, there was a sudden terrible flash of
power. He felt himself grasped by forces beyond his control, paralyzed
momentarily like one who has laid hold of an electrically charged wire. He
opened his mouth to scream in agony, but he could say nothing. A great
force surged through his body, radiating, charging every cell and atom of
his being. He felt as if he were being lifted from the floor. Then the globe
seemed to dissolve in his hands. It became a glare of light, grew misty, and
then vanished.
For a moment he stood there on tiptoe, arced with the potent violence of the
force, glowing from within with energies, and then he felt as if the
supercharge were dissolving itself, slipping into him, sliding into the
ground, then disappearing.
He stood before the column, swaying, but still conscious and alive. His
hands were still raised, but there was no ball between them, neither of metal
nor of power.
Page 25
He let them fall to his side and took a step. He was whole, he was sound, he
was unharmed. He heard his father's footsteps running to him, and
murmured weakly, "I'm all right."
And he was. He could see no sign of damage. "I must have absorbed an
awful lot of that energy—or whatever it was," he said.
After resting a moment, he decided to try the useless controls again. Going
over to one small board, he idly shoved a lever. This time he felt resistance.
The lever was activated. There was a slight change in the radiance of one
globe.
"Dad!" Burl shouted. "It works! It works for me now!"
Mark Denning watched as Burl turned dials and levers and got responses.
"You must have been charged in a special way," he said excitedly. "That's
how they lock their devices. They will only respond to a person carrying
that special energy charge, whatever it was. Come on, let's get to the main
control, before the effect goes away—if it does."
The two dashed to the panel which, they guessed, activated the main Sun
transmitter. Burl grabbed the instruments and threw them back to what
seemed to be the zero positions.
The humming rose in intensity, then quieted down and finally stopped.
There was a series of clicks, and one by one, the various globes, condensers
and glowing machines died out. Above them came a whirring noise, and
Burl looked up to see the masts withdrawing into the building, their discs
presumably left flat and directionless.
It felt different. Suddenly they knew that the vibrations which had been so
heavy in the air about them were gone. There was silence everywhere, the
natural silence of an empty, lifeless building in an uninhabited valley.
Burl and his father made their way to the break in the wall and climbed
through it.
Outside, the Sun shone down brighter than it had before. The sky was the
calm serene blue of a cloudless day. Burl knew that at that same moment,
all over the world, the sky was clearer and the Sun warmer.
was unharmed. He heard his father's footsteps running to him, and
murmured weakly, "I'm all right."
And he was. He could see no sign of damage. "I must have absorbed an
awful lot of that energy—or whatever it was," he said.
After resting a moment, he decided to try the useless controls again. Going
over to one small board, he idly shoved a lever. This time he felt resistance.
The lever was activated. There was a slight change in the radiance of one
globe.
"Dad!" Burl shouted. "It works! It works for me now!"
Mark Denning watched as Burl turned dials and levers and got responses.
"You must have been charged in a special way," he said excitedly. "That's
how they lock their devices. They will only respond to a person carrying
that special energy charge, whatever it was. Come on, let's get to the main
control, before the effect goes away—if it does."
The two dashed to the panel which, they guessed, activated the main Sun
transmitter. Burl grabbed the instruments and threw them back to what
seemed to be the zero positions.
The humming rose in intensity, then quieted down and finally stopped.
There was a series of clicks, and one by one, the various globes, condensers
and glowing machines died out. Above them came a whirring noise, and
Burl looked up to see the masts withdrawing into the building, their discs
presumably left flat and directionless.
It felt different. Suddenly they knew that the vibrations which had been so
heavy in the air about them were gone. There was silence everywhere, the
natural silence of an empty, lifeless building in an uninhabited valley.
Burl and his father made their way to the break in the wall and climbed
through it.
Outside, the Sun shone down brighter than it had before. The sky was the
calm serene blue of a cloudless day. Burl knew that at that same moment,
all over the world, the sky was clearer and the Sun warmer.
Page 26
But for how long? Behind them the building still stood—and its inventors
were still to be found.
were still to be found.
Page 27
Chapter 3.
The Secret of A-G 17
The Dennings did not have much time to speculate on the mystery of the
Sun-stealers. For just as they were discussing what should be their next
course of action, the problem was solved for them. There was a roaring in
the air, then a humming, and in a matter of a few more seconds, six rocket
helicopters popped into sight, hovered over the valley on streaming jets, and
settled down.
"They're U.S. planes!" gasped Burl, jumping to his feet and going to meet
them. "It must mean that they know we stopped the machines."
"Obviously," said his father, striding with him to greet the helmeted man
who was now stepping out of the lead machine. By this time the last of the
squad had landed, and the khaki-clad soldiers in them were already
disembarking. "I imagine that all over the world the sky turned a little
brighter. It must have been apparent at once."
The leader of the 'copter men reached them. He was a tall, bronzed man,
wearing the service coveralls and markings of a captain of the Air Force. He
stretched out his hand. "You must be the Dennings. I'm Captain Saunders.
I've been asked to bring you back with me right away so that we can get a
complete report on this affair. How fast can you get ready?"
"Why," said Burl, "we're ready right now. As soon as we can dump our
packs aboard. But, gee, you mean go back—where?"
Saunders smiled grimly. "To California. We just left there. I have been
given urgent orders to waste no time. So will you oblige?"
The two Dennings looked at each other. This was important, all right. They
realized that these planes had flown on fast rockets the instant the sky had
cleared. Possibly there was still a crisis—one they had not heard of.
The Secret of A-G 17
The Dennings did not have much time to speculate on the mystery of the
Sun-stealers. For just as they were discussing what should be their next
course of action, the problem was solved for them. There was a roaring in
the air, then a humming, and in a matter of a few more seconds, six rocket
helicopters popped into sight, hovered over the valley on streaming jets, and
settled down.
"They're U.S. planes!" gasped Burl, jumping to his feet and going to meet
them. "It must mean that they know we stopped the machines."
"Obviously," said his father, striding with him to greet the helmeted man
who was now stepping out of the lead machine. By this time the last of the
squad had landed, and the khaki-clad soldiers in them were already
disembarking. "I imagine that all over the world the sky turned a little
brighter. It must have been apparent at once."
The leader of the 'copter men reached them. He was a tall, bronzed man,
wearing the service coveralls and markings of a captain of the Air Force. He
stretched out his hand. "You must be the Dennings. I'm Captain Saunders.
I've been asked to bring you back with me right away so that we can get a
complete report on this affair. How fast can you get ready?"
"Why," said Burl, "we're ready right now. As soon as we can dump our
packs aboard. But, gee, you mean go back—where?"
Saunders smiled grimly. "To California. We just left there. I have been
given urgent orders to waste no time. So will you oblige?"
The two Dennings looked at each other. This was important, all right. They
realized that these planes had flown on fast rockets the instant the sky had
cleared. Possibly there was still a crisis—one they had not heard of.
Page 28
They did not pause to ask further questions. Mark Denning asked the
captain to dispatch one of his 'copters to the camp beyond the mountains to
tell Gonzales to load up and start back for Lima. This order given, the two
Dennings climbed into the rocket 'copter, and Saunders took the controls.
With a whoosh, the squat craft lifted on its rockets, its jet-driven fan carried
it up, folded, and the rocket engine took over. On upward into the
stratosphere they hurtled, across the Western Hemisphere, across the face of
jungle and isthmus, across the barren mountains of Mexico, and in a matter
of less than half an hour, settled down in the wide green field of a U.S. Air
Force base in southern California. It was all so swift, so sudden, that to Burl
it seemed like a dream. There had been so many days in the field, in the
peace and quiet of the high mountains of the Andes. There had been the
slow hunting around age-worn ruins; the careful, deliberate sifting of tons
of soil and sand for tiny shards; then this: the urgent message, the trek, the
weird building, the strange, body-filling shock, and the control over the
Sun-theft globes, followed by the swift transition over thousands of miles.
Here he was in his home country—weeks sooner than he had expected—but
not to return to his home and school. No, for he felt that somehow an
adventure was beginning that could lead anywhere. Perhaps his adventure
had actually ended, but he saw now that he would be questioned, probed,
and asked to recount his story over and over.
Burl and his father were met at the port by a group of officers and escorted
rapidly to a room in a large building. Here there were half a dozen men in
civilian clothes. One by one, these men were introduced, and as each one
was named, Burl wondered more about what was to come.
There was a general from Army Intelligence. There was a high member of
the State Department. There were three noted astronomers—among them
the surprisingly young Russell Clyde and the elderly and famous Dr.
Merckmann. There was an aircraft manufacturer whose name graced a
thousand planes, and an engineer who had contributed to the conquest of
the Moon.
The general, Walton Shrove, asked them to sit down. He was in charge of
the affair. It turned out to be a careful questioning of their story. It was not a
hounding of questions as in a police quizzing, or a baiting from
captain to dispatch one of his 'copters to the camp beyond the mountains to
tell Gonzales to load up and start back for Lima. This order given, the two
Dennings climbed into the rocket 'copter, and Saunders took the controls.
With a whoosh, the squat craft lifted on its rockets, its jet-driven fan carried
it up, folded, and the rocket engine took over. On upward into the
stratosphere they hurtled, across the Western Hemisphere, across the face of
jungle and isthmus, across the barren mountains of Mexico, and in a matter
of less than half an hour, settled down in the wide green field of a U.S. Air
Force base in southern California. It was all so swift, so sudden, that to Burl
it seemed like a dream. There had been so many days in the field, in the
peace and quiet of the high mountains of the Andes. There had been the
slow hunting around age-worn ruins; the careful, deliberate sifting of tons
of soil and sand for tiny shards; then this: the urgent message, the trek, the
weird building, the strange, body-filling shock, and the control over the
Sun-theft globes, followed by the swift transition over thousands of miles.
Here he was in his home country—weeks sooner than he had expected—but
not to return to his home and school. No, for he felt that somehow an
adventure was beginning that could lead anywhere. Perhaps his adventure
had actually ended, but he saw now that he would be questioned, probed,
and asked to recount his story over and over.
Burl and his father were met at the port by a group of officers and escorted
rapidly to a room in a large building. Here there were half a dozen men in
civilian clothes. One by one, these men were introduced, and as each one
was named, Burl wondered more about what was to come.
There was a general from Army Intelligence. There was a high member of
the State Department. There were three noted astronomers—among them
the surprisingly young Russell Clyde and the elderly and famous Dr.
Merckmann. There was an aircraft manufacturer whose name graced a
thousand planes, and an engineer who had contributed to the conquest of
the Moon.
The general, Walton Shrove, asked them to sit down. He was in charge of
the affair. It turned out to be a careful questioning of their story. It was not a
hounding of questions as in a police quizzing, or a baiting from
Page 29
newspapermen eager to get a scoop. Rather, their questions were deliberate
and intelligent. They drew out the full account of what Burl and his father
had seen in that valley, and of what the Sun-theft globes appeared to be like
in operation. They concentrated deeply on the curious experience which had
placed in Burl the charge that enabled him to control the machines.
"Would you mind," the general asked Burl, "if we subject you to a series of
medical and electronic tests to determine whether this charge is still with
you?"
Burl shook his head. "I'll go along with anything you say."
"Very well," the general smiled. "We'll make our purposes clear to you
afterward. But we want to get this over as soon as we can."
Burl left the room in company with three technicians who had come in.
They took him to the medical office at the base and there he was given a
complete check. At the electronics lab, electrodes were attached to him and
careful readings were made of the natural electrical resistance of his body,
and of his apparent physical charge. After an hour of tests, Burl was brought
back to the main council room.
As he entered, he sensed he had interrupted something important. His father
looked at him, and Burl detected in his face a certain curious mingling of
pride and parental concern. What, the young man wondered, were they all
up to?
When he was seated, the company grew silent. The general pursed his lips,
looked directly at Burl, and said, "I think the time has come to acquaint you
with the problem our world is facing. We may ask you to make a very
personal decision, and we think you ought to know what may hang on it."
He stopped. Every face at the table was grim. Mark Denning, too, was
sober, though Burl detected that he also did not quite know what was to
come.
"It is apparent that some race of beings, some species from outer space,
unknown to us, has begun a process of tapping the power and light of the
Sun for transmission elsewhere. The station on Earth, which you shut down,
and intelligent. They drew out the full account of what Burl and his father
had seen in that valley, and of what the Sun-theft globes appeared to be like
in operation. They concentrated deeply on the curious experience which had
placed in Burl the charge that enabled him to control the machines.
"Would you mind," the general asked Burl, "if we subject you to a series of
medical and electronic tests to determine whether this charge is still with
you?"
Burl shook his head. "I'll go along with anything you say."
"Very well," the general smiled. "We'll make our purposes clear to you
afterward. But we want to get this over as soon as we can."
Burl left the room in company with three technicians who had come in.
They took him to the medical office at the base and there he was given a
complete check. At the electronics lab, electrodes were attached to him and
careful readings were made of the natural electrical resistance of his body,
and of his apparent physical charge. After an hour of tests, Burl was brought
back to the main council room.
As he entered, he sensed he had interrupted something important. His father
looked at him, and Burl detected in his face a certain curious mingling of
pride and parental concern. What, the young man wondered, were they all
up to?
When he was seated, the company grew silent. The general pursed his lips,
looked directly at Burl, and said, "I think the time has come to acquaint you
with the problem our world is facing. We may ask you to make a very
personal decision, and we think you ought to know what may hang on it."
He stopped. Every face at the table was grim. Mark Denning, too, was
sober, though Burl detected that he also did not quite know what was to
come.
"It is apparent that some race of beings, some species from outer space,
unknown to us, has begun a process of tapping the power and light of the
Sun for transmission elsewhere. The station on Earth, which you shut down,
Page 30
was an important one. But ... it was not the only one. There are others,
operating in this solar system." He nodded to Merckmann.
The old astronomer took the cue. "The observatories of the Earth, aided by
the lunar observers, have definitely determined that there is still a certain
amount of light being shifted from the faces of other planets and diverted.
We have detected by telescopic and telethermic measurements that there are
areas of Sun-disturbances on the surfaces of the planets Mercury and Mars.
We suspect the existence of one on Venus. We believe that this may prove
to be true on other planets as well, but we have no doubt of the first two.
"Measurements of the amount of Sun power being piped away, and of the
effect of the magnetic disturbances used to create and maintain these
stations, have shown that they will have a definite effect on the structure of
the Sun itself. We have not yet completed all our calculations, but
preliminary studies indicate that if this type of solar interference is not
stopped, it may cause our Sun to nova in somewhere between two and three
years time."
He stopped, but the thirty-year-old prodigy, Russell Clyde, took up the
story. "By nova, we mean that the Sun will literally explode. It will flame
up, burst to many times its present size. Such an explosion will burn Earth
to cinders, render all the planets inside the orbit of Jupiter uninhabitable,
scorch their atmospheres, dissolve their waters into steam, and make them
lifeless flaming deserts. We have seen other stars turn nova. We have
measured their explosions. We know just about what age and stability inside
a sun is necessary to cause this. And we fear that the danger of our own Sun
doing so is great—if the Sun-tapping is not stopped."
Everyone at the table was silent. Burl was stunned. Finally he caught his
breath. "But how can we stop it? We can't get to all the planets in time. Our
rockets are not ready—and rocketships would be too slow. Why it would
take two years for rocketships to reach Mars, if the expedition were ready
now ... and I understand that it will be another ten years before Operation
Mars is even attempted."
General Shrove nodded. "That is correct. Our rocket engineering is not yet
advanced enough to allow us to take such emergency action. We are still
only just over the doorstep of interplanetary flight—and our enemies,
operating in this solar system." He nodded to Merckmann.
The old astronomer took the cue. "The observatories of the Earth, aided by
the lunar observers, have definitely determined that there is still a certain
amount of light being shifted from the faces of other planets and diverted.
We have detected by telescopic and telethermic measurements that there are
areas of Sun-disturbances on the surfaces of the planets Mercury and Mars.
We suspect the existence of one on Venus. We believe that this may prove
to be true on other planets as well, but we have no doubt of the first two.
"Measurements of the amount of Sun power being piped away, and of the
effect of the magnetic disturbances used to create and maintain these
stations, have shown that they will have a definite effect on the structure of
the Sun itself. We have not yet completed all our calculations, but
preliminary studies indicate that if this type of solar interference is not
stopped, it may cause our Sun to nova in somewhere between two and three
years time."
He stopped, but the thirty-year-old prodigy, Russell Clyde, took up the
story. "By nova, we mean that the Sun will literally explode. It will flame
up, burst to many times its present size. Such an explosion will burn Earth
to cinders, render all the planets inside the orbit of Jupiter uninhabitable,
scorch their atmospheres, dissolve their waters into steam, and make them
lifeless flaming deserts. We have seen other stars turn nova. We have
measured their explosions. We know just about what age and stability inside
a sun is necessary to cause this. And we fear that the danger of our own Sun
doing so is great—if the Sun-tapping is not stopped."
Everyone at the table was silent. Burl was stunned. Finally he caught his
breath. "But how can we stop it? We can't get to all the planets in time. Our
rockets are not ready—and rocketships would be too slow. Why it would
take two years for rocketships to reach Mars, if the expedition were ready
now ... and I understand that it will be another ten years before Operation
Mars is even attempted."
General Shrove nodded. "That is correct. Our rocket engineering is not yet
advanced enough to allow us to take such emergency action. We are still
only just over the doorstep of interplanetary flight—and our enemies,
Page 31
whoever they may be, are obviously far advanced. But, as you will see, we
are not entirely without hope. Colonel Lockhart, will you tell them about
Project A-G?"
All eyes turned to Lockhart, who was a short, stocky man in civilian
clothes. Burl realized that this man had been a colonel at one time, but
remembered now that he had taken a post with one of the largest aviation
companies after leaving the service. Lockhart turned cold gray eyes directly
to Burl.
"We have in my company's experimental grounds one virtually untested
vessel which may be able to make a flight to Mars, or any other planet, in
the time allowed. This is the craft we refer to as A-G 17, the seventeenth
such experiment, and the first to succeed. It is powered by an entirely new
method of flight, the force of anti-gravity."
Burl hung breathlessly on his next words. "You probably know that work on
the scientific negation of gravity has been going on since the early 1950's. It
was known shortly after experiments had been conducted on atomic and
subatomic particles that grounds had at last been found by means of which a
counteraction to gravity might be set up. Early subatomic studies showed
that such a force was not only theoretically possible, but that certain
subparticles actually displayed such tendencies. On the basis of these first
discoveries, work has been going on in the development of negative
gravitational drive for at least twenty years. As early as 1956, there were not
less than fourteen such projects under way in virtually all the leading
aircraft industries of the United States, not to mention the rest of the world.
In the last few years, at the direction of the Air Force, these projects have
been consolidated, placed under one main roof, and brought to its present
status, which is, we believe, the one of final triumph."
He glanced at General Shrove, who returned the glance unsmilingly. "After
the successful testing of several models, a full-sized craft has been built
which utilizes the new method of space drive. One such craft has been built,
and only one. This ship, if it works, is at this time the only means by which
humanity can hope to make the trips to the other places in the solar system
from which the Sun-stealers are working. It is with this one vessel only that
we can put their Sun-tap stations out of commission.
are not entirely without hope. Colonel Lockhart, will you tell them about
Project A-G?"
All eyes turned to Lockhart, who was a short, stocky man in civilian
clothes. Burl realized that this man had been a colonel at one time, but
remembered now that he had taken a post with one of the largest aviation
companies after leaving the service. Lockhart turned cold gray eyes directly
to Burl.
"We have in my company's experimental grounds one virtually untested
vessel which may be able to make a flight to Mars, or any other planet, in
the time allowed. This is the craft we refer to as A-G 17, the seventeenth
such experiment, and the first to succeed. It is powered by an entirely new
method of flight, the force of anti-gravity."
Burl hung breathlessly on his next words. "You probably know that work on
the scientific negation of gravity has been going on since the early 1950's. It
was known shortly after experiments had been conducted on atomic and
subatomic particles that grounds had at last been found by means of which a
counteraction to gravity might be set up. Early subatomic studies showed
that such a force was not only theoretically possible, but that certain
subparticles actually displayed such tendencies. On the basis of these first
discoveries, work has been going on in the development of negative
gravitational drive for at least twenty years. As early as 1956, there were not
less than fourteen such projects under way in virtually all the leading
aircraft industries of the United States, not to mention the rest of the world.
In the last few years, at the direction of the Air Force, these projects have
been consolidated, placed under one main roof, and brought to its present
status, which is, we believe, the one of final triumph."
He glanced at General Shrove, who returned the glance unsmilingly. "After
the successful testing of several models, a full-sized craft has been built
which utilizes the new method of space drive. One such craft has been built,
and only one. This ship, if it works, is at this time the only means by which
humanity can hope to make the trips to the other places in the solar system
from which the Sun-stealers are working. It is with this one vessel only that
we can put their Sun-tap stations out of commission.
Page 32
"But I emphasize again the experimental nature of this ship. What its
capacities are and how well it will work is still a matter of planning-book
conjecture. We can prepare the ship to take off in one week's time. I do not
think, judging from what Merckmann and Clyde have said, that we can
afford to wait any longer. Another such ship cannot be built in less than a
year."
General Shrove spoke then. "It is already arranged that this A-G 17
spaceship is going to go. A volunteer crew has been selected; several of
them are in this room." He nodded briefly to Clyde and to Lockhart. "But
although these volunteers are among the best men in their fields, there isn't
one of them who couldn't be replaced by someone equally skilled in the
same field. But there is one person on Earth right now who may just
possibly be unique. This person may hold, by virtue of an experience not
shared by any other human being, a special key that will render easier the
task that this spaceship must fulfill."
He turned to Burl, who sat tingling with suspense. "You, Burl Denning, are
apparently still carrying some sort of electronic or subelectronic charge
which is attuned to the controls of the Sun-tap station. We feel that you
should be along on this expedition. It will be long and dangerous, it will
involve landings on worlds no man has ever visited or expected to visit for
hundreds of years. There is an enemy in the sky who will certainly try to
stop our single ship. To be bluntly honest, the voyagers on this ship face
such dangers as explorers have not faced since the days of Magellan and
Cook. Its chances of return are probably remote. But with the permission of
your father, which he has already given, I would like to ask that you
volunteer to join its crew."
Burl felt dizzy, his heart thumping painfully within his chest. He took a
deep breath, and then carefully, trying to keep his voice from quivering, he
said, "Yes, I'll go."
capacities are and how well it will work is still a matter of planning-book
conjecture. We can prepare the ship to take off in one week's time. I do not
think, judging from what Merckmann and Clyde have said, that we can
afford to wait any longer. Another such ship cannot be built in less than a
year."
General Shrove spoke then. "It is already arranged that this A-G 17
spaceship is going to go. A volunteer crew has been selected; several of
them are in this room." He nodded briefly to Clyde and to Lockhart. "But
although these volunteers are among the best men in their fields, there isn't
one of them who couldn't be replaced by someone equally skilled in the
same field. But there is one person on Earth right now who may just
possibly be unique. This person may hold, by virtue of an experience not
shared by any other human being, a special key that will render easier the
task that this spaceship must fulfill."
He turned to Burl, who sat tingling with suspense. "You, Burl Denning, are
apparently still carrying some sort of electronic or subelectronic charge
which is attuned to the controls of the Sun-tap station. We feel that you
should be along on this expedition. It will be long and dangerous, it will
involve landings on worlds no man has ever visited or expected to visit for
hundreds of years. There is an enemy in the sky who will certainly try to
stop our single ship. To be bluntly honest, the voyagers on this ship face
such dangers as explorers have not faced since the days of Magellan and
Cook. Its chances of return are probably remote. But with the permission of
your father, which he has already given, I would like to ask that you
volunteer to join its crew."
Burl felt dizzy, his heart thumping painfully within his chest. He took a
deep breath, and then carefully, trying to keep his voice from quivering, he
said, "Yes, I'll go."
Page 33
Chapter 4.
The Hidden Skyport
Around the table there was a concerted sigh. Burl, his ears still throbbing
from his sudden excitement, realized each of them had been holding his
breath. General Shrove smiled and glanced at the elder Denning, who sat
expressionless. It is not an easy thing for him, Burl thought.
At that moment, Burl knew that he had come of age. This moment of
decision, coming truly and literally like a bolt out of the blue, had thrust
him into man's estate before his time. He would show that he was able to
carry this burden.
Shrove now spoke to Lockhart. "Colonel, we are holding you to your
schedule. According to it, you can take off in five more days. Will you need
any more time because of this addition to your crew?"
The stocky air veteran shook his head. "Not at all. We'll be loaded and ready
on the hour I set. I'll take Denning in hand and brief him on what he may
need to know. Actually, we may even be able to get him a home-leave. After
all, his duties won't begin until actual planetfalls are made."
They rose from their seats. Burl stood up, uncertain as to procedure, but
Lockhart came over to him and took his arm. "Burl, we're going to have to
give you a rundown on the ship and the plans. We've no time to waste if you
want to get a chance to say good-by to your folks later on."
"I understand," said Burl. He turned and waved to his father, who was in
conversation with the general. "I'll see you at home in a few days, Dad," he
called, then followed Lockhart out.
Outside the building they were joined by several other members of the
conference and immediately ringed about by a squad of Air Force men
wearing sidearms. Burl realized that they were to be thus guarded
everywhere they went. Obviously, the possibility that the builders of the
Sun-traps might have agents operating on Earth had occurred to the officers.
The Hidden Skyport
Around the table there was a concerted sigh. Burl, his ears still throbbing
from his sudden excitement, realized each of them had been holding his
breath. General Shrove smiled and glanced at the elder Denning, who sat
expressionless. It is not an easy thing for him, Burl thought.
At that moment, Burl knew that he had come of age. This moment of
decision, coming truly and literally like a bolt out of the blue, had thrust
him into man's estate before his time. He would show that he was able to
carry this burden.
Shrove now spoke to Lockhart. "Colonel, we are holding you to your
schedule. According to it, you can take off in five more days. Will you need
any more time because of this addition to your crew?"
The stocky air veteran shook his head. "Not at all. We'll be loaded and ready
on the hour I set. I'll take Denning in hand and brief him on what he may
need to know. Actually, we may even be able to get him a home-leave. After
all, his duties won't begin until actual planetfalls are made."
They rose from their seats. Burl stood up, uncertain as to procedure, but
Lockhart came over to him and took his arm. "Burl, we're going to have to
give you a rundown on the ship and the plans. We've no time to waste if you
want to get a chance to say good-by to your folks later on."
"I understand," said Burl. He turned and waved to his father, who was in
conversation with the general. "I'll see you at home in a few days, Dad," he
called, then followed Lockhart out.
Outside the building they were joined by several other members of the
conference and immediately ringed about by a squad of Air Force men
wearing sidearms. Burl realized that they were to be thus guarded
everywhere they went. Obviously, the possibility that the builders of the
Sun-traps might have agents operating on Earth had occurred to the officers.
Page 34
Russell Clyde, the young astronomer, was among their group. He walked
over to Burl and shoved out a hand. "Glad to have you with us, Burl. This is
going to be quite a trip!"
Clyde was about Burl's size. He had an engagingly boyish air about him,
and Burl took a liking to him. Burl had heard of him before. For the young
man, while still a college student, had formulated a remarkable new theory
of the composition of galactic formations which had instantly focused the
attention of the scientific world upon him. This theory had been taken up by
the gray-beards of the scientific world and had survived the test of their
debates. Now associated with the great Mount Palomar Observatory,
Russell Clyde had continued to build a reputation in astronomical circles.
"You're one of the expedition, then?" asked Burl, shaking his hand.
The redhead nodded. "Yep. They're taking me as their chief astrogator. And
don't think it's because I'm any great shakes at it, either! It's just that I'm still
young enough to take the kind of shoving around these high brass figure
we're going to get. Boy, have they got it figured!"
Burl chuckled. "Ah, you're kidding, Dr. Clyde. You've probably been in on
this from the beginning."
The other shook his head vigorously. "Nope. It was going to be
Merckmann's baby, but when they realize they have a fight on their hands,
they always look for young blood. And, say, cut out this 'Doctor' stuff. Call
me Russ. We're going to share quarters, you know."
"How do you know that?" asked a tall, rather sharp-featured man who had
overheard them. "The colonel will assign quarters."
"I say he will ... and you can bet on that," snapped Russell Clyde. He waved
a hand in introduction. "This is Harvey Caton, one of our electronics
wizards."
Caton nodded, but before he could continue the discussion, Lockhart
rounded them all up, packed them into a couple of station wagons, guards
and all, and they were off.
over to Burl and shoved out a hand. "Glad to have you with us, Burl. This is
going to be quite a trip!"
Clyde was about Burl's size. He had an engagingly boyish air about him,
and Burl took a liking to him. Burl had heard of him before. For the young
man, while still a college student, had formulated a remarkable new theory
of the composition of galactic formations which had instantly focused the
attention of the scientific world upon him. This theory had been taken up by
the gray-beards of the scientific world and had survived the test of their
debates. Now associated with the great Mount Palomar Observatory,
Russell Clyde had continued to build a reputation in astronomical circles.
"You're one of the expedition, then?" asked Burl, shaking his hand.
The redhead nodded. "Yep. They're taking me as their chief astrogator. And
don't think it's because I'm any great shakes at it, either! It's just that I'm still
young enough to take the kind of shoving around these high brass figure
we're going to get. Boy, have they got it figured!"
Burl chuckled. "Ah, you're kidding, Dr. Clyde. You've probably been in on
this from the beginning."
The other shook his head vigorously. "Nope. It was going to be
Merckmann's baby, but when they realize they have a fight on their hands,
they always look for young blood. And, say, cut out this 'Doctor' stuff. Call
me Russ. We're going to share quarters, you know."
"How do you know that?" asked a tall, rather sharp-featured man who had
overheard them. "The colonel will assign quarters."
"I say he will ... and you can bet on that," snapped Russell Clyde. He waved
a hand in introduction. "This is Harvey Caton, one of our electronics
wizards."
Caton nodded, but before he could continue the discussion, Lockhart
rounded them all up, packed them into a couple of station wagons, guards
and all, and they were off.
Page 35
The next days were hectic ones. By car and plane the group was transferred
to the large, closely guarded base in Wyoming where the secret anti-gravity
ship was waiting. Burl did not see this ship right away. First, he was
introduced to all the other members of the crew, and given a mass of papers
to study which outlined the basic means of the new space drive, and which
detailed the opinions and suggestions of various experts as to methods of
procedure and courses of action. He was subjected to various space medical
tests to determine his reactions under differing pressures and gravities.
Although it proved a strenuous and exhausting routine, he emerged from the
tests with flying colors.
The expedition was commanded, as he had known, by Colonel Lockhart
who would also act as chief pilot. The famous military flier proved to be a
forceful personality with a great skill at handling people. He knew how to
get the most out of each man.
Russell Clyde was the chief astrogator and astronomical expert. Assisting
him was the rather pedantic and sober Samuel Oberfield, a mathematical
wizard and astrophysicist, on leave from an assistant professorship at one of
the great universities. Clyde and Oberfield would also act as copilots
relieving Lockhart.
Harvey Caton, blond Jurgen Detmar, and the jovial Frank Shea were the
three-man engineering crew. Completing the members of the expedition
was another trio chosen to act as general crew, medical and commissary
men while in flight, and as a trained explorer-fighter unit while on
planetside. Roy Haines, of whose exploits in Africa and the jungles of
South America Burl Denning had heard, was the first of these, a rugged,
weather-beaten, but astonishingly alert explorer. Captain Edgar Boulton, on
leave from the United States Marines, was the second—a man who had
made an impressive record in various combat actions in his country's
service. The Antarctic explorer, Leon Ferrati, completed the listing. Ferrati
was an expert on getting along in conditions of extreme frigidity and hostile
climates. Of these men, only Lockhart, Clyde, Detmar and Ferrati had had
space experience in the platforms and in Moon-rocketry.
It was still, thought Burl, a large crew for a spaceship. No rocket built to
date had ever been able to carry such a load. But by then he had realized
to the large, closely guarded base in Wyoming where the secret anti-gravity
ship was waiting. Burl did not see this ship right away. First, he was
introduced to all the other members of the crew, and given a mass of papers
to study which outlined the basic means of the new space drive, and which
detailed the opinions and suggestions of various experts as to methods of
procedure and courses of action. He was subjected to various space medical
tests to determine his reactions under differing pressures and gravities.
Although it proved a strenuous and exhausting routine, he emerged from the
tests with flying colors.
The expedition was commanded, as he had known, by Colonel Lockhart
who would also act as chief pilot. The famous military flier proved to be a
forceful personality with a great skill at handling people. He knew how to
get the most out of each man.
Russell Clyde was the chief astrogator and astronomical expert. Assisting
him was the rather pedantic and sober Samuel Oberfield, a mathematical
wizard and astrophysicist, on leave from an assistant professorship at one of
the great universities. Clyde and Oberfield would also act as copilots
relieving Lockhart.
Harvey Caton, blond Jurgen Detmar, and the jovial Frank Shea were the
three-man engineering crew. Completing the members of the expedition
was another trio chosen to act as general crew, medical and commissary
men while in flight, and as a trained explorer-fighter unit while on
planetside. Roy Haines, of whose exploits in Africa and the jungles of
South America Burl Denning had heard, was the first of these, a rugged,
weather-beaten, but astonishingly alert explorer. Captain Edgar Boulton, on
leave from the United States Marines, was the second—a man who had
made an impressive record in various combat actions in his country's
service. The Antarctic explorer, Leon Ferrati, completed the listing. Ferrati
was an expert on getting along in conditions of extreme frigidity and hostile
climates. Of these men, only Lockhart, Clyde, Detmar and Ferrati had had
space experience in the platforms and in Moon-rocketry.
It was still, thought Burl, a large crew for a spaceship. No rocket built to
date had ever been able to carry such a load. But by then he had realized
Page 36
that the strict weight limitation imposed by rocket fuels no longer applied to
this new method of space flight. Burl found himself more and more anxious
to see this wonderful craft.
It was not until the morning of the second day that Burl's chance came. He
had fallen asleep on the stiff army cot in the hastily improvised base on the
Wyoming prairie where the final work was being done. The day had been a
confused jumble of impressions, with little time to catch his breath. Now he
had slept the sleep of exhaustion, only to be awakened at dawn by Lockhart.
"Up and dress," the colonel greeted him. "We're taking you out to look the
ship over. Detmar will come along and explain the drive."
Burl threw his clothes on, gulped down breakfast in the company of the
others at the messhall, and soon was speeding along a wide, new road that
ran up to the mountains edging the wide western plain. As they neared the
mountains, he saw a high wooden wall blocking the road and view; this was
the barrier that concealed the ship nestled in the valley beyond.
They passed the guards' scrutiny and emerged into the valley. The A-G 17
loomed suddenly above them, and Burl's first impression was of a
glistening metal fountain roaring up from the ground, gathering itself high
in the sky, as if to plunge down again in a rain of shining steel.
The ship was like a huge, gleaming raindrop. It stood two hundred feet
high, the wide, rounded, blunt bulk of it high in the air, as if about to fall
upward instead of downward. It tapered down to a thin, perfectly
streamlined point which touched the ground. It was held upright by a great
cradle of girders and beams. At various points the polished steel was broken
by indentations or inset round dots that were thick portholes or indications
of entry ports. Around its equator, girding the widest section was a ring of
portholes, and there were scattered rings of similar portholes below this.
As the three men drew near the tail, the great bulk loomed overhead, and
Burl felt as if its weight were bearing down on him as they walked beneath.
Two men were suspended from the scaffolding above. Burl twisted his neck
and saw that the designation A-G 17 and the white-star insignia of the
United States had been lettered along the sides. But what was it the men
were painting now?
this new method of space flight. Burl found himself more and more anxious
to see this wonderful craft.
It was not until the morning of the second day that Burl's chance came. He
had fallen asleep on the stiff army cot in the hastily improvised base on the
Wyoming prairie where the final work was being done. The day had been a
confused jumble of impressions, with little time to catch his breath. Now he
had slept the sleep of exhaustion, only to be awakened at dawn by Lockhart.
"Up and dress," the colonel greeted him. "We're taking you out to look the
ship over. Detmar will come along and explain the drive."
Burl threw his clothes on, gulped down breakfast in the company of the
others at the messhall, and soon was speeding along a wide, new road that
ran up to the mountains edging the wide western plain. As they neared the
mountains, he saw a high wooden wall blocking the road and view; this was
the barrier that concealed the ship nestled in the valley beyond.
They passed the guards' scrutiny and emerged into the valley. The A-G 17
loomed suddenly above them, and Burl's first impression was of a
glistening metal fountain roaring up from the ground, gathering itself high
in the sky, as if to plunge down again in a rain of shining steel.
The ship was like a huge, gleaming raindrop. It stood two hundred feet
high, the wide, rounded, blunt bulk of it high in the air, as if about to fall
upward instead of downward. It tapered down to a thin, perfectly
streamlined point which touched the ground. It was held upright by a great
cradle of girders and beams. At various points the polished steel was broken
by indentations or inset round dots that were thick portholes or indications
of entry ports. Around its equator, girding the widest section was a ring of
portholes, and there were scattered rings of similar portholes below this.
As the three men drew near the tail, the great bulk loomed overhead, and
Burl felt as if its weight were bearing down on him as they walked beneath.
Two men were suspended from the scaffolding above. Burl twisted his neck
and saw that the designation A-G 17 and the white-star insignia of the
United States had been lettered along the sides. But what was it the men
were painting now?
Page 37
"It will read Magellan," said Lockhart, following Burl's eyes. "We decided
that that would be the appropriate name for it. For what we are going to
have to do with it is not just to make a simple trip to explore another planet,
but to circumnavigate the entire solar system."
Burl found his eyes dazzled by the vessel, hanging like a giant bulbous
mushroom over them. Around him, he began to realize that a number of
other activities were going on. There were spidery scaffolds leading up to
open ports in the metallic sides. Workmen were raising loads of material
into these ports, and for an instant Burl caught sight of Haines, in rough
work clothes, shouting orders from one of the openings as to exactly where
to stow something.
At last he took his eyes away from the startling sight. The little valley
around him had a number of low storage shacks. A road led in from another
pass through the mountains. Two loaded trucks came down this pass now in
low gear. Lockhart, watching, remarked, "We are having our equipment and
supplies flown up to a town twenty miles away and then trucked in."
"Why didn't you leave this ship where it was built—in your plant in Indiana
—and load it from there?" Burl asked.
"It would have been easier," said the colonel, "but security thought it better
to transfer the craft to its launching sight up here in these deserted hills. We
are going to make our take-off from here because we are still too
experimental to know what might happen if something kicked up or if the
engines failed. We'd hate to splatter all over a highly populated industrial
area. Besides, you must know, if you looked over those papers yesterday,
that there's a lot of radioactive stuff here."
Burl nodded. Detmar cut in. "Why don't we get aboard and show him over
the ship? It will be easier to make it clear that way."
Suiting action to the word, the three went over to one of the loading
platforms, climbed on the wiry little elevator, and were hoisted up fifty feet
to the port in the side of the ship. They entered well below the vast,
overhanging equatorial bulge which marked the wide end of the teardrop-
shaped vessel.
that that would be the appropriate name for it. For what we are going to
have to do with it is not just to make a simple trip to explore another planet,
but to circumnavigate the entire solar system."
Burl found his eyes dazzled by the vessel, hanging like a giant bulbous
mushroom over them. Around him, he began to realize that a number of
other activities were going on. There were spidery scaffolds leading up to
open ports in the metallic sides. Workmen were raising loads of material
into these ports, and for an instant Burl caught sight of Haines, in rough
work clothes, shouting orders from one of the openings as to exactly where
to stow something.
At last he took his eyes away from the startling sight. The little valley
around him had a number of low storage shacks. A road led in from another
pass through the mountains. Two loaded trucks came down this pass now in
low gear. Lockhart, watching, remarked, "We are having our equipment and
supplies flown up to a town twenty miles away and then trucked in."
"Why didn't you leave this ship where it was built—in your plant in Indiana
—and load it from there?" Burl asked.
"It would have been easier," said the colonel, "but security thought it better
to transfer the craft to its launching sight up here in these deserted hills. We
are going to make our take-off from here because we are still too
experimental to know what might happen if something kicked up or if the
engines failed. We'd hate to splatter all over a highly populated industrial
area. Besides, you must know, if you looked over those papers yesterday,
that there's a lot of radioactive stuff here."
Burl nodded. Detmar cut in. "Why don't we get aboard and show him over
the ship? It will be easier to make it clear that way."
Suiting action to the word, the three went over to one of the loading
platforms, climbed on the wiry little elevator, and were hoisted up fifty feet
to the port in the side of the ship. They entered well below the vast,
overhanging equatorial bulge which marked the wide end of the teardrop-
shaped vessel.
Page 38
They walked through a narrow plastic-walled passage, broken in several
places by tight, round doors bearing storage vault numbers. At the end of
the passage they came to a double-walled metal air lock. They stepped
through and found themselves in what was evidently the living quarters of
the spaceship.
The Magellan was an entirely revolutionary design as far as space vehicles
were concerned. Its odd shape was no mere whimsy, but a practical model.
If a better design were to be invented, it would only come out of the
practical experiences of this first great flight.
It had long been known, ever since Einstein's early equations, that there was
a kinship between electricity, magnetism, and gravitation. In electricity and
magnetism there were both negative and positive fields manifesting
themselves in the form of attraction and repulsion. These opposing
characteristics were the basis for man's mastery of electrical machinery.
But for gravitation, there had seemed at first no means of manipulating it.
As it was to develop, this was due to two factors. First, the Earth itself
possessed a gravitational phenomenon in this force outside of that intense,
all-pervading field. Second, to overcome this primal force required the
application of energy on such scales as could not be found outside of the
mastery of nuclear energy.
There was a simple parallel, Burl had been told the day before by Sam
Oberfield, in the history of aviation. A practical, propeller-driven flying
machine could not be constructed until a motor had been invented that was
compact, light and powerful enough to operate it. So all efforts to make
such machines prior to the development of the internal combustion engine
in the first days of the twentieth century were doomed to failure. Likewise,
in this new instance, a machine to utilize gravitation could not be built until
a source of power was developed having the capacity to run it. Such power
was found only in the successful harnessing of the hydrogen disintegration
explosion—the H-bomb force. The first success at channeling this nuclear
power in a nonbomb device had been accomplished in England in 1958.
The Zeta-ring generator had been perfected in the next decade.
Only this source of harnessed atomic power could supply the force
necessary to drive an A-G ship.
places by tight, round doors bearing storage vault numbers. At the end of
the passage they came to a double-walled metal air lock. They stepped
through and found themselves in what was evidently the living quarters of
the spaceship.
The Magellan was an entirely revolutionary design as far as space vehicles
were concerned. Its odd shape was no mere whimsy, but a practical model.
If a better design were to be invented, it would only come out of the
practical experiences of this first great flight.
It had long been known, ever since Einstein's early equations, that there was
a kinship between electricity, magnetism, and gravitation. In electricity and
magnetism there were both negative and positive fields manifesting
themselves in the form of attraction and repulsion. These opposing
characteristics were the basis for man's mastery of electrical machinery.
But for gravitation, there had seemed at first no means of manipulating it.
As it was to develop, this was due to two factors. First, the Earth itself
possessed a gravitational phenomenon in this force outside of that intense,
all-pervading field. Second, to overcome this primal force required the
application of energy on such scales as could not be found outside of the
mastery of nuclear energy.
There was a simple parallel, Burl had been told the day before by Sam
Oberfield, in the history of aviation. A practical, propeller-driven flying
machine could not be constructed until a motor had been invented that was
compact, light and powerful enough to operate it. So all efforts to make
such machines prior to the development of the internal combustion engine
in the first days of the twentieth century were doomed to failure. Likewise,
in this new instance, a machine to utilize gravitation could not be built until
a source of power was developed having the capacity to run it. Such power
was found only in the successful harnessing of the hydrogen disintegration
explosion—the H-bomb force. The first success at channeling this nuclear
power in a nonbomb device had been accomplished in England in 1958.
The Zeta-ring generator had been perfected in the next decade.
Only this source of harnessed atomic power could supply the force
necessary to drive an A-G ship.
Page 39
The nose of the Magellan housed an H-power stellar generator. Within the
bulk of the top third of the ship was this massive power source, its atomic
components, its uranium-hydrogen fuel, and the beam that channeled the
gravitational drive.
"Negating gravity is not a simple matter like inventing a magic sheet of
metal that cuts off the pull of the Earth, such as H. G. Wells wrote about,"
Oberfield had explained. "That is impossible because it ignores all the other
laws of nature; it forgets the power of inertia, it denies the facts of mass and
density. It takes just as much energy to lift an anti-gravity ship as to lift a
rocketship. The difference is only in the practicality of the power source. A
rocketship must burn its fuel by chemical explosion in order to push its
cargo load upward. Its fuel is limited by its own weight and by the
awkwardness of its handling. This A-G ship also must supply energy, foot-
pound for foot-pound, for every foot it raises the vehicle. But due to the
amount of energy supplied by this new nuclear generator, such power is at
last available in one compact form and in such concentration that this ship
could propel itself for hundreds of years."
He went on to explain that what then happened was that the vessel, exerting
a tremendous counter-gravitational force, literally pushed itself up against
Earth's drive. At the same time, this force could be used to intensify the
gravitational pull of some other celestial body. The vessel would begin to
fall toward that other body, and be repelled from the first body—Earth in
this case.
As every star, planet, and satellite in the universe was exerting a pull on
every other one, the anti-gravity spaceship literally reached out, grasped
hold of the desired gravitational "rope" hanging down from the sky, and
pulled itself up it. It would seem to fall upward into the sky. It could
increase or decrease the effect of its fall. It could fall free toward some
other world, or it could force an acceleration in its fall by adding repulsion
from the world it was leaving.
In flight, therefore, the wide nose was the front. It would fall through space,
pulled by the power beam generated from this front. The rear of the
spaceship was the tapering, small end.
bulk of the top third of the ship was this massive power source, its atomic
components, its uranium-hydrogen fuel, and the beam that channeled the
gravitational drive.
"Negating gravity is not a simple matter like inventing a magic sheet of
metal that cuts off the pull of the Earth, such as H. G. Wells wrote about,"
Oberfield had explained. "That is impossible because it ignores all the other
laws of nature; it forgets the power of inertia, it denies the facts of mass and
density. It takes just as much energy to lift an anti-gravity ship as to lift a
rocketship. The difference is only in the practicality of the power source. A
rocketship must burn its fuel by chemical explosion in order to push its
cargo load upward. Its fuel is limited by its own weight and by the
awkwardness of its handling. This A-G ship also must supply energy, foot-
pound for foot-pound, for every foot it raises the vehicle. But due to the
amount of energy supplied by this new nuclear generator, such power is at
last available in one compact form and in such concentration that this ship
could propel itself for hundreds of years."
He went on to explain that what then happened was that the vessel, exerting
a tremendous counter-gravitational force, literally pushed itself up against
Earth's drive. At the same time, this force could be used to intensify the
gravitational pull of some other celestial body. The vessel would begin to
fall toward that other body, and be repelled from the first body—Earth in
this case.
As every star, planet, and satellite in the universe was exerting a pull on
every other one, the anti-gravity spaceship literally reached out, grasped
hold of the desired gravitational "rope" hanging down from the sky, and
pulled itself up it. It would seem to fall upward into the sky. It could
increase or decrease the effect of its fall. It could fall free toward some
other world, or it could force an acceleration in its fall by adding repulsion
from the world it was leaving.
In flight, therefore, the wide nose was the front. It would fall through space,
pulled by the power beam generated from this front. The rear of the
spaceship was the tapering, small end.
Page 40
As Burl was shown over the living quarters it became plain to him that the
actual living spaces in the Magellan were inside a metal sphere hanging on
gymbals below the equatorial bulge that housed the power drive. The bulk
of this sphere was always well within the outer walls of the teardrop, and
thus protected from radiation. Being suspended on gymbals, the sphere
would rotate so that the floor of the living quarters was always downward to
wherever the greatest pull of gravity might happen to be.
Burl and the others explored the three floors that divided the inner sphere,
all oriented toward Earth. The central floor, housing the sleeping quarters
and living quarters, was compact but roomier than might have been
expected. There were five bunkrooms, each shared by two men. There was
a main living and dining room. On the lowermost floor was the cookroom, a
small dispensary, and immediate supplies. On the upper floor was the
control room, with its charts and television viewplates which allowed vision
in all directions from sending plates fixed on the surface in various areas.
In the spaces between the inner sphere and the outer shell were the basic
storage areas. Here supplies and equipment were being stocked against all
possible emergencies. In the tapering space of the tail below the sphere was
a rocket-launching tube. Stored in the outer shells were various vehicles for
planetary exploration.
Haines came into the control room where the three were standing. He was
wiping his hands on a piece of cloth, and looked tired. "Finally got the
special, sealed-engine jeep stowed away," he said. "I was afraid we weren't
going to get it in time. The Moon-base people had ordered it, and they're
going to holler bloody murder when they find out we appropriated it."
Lockhart shrugged. "Let 'em yell. It'll be too late when they find out. How
much longer will we need before you finish the loading?"
Haines drew a chair up to the chart table and sat down. "I expect to get
some more stuff tomorrow, and then the two-man rocket plane the next day.
We already have the four-man rocket aboard. That'll do it. The rest of your
men ready?"
Lockhart nodded. "We're just about set. Denning here can take a quick trip
home tomorrow, and we'll be ready the day after."
actual living spaces in the Magellan were inside a metal sphere hanging on
gymbals below the equatorial bulge that housed the power drive. The bulk
of this sphere was always well within the outer walls of the teardrop, and
thus protected from radiation. Being suspended on gymbals, the sphere
would rotate so that the floor of the living quarters was always downward to
wherever the greatest pull of gravity might happen to be.
Burl and the others explored the three floors that divided the inner sphere,
all oriented toward Earth. The central floor, housing the sleeping quarters
and living quarters, was compact but roomier than might have been
expected. There were five bunkrooms, each shared by two men. There was
a main living and dining room. On the lowermost floor was the cookroom, a
small dispensary, and immediate supplies. On the upper floor was the
control room, with its charts and television viewplates which allowed vision
in all directions from sending plates fixed on the surface in various areas.
In the spaces between the inner sphere and the outer shell were the basic
storage areas. Here supplies and equipment were being stocked against all
possible emergencies. In the tapering space of the tail below the sphere was
a rocket-launching tube. Stored in the outer shells were various vehicles for
planetary exploration.
Haines came into the control room where the three were standing. He was
wiping his hands on a piece of cloth, and looked tired. "Finally got the
special, sealed-engine jeep stowed away," he said. "I was afraid we weren't
going to get it in time. The Moon-base people had ordered it, and they're
going to holler bloody murder when they find out we appropriated it."
Lockhart shrugged. "Let 'em yell. It'll be too late when they find out. How
much longer will we need before you finish the loading?"
Haines drew a chair up to the chart table and sat down. "I expect to get
some more stuff tomorrow, and then the two-man rocket plane the next day.
We already have the four-man rocket aboard. That'll do it. The rest of your
men ready?"
Lockhart nodded. "We're just about set. Denning here can take a quick trip
home tomorrow, and we'll be ready the day after."
Page 41
Burl looked about him quickly. One day, two days, maybe a third—and
then, the plunge into the unknown. Detmar reached upward and drew down
a metal ladder hanging in the curved ceiling of the chamber. "I'm going to
take a look in the engine room," he said. "Want to come along?" he asked
Burl.
Before the young man could say yes, Lockhart shook his head. "No, I don't
want him to. I don't want anyone going up there who doesn't have to. That
stuff is shielded, but you can never be sure."
Burl was disappointed, for he had wanted to see the nuclear generators. But
Detmar shook his head, smiled, and pushed aside a round trap door in the
ceiling. Burl could see that it connected with a similar door a foot higher.
Detmar pushed it open and ascended into the forbidden sphere of the Zeta-
rings. Burl got a glimpse of subdued, bluish light, and then the trap door
shut after the engineer.
Later as they drove out through the valley, Burl looked back at the huge
ship, and now, instead of appearing like an overhanging metal waterfall, he
saw it as a wide-nosed bullet, aiming at the sky, surging against its bonds—
a bullet for humanity's sake.
then, the plunge into the unknown. Detmar reached upward and drew down
a metal ladder hanging in the curved ceiling of the chamber. "I'm going to
take a look in the engine room," he said. "Want to come along?" he asked
Burl.
Before the young man could say yes, Lockhart shook his head. "No, I don't
want him to. I don't want anyone going up there who doesn't have to. That
stuff is shielded, but you can never be sure."
Burl was disappointed, for he had wanted to see the nuclear generators. But
Detmar shook his head, smiled, and pushed aside a round trap door in the
ceiling. Burl could see that it connected with a similar door a foot higher.
Detmar pushed it open and ascended into the forbidden sphere of the Zeta-
rings. Burl got a glimpse of subdued, bluish light, and then the trap door
shut after the engineer.
Later as they drove out through the valley, Burl looked back at the huge
ship, and now, instead of appearing like an overhanging metal waterfall, he
saw it as a wide-nosed bullet, aiming at the sky, surging against its bonds—
a bullet for humanity's sake.
Page 42
Chapter 5.
Up the Rope of Space
Burl's visit home was a curious interlude. Actually, he had been away only a
few weeks, since the summer vacation had begun, yet this single day had an
air about it different from that of any other homecoming. He found himself
continually looking at things in a more inquisitive, more thoughtful manner.
That which had been commonplace was suddenly something valuable, a
sight to be treasured. For he had realized, as he sat in the fast plane
transporting him home, that the Earth was itself a planet among planets, and
that this might possibly prove to be his last visit to the town where he had
been born. He had pondered, as he had gazed out of the ship's windows, just
what it could mean to depart from this world and travel among the
uncharted reaches of empty and hostile space ... to set foot upon planets
where no human foot had ever touched and to meet unguessable perils.
So his home, his mother, his friends, the street on which he lived, took on a
novel air. He studied them while enjoying a quiet day at home. He watched
the cars in the street, so amusingly compact and small, each designed in the
fleeting style of the year. The cars of a dozen years ago had been designed
for length and size, but the trend had been the opposite for a decade now.
The cars grew smaller and their lines weirder as the manufacturers strove to
compete.
What other planet could boast of such simultaneously astonishing ingenuity
and wondrous tomfoolery?
He looked at the people going about their business, the other boys of his age
intent on their summer jobs and summer fun, and wondered if he would
ever be able to join them again without the cares of a world on his
shoulders?
People were unaware of the crisis that hung over the solar system. There
had been news of the dimming of the Sun, but the meaning behind it had
been carefully screened, and the expedition was a top secret. It availed the
Up the Rope of Space
Burl's visit home was a curious interlude. Actually, he had been away only a
few weeks, since the summer vacation had begun, yet this single day had an
air about it different from that of any other homecoming. He found himself
continually looking at things in a more inquisitive, more thoughtful manner.
That which had been commonplace was suddenly something valuable, a
sight to be treasured. For he had realized, as he sat in the fast plane
transporting him home, that the Earth was itself a planet among planets, and
that this might possibly prove to be his last visit to the town where he had
been born. He had pondered, as he had gazed out of the ship's windows, just
what it could mean to depart from this world and travel among the
uncharted reaches of empty and hostile space ... to set foot upon planets
where no human foot had ever touched and to meet unguessable perils.
So his home, his mother, his friends, the street on which he lived, took on a
novel air. He studied them while enjoying a quiet day at home. He watched
the cars in the street, so amusingly compact and small, each designed in the
fleeting style of the year. The cars of a dozen years ago had been designed
for length and size, but the trend had been the opposite for a decade now.
The cars grew smaller and their lines weirder as the manufacturers strove to
compete.
What other planet could boast of such simultaneously astonishing ingenuity
and wondrous tomfoolery?
He looked at the people going about their business, the other boys of his age
intent on their summer jobs and summer fun, and wondered if he would
ever be able to join them again without the cares of a world on his
shoulders?
People were unaware of the crisis that hung over the solar system. There
had been news of the dimming of the Sun, but the meaning behind it had
been carefully screened, and the expedition was a top secret. It availed the
Page 43
world nothing to panic about this matter. Now the odd weather quirks had
been forgotten, and the main subjects on people's tongues were the baseball
scores and the latest telemovies.
When Burl kissed his mother and father good-by, it was with a sense that he
was also kissing good-by to his youth, and entering upon a new period of
the most desperate responsibility.
This mood lingered with him back at the base, although his companions of
the trip to come seemingly did not share it. On the last day, quarters had
been assigned in the Magellan, and the men moved their belongings to their
tight bunks in the heart of the ship. Clyde had his way, and he and Burl
shared a double-decker chamber.
There was a hustle and bustle in the valley. The supplies seemed unending,
and Burl wondered why the variety. "For once, we've got lifting power to
spare," was Russ's comment. "Nobody knows what we're going to need on
the various planets, so Lockhart is simply piling aboard everything he can
think of. You'd be amazed at the space we have for storage. And Caton says
that the more we stick in there, the better the shielding is against the
radiation belt surrounding Earth—and probably the other planets as well."
"I thought we were already well protected," said Burl. "With the atomic
generators, we had to be shielded anyway. Haven't we lead lining all around
our inner sphere quarters?"
Russell Clyde nodded. "Oh, sure, but the more the merrier."
He and Burl were already in their quarters, stowing their clothes. "We leave
in an hour," said Burl. "Are we going to the launching base at Boothia,
where the manned rockets go up?"
Clyde shook his head. "Lockhart talked it over with us yesterday, and we
decided to take off from right here." By "us," Burl knew the operational
group was meant, which consisted of the colonel, the two astronomers,
Caton as head of the engineering section, and Haines, "To tell the truth,
nobody knows how easily this ship will handle. We're shielded well enough
so that a short passage through the radiation belt three hundred miles up and
for the next fifteen hundred miles shouldn't have any effect on us at all. The
rockets, which can't be shielded because of the weight limitations, have to
been forgotten, and the main subjects on people's tongues were the baseball
scores and the latest telemovies.
When Burl kissed his mother and father good-by, it was with a sense that he
was also kissing good-by to his youth, and entering upon a new period of
the most desperate responsibility.
This mood lingered with him back at the base, although his companions of
the trip to come seemingly did not share it. On the last day, quarters had
been assigned in the Magellan, and the men moved their belongings to their
tight bunks in the heart of the ship. Clyde had his way, and he and Burl
shared a double-decker chamber.
There was a hustle and bustle in the valley. The supplies seemed unending,
and Burl wondered why the variety. "For once, we've got lifting power to
spare," was Russ's comment. "Nobody knows what we're going to need on
the various planets, so Lockhart is simply piling aboard everything he can
think of. You'd be amazed at the space we have for storage. And Caton says
that the more we stick in there, the better the shielding is against the
radiation belt surrounding Earth—and probably the other planets as well."
"I thought we were already well protected," said Burl. "With the atomic
generators, we had to be shielded anyway. Haven't we lead lining all around
our inner sphere quarters?"
Russell Clyde nodded. "Oh, sure, but the more the merrier."
He and Burl were already in their quarters, stowing their clothes. "We leave
in an hour," said Burl. "Are we going to the launching base at Boothia,
where the manned rockets go up?"
Clyde shook his head. "Lockhart talked it over with us yesterday, and we
decided to take off from right here." By "us," Burl knew the operational
group was meant, which consisted of the colonel, the two astronomers,
Caton as head of the engineering section, and Haines, "To tell the truth,
nobody knows how easily this ship will handle. We're shielded well enough
so that a short passage through the radiation belt three hundred miles up and
for the next fifteen hundred miles shouldn't have any effect on us at all. The
rockets, which can't be shielded because of the weight limitations, have to
Page 44
go up at Boothia because there, at the North Magnetic Pole, there's a hole in
the radiation."
Boothia Peninsula was a barren spot far up in the Arctic Zone on Canada's
frozen eastern coast. On it was constructed the world's major space port—a
lonely outpost from which rockets departed for the equally lonely Moon
bases. Burl had read about it and had looked forward to seeing it, but
realized that the flight of the Magellan marked still another change in the
fast-altering history of the conquest of space.
The hour passed quickly. The little valley was cleared of visitors. The crew
was called to take-off posts—Lockhart at the controls, Clyde and Oberfield
at the charts, Detmar watching the energy output. The rest of the crew had
been strapped into their bunks. By special request, Burl was observing in
the control room, seated in a half-reclining position like the others, in a
well-padded chair, strapped tight.
Haines had remarked as he had supervised the strapping-in, "Nobody
knows whether this is going to be necessary. But we're taking no chances."
He'd gone to his quarters and done the same thing.
Lockhart watched the registering of the dials in front of him, waiting for the
load to build up. There was a muffled whine from overhead as the
generators built up current. Detmar called out a cryptic number every few
seconds and the colonel checked it. The two astronomers were idle,
watching their viewers. They'd made their calculations long before.
"Time," called out the colonel, pressing a button. A gong rang throughout
the quarters. He moved a lever slowly.
Burl waited for the surge of pressure he had read always occurred at take-
off. But there was no such pressure. He lay back in his seat, gripping the
arms. Gradually he became aware of a curious sensation. He seemed to be
getting lightheaded, and to tingle with unexpected energy. He felt an
impulse to giggle, and he kicked up his foot to find it surprisingly agile.
About him the others were stirring in their seats as if caught by the same
impulses.
Now he felt loose against his bonds and he became a little dizzy. There was
a pounding in his head as blood surged within him. His heart began to beat
the radiation."
Boothia Peninsula was a barren spot far up in the Arctic Zone on Canada's
frozen eastern coast. On it was constructed the world's major space port—a
lonely outpost from which rockets departed for the equally lonely Moon
bases. Burl had read about it and had looked forward to seeing it, but
realized that the flight of the Magellan marked still another change in the
fast-altering history of the conquest of space.
The hour passed quickly. The little valley was cleared of visitors. The crew
was called to take-off posts—Lockhart at the controls, Clyde and Oberfield
at the charts, Detmar watching the energy output. The rest of the crew had
been strapped into their bunks. By special request, Burl was observing in
the control room, seated in a half-reclining position like the others, in a
well-padded chair, strapped tight.
Haines had remarked as he had supervised the strapping-in, "Nobody
knows whether this is going to be necessary. But we're taking no chances."
He'd gone to his quarters and done the same thing.
Lockhart watched the registering of the dials in front of him, waiting for the
load to build up. There was a muffled whine from overhead as the
generators built up current. Detmar called out a cryptic number every few
seconds and the colonel checked it. The two astronomers were idle,
watching their viewers. They'd made their calculations long before.
"Time," called out the colonel, pressing a button. A gong rang throughout
the quarters. He moved a lever slowly.
Burl waited for the surge of pressure he had read always occurred at take-
off. But there was no such pressure. He lay back in his seat, gripping the
arms. Gradually he became aware of a curious sensation. He seemed to be
getting lightheaded, and to tingle with unexpected energy. He felt an
impulse to giggle, and he kicked up his foot to find it surprisingly agile.
About him the others were stirring in their seats as if caught by the same
impulses.
Now he felt loose against his bonds and he became a little dizzy. There was
a pounding in his head as blood surged within him. His heart began to beat
Page 45
heavily.
"We're losing weight," muttered Clyde from his chair, and Burl knew the
ship was tensing to take off.
The great generators were beginning to push against Earth's gravity and, as
their force moved upward to match Earth's, the weight of everything in their
sway decreased accordingly. Lockhart's first move was simply that—to
reduce the pull of Earth to zero.
In a few moments that point was accomplished. A state of weightlessness
was obtained within the Magellan. Those watching outside from bunkers in
the surrounding mountains saw the huge teardrop shiver and begin to rise
slowly above its cradle of girders. It floated gently upward, moving slowly
off as the force of Earth's centrifugal drive began to manifest itself against
the metal bubble's great mass.
Everyone on the crew had experienced zero gravity, either in the same tests
Burl had undergone or on actual satellite flights, and thus far, no one was
too uncomfortable. The entire structure of the ship quivered, and Burl
realized that the inner sphere which housed their air space was hanging free
on its gymbals.
Lockhart rang a second gong, then turned a new control. The pitch of the
generators, faintly audible to them, changed, took on a new keening. The
ship seemed suddenly to jump as if something had grasped it. The feeling of
weightlessness vanished momentarily, then there was a moment of
dizziness and a sudden sensation of being upside down.
For a shocking instant, Burl felt himself hanging head downward from a
floor which had surprisingly turned into a ceiling. He opened his mouth to
shout, for he thought he was about to plunge onto the hard metal of the
ceiling which now hung below him so precipitously.
Then there was a whirling sensation, a sideways twisting that swung him
about against the straps. As it came, the room seemed to shift. The curved
base of the control room, which had been so suddenly a floor, became in a
moment a wall, lopsided and eerie. Then it shifted again, and, startlingly,
Burl sagged back into his cushioned seat as the hemispherical room again
resumed its normal aspect.
"We're losing weight," muttered Clyde from his chair, and Burl knew the
ship was tensing to take off.
The great generators were beginning to push against Earth's gravity and, as
their force moved upward to match Earth's, the weight of everything in their
sway decreased accordingly. Lockhart's first move was simply that—to
reduce the pull of Earth to zero.
In a few moments that point was accomplished. A state of weightlessness
was obtained within the Magellan. Those watching outside from bunkers in
the surrounding mountains saw the huge teardrop shiver and begin to rise
slowly above its cradle of girders. It floated gently upward, moving slowly
off as the force of Earth's centrifugal drive began to manifest itself against
the metal bubble's great mass.
Everyone on the crew had experienced zero gravity, either in the same tests
Burl had undergone or on actual satellite flights, and thus far, no one was
too uncomfortable. The entire structure of the ship quivered, and Burl
realized that the inner sphere which housed their air space was hanging free
on its gymbals.
Lockhart rang a second gong, then turned a new control. The pitch of the
generators, faintly audible to them, changed, took on a new keening. The
ship seemed suddenly to jump as if something had grasped it. The feeling of
weightlessness vanished momentarily, then there was a moment of
dizziness and a sudden sensation of being upside down.
For a shocking instant, Burl felt himself hanging head downward from a
floor which had surprisingly turned into a ceiling. He opened his mouth to
shout, for he thought he was about to plunge onto the hard metal of the
ceiling which now hung below him so precipitously.
Then there was a whirling sensation, a sideways twisting that swung him
about against the straps. As it came, the room seemed to shift. The curved
base of the control room, which had been so suddenly a floor, became in a
moment a wall, lopsided and eerie. Then it shifted again, and, startlingly,
Burl sagged back into his cushioned seat as the hemispherical room again
resumed its normal aspect.
Page 46
Lockhart bent over the controls, cautiously moving a lever bit by bit. Clyde
was bent over his viewer, calling out slight corrections.
Now, at last, Burl felt the pressure he had expected. His weight grew
steadily greater, back to normal, then increased. He found himself
concentrating on his breathing, forcing his lungs up against the increasing
weight of his ribs.
"Hold up," his buzzing eardrums heard someone say—possibly Oberfield.
"We don't need to accelerate more than one g. Take it easy."
The weight lessened instantly. Then the pressure was off. Everything
seemed normal. Lockhart sat back and began to unloosen his straps. The
others followed suit.
In one viewer, Burl glimpsed the black of outer space, and in another, the
wide grayish-green bowl of the Earth spreading out below. In a third he saw
the blazing disc of the Sun.
"Did everything go all right?" he asked quietly of Clyde.
The redhead looked up at him and smiled. "Better than we might have
expected for a first flight," he said.
"We're latching on to the Sun's grip now. We're falling toward the Sun; not
just falling, but pulling ourselves faster toward it, so that we can keep up a
normal gravity pressure. We're soon going to be going faster than any
rocket has ever gone. The living-space sphere rotated itself as soon as we
started that. That's what made everything seem upside down that time and
why everything has come back to normal."
Burl nodded. "But that means that in relation to Earth we are ourselves
upside down right now!"
"Of course," said Clyde. "But in space, everything is strictly relative. We
are no longer on Earth. We are a separate body in space, falling through
space toward the Sun."
"Why the Sun?" asked Burl. "I thought our first objective was to be the
planet Venus?"
was bent over his viewer, calling out slight corrections.
Now, at last, Burl felt the pressure he had expected. His weight grew
steadily greater, back to normal, then increased. He found himself
concentrating on his breathing, forcing his lungs up against the increasing
weight of his ribs.
"Hold up," his buzzing eardrums heard someone say—possibly Oberfield.
"We don't need to accelerate more than one g. Take it easy."
The weight lessened instantly. Then the pressure was off. Everything
seemed normal. Lockhart sat back and began to unloosen his straps. The
others followed suit.
In one viewer, Burl glimpsed the black of outer space, and in another, the
wide grayish-green bowl of the Earth spreading out below. In a third he saw
the blazing disc of the Sun.
"Did everything go all right?" he asked quietly of Clyde.
The redhead looked up at him and smiled. "Better than we might have
expected for a first flight," he said.
"We're latching on to the Sun's grip now. We're falling toward the Sun; not
just falling, but pulling ourselves faster toward it, so that we can keep up a
normal gravity pressure. We're soon going to be going faster than any
rocket has ever gone. The living-space sphere rotated itself as soon as we
started that. That's what made everything seem upside down that time and
why everything has come back to normal."
Burl nodded. "But that means that in relation to Earth we are ourselves
upside down right now!"
"Of course," said Clyde. "But in space, everything is strictly relative. We
are no longer on Earth. We are a separate body in space, falling through
space toward the Sun."
"Why the Sun?" asked Burl. "I thought our first objective was to be the
planet Venus?"
Page 47
"It was too hard to get a fix on Venus from so near the Earth. Instead, we
latched on to the Sun to pull us inward. When we are near to Venus' orbit,
we'll reverse and pull in on Venus," was the astronomer's answer.
"Isn't that rather risky?" asked Burl, remembering some of the quick
briefings he had been given. "That's a departure from your plans."
Lockhart looked up quickly. "Yes, you're right," he admitted. "But on a trip
like this we've got to learn to improvise and do it fast. We made that
decision at take-off."
For an instant Burl felt a chill. He realized then what all the other men on
the ship had known all along—that in this flight they were all amateurs, that
everything they did was to be improvisation in one way or another, that they
must always run the risk of a terrible mistake.
Had latching on to the Sun been the first such error?
latched on to the Sun to pull us inward. When we are near to Venus' orbit,
we'll reverse and pull in on Venus," was the astronomer's answer.
"Isn't that rather risky?" asked Burl, remembering some of the quick
briefings he had been given. "That's a departure from your plans."
Lockhart looked up quickly. "Yes, you're right," he admitted. "But on a trip
like this we've got to learn to improvise and do it fast. We made that
decision at take-off."
For an instant Burl felt a chill. He realized then what all the other men on
the ship had known all along—that in this flight they were all amateurs, that
everything they did was to be improvisation in one way or another, that they
must always run the risk of a terrible mistake.
Had latching on to the Sun been the first such error?
Page 48
Chapter 6.
Sunward Ho!
Gradually the ship settled down to routine. There was, as Burl discovered,
nothing very much to do for most of the crew on such a space flight. The
course was charted in advance, a pattern laid out that would carry the ship
falling toward its objective—falling in a narrow curving orbit. A certain
amount of time would pass during which the ship would traverse a specific
section of this plotted route at a certain rate of speed or acceleration.
Then, at a specified moment, the speed would be checked, the attraction of
the Sun reversed, and the ship would attempt to brake itself and to halt its
fall toward the great Sun. At such a time as its fall came to a stop, it should,
if the calculations had been correct, be crossing the orbit of the planet Venus
in the same place and at about the same moment that Venus itself would be.
In that way, the ship would arrive at the planet.
Now all these calculations had been made, and once made, set into motion
on the control panels of the ship. The interval of many days between
actually left little to do, except for making astronomical observations,
checking on the performance of the stellarators, setting a watch against the
damage caused by meteors and micro-meteors, and following the ordinary
procedures of meals and sleep periods. The men set up an Earth-time
schedule of twenty-four hours, divided the crew into three eight-hour shifts,
and conducted themselves accordingly.
Burl did not find time weighing on his hands. Despite the limited space
available to the ten men, there was always something to learn, and
something to think about.
When Russell Clyde was off duty, he spent much time with Burl at the
wide-screen viewers that showed the black depths of interplanetary space
surrounding them. The Earth dwindled to a brilliant green disc, while ahead
of them the narrow crescent of approaching Venus could be seen growing
gradually. Ruddy Mars was sharp but tiny, a point of russet beyond the
Sunward Ho!
Gradually the ship settled down to routine. There was, as Burl discovered,
nothing very much to do for most of the crew on such a space flight. The
course was charted in advance, a pattern laid out that would carry the ship
falling toward its objective—falling in a narrow curving orbit. A certain
amount of time would pass during which the ship would traverse a specific
section of this plotted route at a certain rate of speed or acceleration.
Then, at a specified moment, the speed would be checked, the attraction of
the Sun reversed, and the ship would attempt to brake itself and to halt its
fall toward the great Sun. At such a time as its fall came to a stop, it should,
if the calculations had been correct, be crossing the orbit of the planet Venus
in the same place and at about the same moment that Venus itself would be.
In that way, the ship would arrive at the planet.
Now all these calculations had been made, and once made, set into motion
on the control panels of the ship. The interval of many days between
actually left little to do, except for making astronomical observations,
checking on the performance of the stellarators, setting a watch against the
damage caused by meteors and micro-meteors, and following the ordinary
procedures of meals and sleep periods. The men set up an Earth-time
schedule of twenty-four hours, divided the crew into three eight-hour shifts,
and conducted themselves accordingly.
Burl did not find time weighing on his hands. Despite the limited space
available to the ten men, there was always something to learn, and
something to think about.
When Russell Clyde was off duty, he spent much time with Burl at the
wide-screen viewers that showed the black depths of interplanetary space
surrounding them. The Earth dwindled to a brilliant green disc, while ahead
of them the narrow crescent of approaching Venus could be seen growing
gradually. Ruddy Mars was sharp but tiny, a point of russet beyond the
Page 49
green of Earth. And the stars—never had Burl seen so many stars—a
firmament ablaze with brilliant little points of light—the millions of suns of
the galaxy and the galaxies beyond ours.
On the other side, the side toward which they fell, the Sun was a blinding
sphere of white light, its huge coronal flames wavering fearfully around its
orb.
Seen to one side, surprisingly close to the Sun, was a tiny half-moon.
"That's Mercury," said Russ, pointing it out. "The smallest planet and the
closest to the Sun. After we leave Venus, we'll have to visit it. We know
there's a Sun-tap station there—and because it's so close to the Sun—its
orbit ranges between twenty-eight million miles and under forty-four
million miles—the station must be a most important and large one."
Burl gazed at the point of light that was the innermost planet. "Those Sun-
tap stations ... The more I think about it, the more I wonder what we're up
against. It seems to me that it ought to be easy for the kind of people who
can build such things to catch us and stop us. In fact, I wonder why they
haven't already gone after us for stopping the one on Earth?"
Russ whistled softly between his teeth. "We've some ideas about that. The
military boys worked on it. You know you can figure out a lot of things
from just a few bits of evidence. We have such evidence from what
happened to you on Earth. You ought to speak to Haines about it."
Burl turned away from the viewer. "Let's find him now. I don't think he's
very busy. He said something about catching up on his reading this period."
Russ nodded, and the two of them got up from their seat. With a wave to
Oberfield and Caton on duty at the controls, the two climbed down the
ladder that led into the middle part of the living space. They looked into
Haines's quarters but he wasn't there. So they went down the next hatchway
into the lower section.
Haines and Ferrati were sitting at a table in the cooking quarters, drinking
coffee. The two men, both heavy and muscular, used to the open spaces and
the feel of the winds, were taking the enforced confinement in the cramped
and artificially oxygenated space of the ship with ill ease. For them, it was
like a stretch in jail.
firmament ablaze with brilliant little points of light—the millions of suns of
the galaxy and the galaxies beyond ours.
On the other side, the side toward which they fell, the Sun was a blinding
sphere of white light, its huge coronal flames wavering fearfully around its
orb.
Seen to one side, surprisingly close to the Sun, was a tiny half-moon.
"That's Mercury," said Russ, pointing it out. "The smallest planet and the
closest to the Sun. After we leave Venus, we'll have to visit it. We know
there's a Sun-tap station there—and because it's so close to the Sun—its
orbit ranges between twenty-eight million miles and under forty-four
million miles—the station must be a most important and large one."
Burl gazed at the point of light that was the innermost planet. "Those Sun-
tap stations ... The more I think about it, the more I wonder what we're up
against. It seems to me that it ought to be easy for the kind of people who
can build such things to catch us and stop us. In fact, I wonder why they
haven't already gone after us for stopping the one on Earth?"
Russ whistled softly between his teeth. "We've some ideas about that. The
military boys worked on it. You know you can figure out a lot of things
from just a few bits of evidence. We have such evidence from what
happened to you on Earth. You ought to speak to Haines about it."
Burl turned away from the viewer. "Let's find him now. I don't think he's
very busy. He said something about catching up on his reading this period."
Russ nodded, and the two of them got up from their seat. With a wave to
Oberfield and Caton on duty at the controls, the two climbed down the
ladder that led into the middle part of the living space. They looked into
Haines's quarters but he wasn't there. So they went down the next hatchway
into the lower section.
Haines and Ferrati were sitting at a table in the cooking quarters, drinking
coffee. The two men, both heavy and muscular, used to the open spaces and
the feel of the winds, were taking the enforced confinement in the cramped
and artificially oxygenated space of the ship with ill ease. For them, it was
like a stretch in jail.
Page 50
They greeted the two younger men jovially and invited them to a seat.
While Russ poured a cup of coffee for himself, Burl opened the subject of
how much the expedition had worked out about the enemy.
Haines's pale blue eyes gleamed. "You can know an awful lot about an
enemy if you know what he didn't do as well as what he did do. If you
figure out what you yourself should have done under the same
circumstances, and know he didn't do, why, that gives you some valuable
hints as to his deficiencies. As we see it, we've got a fighting chance of
spoiling his game. Certainly of spoiling it long enough to allow Earth
several more years to get a fleet of ships like this into operation and give
him plenty of trouble."
Suddenly Burl felt more cheerful. At the back of his mind there had been a
carefully concealed point of cold terror—he remembered the clean
efficiency of the Sun-tap station, the evidence of a science far beyond that
of Earth. He pressed the point. "Just what do we really know?"
Haines leaned back and rubbed his hands together. "There were several
things that gave their weaknesses away. When we put it all together, we
decided that the enemy represents some sort of limited advanced force or
scouting group of a civilization still too far away to count in the immediate
future. We decided that the enemy isn't too aware of our present abilities—
that his intelligence service is poor as far as modern Earth is concerned. We
figure he won't be able to act with any speed to repair the damages we
make."
"Tell them how we worked that out," said Ferrati, who had begun to grow
again the short black beard that Burl remembered he had worn on his
famous expeditions.
"Well," said Haines, drawing the word out to build up suspense, "did you
know that the station in the Andes, the one you cracked open, was built at
least thirty years ago? And never put into operation in all that time?"
Burl was surprised. "Why ... I hadn't thought of it—but it could have been.
That valley was so isolated and deserted, probably nobody would ever have
spotted it.
While Russ poured a cup of coffee for himself, Burl opened the subject of
how much the expedition had worked out about the enemy.
Haines's pale blue eyes gleamed. "You can know an awful lot about an
enemy if you know what he didn't do as well as what he did do. If you
figure out what you yourself should have done under the same
circumstances, and know he didn't do, why, that gives you some valuable
hints as to his deficiencies. As we see it, we've got a fighting chance of
spoiling his game. Certainly of spoiling it long enough to allow Earth
several more years to get a fleet of ships like this into operation and give
him plenty of trouble."
Suddenly Burl felt more cheerful. At the back of his mind there had been a
carefully concealed point of cold terror—he remembered the clean
efficiency of the Sun-tap station, the evidence of a science far beyond that
of Earth. He pressed the point. "Just what do we really know?"
Haines leaned back and rubbed his hands together. "There were several
things that gave their weaknesses away. When we put it all together, we
decided that the enemy represents some sort of limited advanced force or
scouting group of a civilization still too far away to count in the immediate
future. We decided that the enemy isn't too aware of our present abilities—
that his intelligence service is poor as far as modern Earth is concerned. We
figure he won't be able to act with any speed to repair the damages we
make."
"Tell them how we worked that out," said Ferrati, who had begun to grow
again the short black beard that Burl remembered he had worn on his
famous expeditions.
"Well," said Haines, drawing the word out to build up suspense, "did you
know that the station in the Andes, the one you cracked open, was built at
least thirty years ago? And never put into operation in all that time?"
Burl was surprised. "Why ... I hadn't thought of it—but it could have been.
That valley was so isolated and deserted, probably nobody would ever have
spotted it.
Page 51
"Right," Haines added, "and our investigation team studied the remains, the
foundations, the layout, and we're sure it's been there at least three decades.
That's one clue.
"The second clue was the relative flimsiness of the walls. The builders
hadn't expected us to be able to blow them up. They were some sort of
quick construction—a plastic, strong, but not able to hold up against
blasting powder, let alone real heavy bombs or A-bombs.
"Now why was that? And the third clue, why didn't they have a repair
system available, or at least some sort of automatic antiaircraft defense?"
Burl looked at Ferrati. The latter was watching him shrewdly to see if he
could figure it out.
"The builders didn't expect an air attack," said Burl slowly, "because of the
air disturbances. They did not know we would have a Moon base that could
spot their location. Hence they figured that our civilization would remain as
it was thirty years ago. We wouldn't have been able to spot the location at
that time, because it required outer-space observation. It might have taken
us several years of tramping around to locate it."
"And the lack of a strong permanent construction? After all, a concrete and
steel-enforced embankment, which any military force on Earth could have
put there, would have balked your dynamite attack," probed Haines.
"That means they didn't have the time or the means to make such a
construction. They must have had a single ship with the kind of equipment
that could lay out a quick base in the shortest time!" said Burl.
"Right!" snapped Haines. "The Sun-tap must have been built by a relatively
small team, which probably came in a single explorer ship. The ship was
equipped with automatic factory machinery that could turn out an adequate
base for an uninhabited planet, an airless moon, and so on—but they didn't
have the stuff for a fortified base—and they didn't have the manpower to
build it."
"Another indication of that is the thirty-year delay," added Ferrati.
"Obviously, they arrived in this solar system from somewhere outside it. We
figure that way because otherwise they would have been prepared to do the
foundations, the layout, and we're sure it's been there at least three decades.
That's one clue.
"The second clue was the relative flimsiness of the walls. The builders
hadn't expected us to be able to blow them up. They were some sort of
quick construction—a plastic, strong, but not able to hold up against
blasting powder, let alone real heavy bombs or A-bombs.
"Now why was that? And the third clue, why didn't they have a repair
system available, or at least some sort of automatic antiaircraft defense?"
Burl looked at Ferrati. The latter was watching him shrewdly to see if he
could figure it out.
"The builders didn't expect an air attack," said Burl slowly, "because of the
air disturbances. They did not know we would have a Moon base that could
spot their location. Hence they figured that our civilization would remain as
it was thirty years ago. We wouldn't have been able to spot the location at
that time, because it required outer-space observation. It might have taken
us several years of tramping around to locate it."
"And the lack of a strong permanent construction? After all, a concrete and
steel-enforced embankment, which any military force on Earth could have
put there, would have balked your dynamite attack," probed Haines.
"That means they didn't have the time or the means to make such a
construction. They must have had a single ship with the kind of equipment
that could lay out a quick base in the shortest time!" said Burl.
"Right!" snapped Haines. "The Sun-tap must have been built by a relatively
small team, which probably came in a single explorer ship. The ship was
equipped with automatic factory machinery that could turn out an adequate
base for an uninhabited planet, an airless moon, and so on—but they didn't
have the stuff for a fortified base—and they didn't have the manpower to
build it."
"Another indication of that is the thirty-year delay," added Ferrati.
"Obviously, they arrived in this solar system from somewhere outside it. We
figure that way because otherwise they would have been prepared to do the
Page 52
job on all the planets in the same trip and start operations at once. They
must have made some observations of this solar system from a point in
space at least as far away as another star. That means not less than four and
a half light-years away—Proxima Centauri being the nearest star after our
Sun, and four and a half light-years from us. Their observations were
imperfect. They found more planets and problems than they had supposed.
So they had to make a second trip to get enough supplies to finish their Sun-
tap base constructions. It took them thirty years between the first stations
and the ones that completed the job.
"And that, too, suggests that only one ship was originally involved here. Of
course, maybe they came back with more the second time, but it still looks
as if the main force hasn't arrived. And won't, until after the Sun novas."
"Then that means," said Burl quickly, "that we are still dealing with just a
small and isolated group?"
"Maybe," said Haines. "Just what constitutes a small group may be hard to
say. I rather think they'd have brought the engineers and at least an advance
working party of settlers with them the second trip in. But they are still
short of available ships—they're still not aware of what we may be going to
do."
"Why is that?" asked Burl.
Haines looked thoughtful. "This is conjecture. But if they planted any spies
among our Earth people, there's been no contact, because otherwise they'd
have known we could track and crack their base as soon as it started. This
means that they still haven't had scouting ships to spare for checking up on
what they did the first time. No checkup means no spare personnel to do the
checking. They just assumed that we hadn't caught on, and started
operations by remote control as they had originally planned."
"And that also may mean that these people are hard up," said Ferrati.
"Wherever they came from, their civilization has been great, but it's gone to
seed. They plan to seize another solar system, start over again, and they
haven't the manpower to do an adequate job—and they haven't the
abundance of material needed to set up simple check and guard stations,
such as any major Earth nation would have the sense to do."
must have made some observations of this solar system from a point in
space at least as far away as another star. That means not less than four and
a half light-years away—Proxima Centauri being the nearest star after our
Sun, and four and a half light-years from us. Their observations were
imperfect. They found more planets and problems than they had supposed.
So they had to make a second trip to get enough supplies to finish their Sun-
tap base constructions. It took them thirty years between the first stations
and the ones that completed the job.
"And that, too, suggests that only one ship was originally involved here. Of
course, maybe they came back with more the second time, but it still looks
as if the main force hasn't arrived. And won't, until after the Sun novas."
"Then that means," said Burl quickly, "that we are still dealing with just a
small and isolated group?"
"Maybe," said Haines. "Just what constitutes a small group may be hard to
say. I rather think they'd have brought the engineers and at least an advance
working party of settlers with them the second trip in. But they are still
short of available ships—they're still not aware of what we may be going to
do."
"Why is that?" asked Burl.
Haines looked thoughtful. "This is conjecture. But if they planted any spies
among our Earth people, there's been no contact, because otherwise they'd
have known we could track and crack their base as soon as it started. This
means that they still haven't had scouting ships to spare for checking up on
what they did the first time. No checkup means no spare personnel to do the
checking. They just assumed that we hadn't caught on, and started
operations by remote control as they had originally planned."
"And that also may mean that these people are hard up," said Ferrati.
"Wherever they came from, their civilization has been great, but it's gone to
seed. They plan to seize another solar system, start over again, and they
haven't the manpower to do an adequate job—and they haven't the
abundance of material needed to set up simple check and guard stations,
such as any major Earth nation would have the sense to do."
Page 53
"Why, that means we've got a fighting chance to lick 'em," said Burl
joyfully. "I kept thinking we'd run into more than we could cope with."
"We've got a fighting chance, all right," said Haines. "We may be able to rip
up their Sun-tap layouts, but what if we meet the main explorer ship itself?
Anybody who can cross interstellar space and warp the power of the Sun,
can probably outshoot, outrun, and outfight us. Let's hope we don't meet
them until we've done our work."
On this note the little discussion broke up as the gong rang for the next
watch.
It made sense to Burl. If the Magellan could just operate fast enough, keep
on the jump, they'd save the day. But—and he realized that nobody had
mentioned it aloud—it also followed that the enemy—however small its
group—was still in the solar system somewhere and would certainly be
starting to take action very soon now.
The time came when the ship was to start slowing, to prepare itself for the
meeting with Venus. Burl saw the hour and minute approach and watched
Lockhart take the controls and set the new readings. The steady hum of the
generators—a vibration that had become a constant feature of the ship—
altered, and for everyone it was a relief. Their minds had become attuned to
the steady pitch. One didn't realize how annoying a nuisance it was until it
stopped. As the stellar generators let down on the drag on the Sun, the
gravity within the ship lessened. In a few moments there was a condition of
zero, and those who had forgotten to strap themselves down found that they
were floating about in the air, most of them giddy.
There was a shift in the pitch, and the generators applied repulsion against
the pull of the Sun. Those floating in the air crashed suddenly against the
ceiling, then slid violently down the walls onto the floor as the inner sphere
rotated on its gymbals to meet the new center of gravitational pull—this
time away from the Sun.
The viewers flickered off and then on again as their connecting surfaces
inside and outside the sphere's double layer of walls slid apart and matched
up again. For an instant, as he saw the viewers blank out, Burl thought of
joyfully. "I kept thinking we'd run into more than we could cope with."
"We've got a fighting chance, all right," said Haines. "We may be able to rip
up their Sun-tap layouts, but what if we meet the main explorer ship itself?
Anybody who can cross interstellar space and warp the power of the Sun,
can probably outshoot, outrun, and outfight us. Let's hope we don't meet
them until we've done our work."
On this note the little discussion broke up as the gong rang for the next
watch.
It made sense to Burl. If the Magellan could just operate fast enough, keep
on the jump, they'd save the day. But—and he realized that nobody had
mentioned it aloud—it also followed that the enemy—however small its
group—was still in the solar system somewhere and would certainly be
starting to take action very soon now.
The time came when the ship was to start slowing, to prepare itself for the
meeting with Venus. Burl saw the hour and minute approach and watched
Lockhart take the controls and set the new readings. The steady hum of the
generators—a vibration that had become a constant feature of the ship—
altered, and for everyone it was a relief. Their minds had become attuned to
the steady pitch. One didn't realize how annoying a nuisance it was until it
stopped. As the stellar generators let down on the drag on the Sun, the
gravity within the ship lessened. In a few moments there was a condition of
zero, and those who had forgotten to strap themselves down found that they
were floating about in the air, most of them giddy.
There was a shift in the pitch, and the generators applied repulsion against
the pull of the Sun. Those floating in the air crashed suddenly against the
ceiling, then slid violently down the walls onto the floor as the inner sphere
rotated on its gymbals to meet the new center of gravitational pull—this
time away from the Sun.
The viewers flickered off and then on again as their connecting surfaces
inside and outside the sphere's double layer of walls slid apart and matched
up again. For an instant, as he saw the viewers blank out, Burl thought of
Page 54
what might happen if the sphere didn't rotate all the way. They would find
themselves blind.
Now the ship proceeded on its charted orbit, slowing to meet Venus. Several
hours went by, one meal, and Burl had returned to his bunk, his rest period
having arrived. Russ remained at the controls on duty, checking
astronomically the new speed and deceleration.
Burl tossed restlessly, the light out in the little cabin. Something was
bothering him, and after a while he realized that Clyde should have come
off duty before this. He glanced at the clock and calculated that Russ was
two hours overdue. What was wrong?
He slipped out of his bunk and climbed into his pants. Ascending into the
control room, he saw Lockhart, the two astronomers, and the entire
engineering crew gathered over the controls in worried concentration.
He peered over their shoulders, but the dials meant little to him, since he
did not know what they should have said. "What's happened?" he asked
Russ.
Russ took him aside. "We're not going to make our connection with Venus,"
he said. "Our generators didn't operate exactly as we had hoped. We haven't
been able to slow down enough, the pull of the Sun is stronger than the
power we can raise to stop it at our present speed. We're going to shoot past
Venus' orbit way ahead of the planet, and we're still heading sunward at a
faster rate than we figured on."
"You mean—we're falling into the Sun!" gasped Burl.
"As things stand right now," said the youthful astrogator, "that's just what is
happening."
themselves blind.
Now the ship proceeded on its charted orbit, slowing to meet Venus. Several
hours went by, one meal, and Burl had returned to his bunk, his rest period
having arrived. Russ remained at the controls on duty, checking
astronomically the new speed and deceleration.
Burl tossed restlessly, the light out in the little cabin. Something was
bothering him, and after a while he realized that Clyde should have come
off duty before this. He glanced at the clock and calculated that Russ was
two hours overdue. What was wrong?
He slipped out of his bunk and climbed into his pants. Ascending into the
control room, he saw Lockhart, the two astronomers, and the entire
engineering crew gathered over the controls in worried concentration.
He peered over their shoulders, but the dials meant little to him, since he
did not know what they should have said. "What's happened?" he asked
Russ.
Russ took him aside. "We're not going to make our connection with Venus,"
he said. "Our generators didn't operate exactly as we had hoped. We haven't
been able to slow down enough, the pull of the Sun is stronger than the
power we can raise to stop it at our present speed. We're going to shoot past
Venus' orbit way ahead of the planet, and we're still heading sunward at a
faster rate than we figured on."
"You mean—we're falling into the Sun!" gasped Burl.
"As things stand right now," said the youthful astrogator, "that's just what is
happening."
Page 55
Chapter 7.
Hot Spot on Mercury
It seemed strange to Burl at that moment that there wasn't more excitement
on board the Magellan. To learn so early in the game that all were doomed
should have brought more reaction. It should have excited some sort of
frenzy, or efforts to abandon ship, or something. But the men in the cabin,
though keyed up, were anything but panicky.
Instead, there seemed to be grim concentration on their faces, an
earnestness that spoke of a plan. Through a viewer which had been shielded
so that the light would not blind the eyes, Burl could see the wide disc of
the Sun now. A few spots were visible on its blazing surface, and great
tongues of burning gases encircled it for hundreds of thousands of miles.
Were they really destined to end a mere cinder—an instantaneous flicker of
fire in one of those prominences?
Clyde was working with Oberfield at the calculators. Burl watched them in
silence, trying to determine what it was they were getting at. Finally they
pulled a figure from one of their machines and took it over to Lockhart and
the engineers. There was a brief conference, and something seemed to be
agreed upon.
Clyde's face, which had been tense, was now more relaxed. "I think we've
got the problem licked," came the good word.
"What's up?" asked Burl. "If we shoot past Venus, we should still be able to
come to a stop, fall away from the Sun and maybe catch up with Venus
again. It would take longer, but...."
"We're altering our plans," interrupted Russ. "Of course, we could brake—
that much we found out for sure. The trouble lay in our lack of effective
tests for the Magellan's drive. We thought we knew just what it would do,
but after all, the problems of space are intricate. It turned out that it did not
act so effectively against the Sun as had been calculated. Either that, or the
Sun's pull was stronger at this proximity than registered on our instruments.
Hot Spot on Mercury
It seemed strange to Burl at that moment that there wasn't more excitement
on board the Magellan. To learn so early in the game that all were doomed
should have brought more reaction. It should have excited some sort of
frenzy, or efforts to abandon ship, or something. But the men in the cabin,
though keyed up, were anything but panicky.
Instead, there seemed to be grim concentration on their faces, an
earnestness that spoke of a plan. Through a viewer which had been shielded
so that the light would not blind the eyes, Burl could see the wide disc of
the Sun now. A few spots were visible on its blazing surface, and great
tongues of burning gases encircled it for hundreds of thousands of miles.
Were they really destined to end a mere cinder—an instantaneous flicker of
fire in one of those prominences?
Clyde was working with Oberfield at the calculators. Burl watched them in
silence, trying to determine what it was they were getting at. Finally they
pulled a figure from one of their machines and took it over to Lockhart and
the engineers. There was a brief conference, and something seemed to be
agreed upon.
Clyde's face, which had been tense, was now more relaxed. "I think we've
got the problem licked," came the good word.
"What's up?" asked Burl. "If we shoot past Venus, we should still be able to
come to a stop, fall away from the Sun and maybe catch up with Venus
again. It would take longer, but...."
"We're altering our plans," interrupted Russ. "Of course, we could brake—
that much we found out for sure. The trouble lay in our lack of effective
tests for the Magellan's drive. We thought we knew just what it would do,
but after all, the problems of space are intricate. It turned out that it did not
act so effectively against the Sun as had been calculated. Either that, or the
Sun's pull was stronger at this proximity than registered on our instruments.
Page 56
Chasing after Venus, after coming back to its orbit, could be done, but it
would prove time-consuming and difficult to plan. What we are doing
instead is altering our schedule."
"But then there's no other place to go from here but Mercury. Is that what
the new plan is?" Burl asked him.
Russ nodded. "Mercury is coming around this side of the Sun. By the time
we have braked, we will be closer to its orbit than to that of Venus. So we
shall proceed inward toward it and make our first planetfall there."
Mercury, the smallest and hottest planet in the system. Burl remembered
that it was one of the two worlds that they knew for sure had a Sun-tap
station on it. He went down the hatch to carry the news to the landing crew.
Haines, Burl discovered, had already heard the new plan on the intercom
from Lockhart. As soon as Burl joined them, the four men, including Ferrati
and Boulton, went into a planning session.
The problem of Mercury was a hard one. As Ferrati remarked, "It would
have been better to tackle this one last instead of taking it on first."
"Yes, but on the other hand," was Haines's comment, "Mercury's station is
probably one of the most important—located as it is, so close to the Sun.
With ideal conditions for steady, undiverted concentration of solar power, it
must be the primary station in the system."
"The problem boils down—and I do mean 'boils'—to heat," Boulton
laughed. "Mercury rotates on its axis only once a year—its year being only
eighty-eight of our days long. This means that just as the Moon presents
only one side to the Earth, Mercury always presents the same hemisphere to
the Sun. On the Sun side, therefore, there is always day. The Sun appears to
be fixed in the sky. Naturally, we assume the Sun-tap station will be on that
sunny side. And the heat must be terrific."
"Matter of fact," said Haines dryly, "the records show the heat in the center
of the Sun side reaches 770° Fahrenheit. Enough to keep tin and lead
molten."
would prove time-consuming and difficult to plan. What we are doing
instead is altering our schedule."
"But then there's no other place to go from here but Mercury. Is that what
the new plan is?" Burl asked him.
Russ nodded. "Mercury is coming around this side of the Sun. By the time
we have braked, we will be closer to its orbit than to that of Venus. So we
shall proceed inward toward it and make our first planetfall there."
Mercury, the smallest and hottest planet in the system. Burl remembered
that it was one of the two worlds that they knew for sure had a Sun-tap
station on it. He went down the hatch to carry the news to the landing crew.
Haines, Burl discovered, had already heard the new plan on the intercom
from Lockhart. As soon as Burl joined them, the four men, including Ferrati
and Boulton, went into a planning session.
The problem of Mercury was a hard one. As Ferrati remarked, "It would
have been better to tackle this one last instead of taking it on first."
"Yes, but on the other hand," was Haines's comment, "Mercury's station is
probably one of the most important—located as it is, so close to the Sun.
With ideal conditions for steady, undiverted concentration of solar power, it
must be the primary station in the system."
"The problem boils down—and I do mean 'boils'—to heat," Boulton
laughed. "Mercury rotates on its axis only once a year—its year being only
eighty-eight of our days long. This means that just as the Moon presents
only one side to the Earth, Mercury always presents the same hemisphere to
the Sun. On the Sun side, therefore, there is always day. The Sun appears to
be fixed in the sky. Naturally, we assume the Sun-tap station will be on that
sunny side. And the heat must be terrific."
"Matter of fact," said Haines dryly, "the records show the heat in the center
of the Sun side reaches 770° Fahrenheit. Enough to keep tin and lead
molten."
Page 57
"The problem is how to reach the station over such a boiling landscape,"
summed up Burl. "It seems to me that the absence of an atmosphere could
answer part of the problem."
Haines nodded. "Let's get to work on a plan of action, men. We've got a few
days to get our equipment laid out."
Those few days passed quickly enough. When several possible schemes had
been outlined, the men made lists of the types of equipment that might be
used with each. Then, putting on pressurized space suits and carrying air
tanks, they left the inner sphere and worked through the cargo space
surrounding it within the outer frame of the spaceship. There had originally
been air here, but now they found most of it was gone, thinned out from
infinitely tiny leaks in the outer shell caused by the constant bombardment
of microscopic bits of meteoric dust.
They located each piece of equipment and moved it into position for easy
handling.
The ship came to its halting point, where the repulsion against the Sun
finally braked it against the gravitational pull of the Sun. Then, by
increasing the selective pull of the approaching planet Mercury, they moved
off in that direction.
Mercury was changing in appearance. As they neared it from the outer side,
its lighted half swung away from their view, and what they saw was a
constantly narrowing crescent, growing larger even as it narrowed. Finally
the hour came when they swung up close, coming in on the eternally
sunless, night side of the little planet.
They swooped low over the dark surface, taking observations and
measurements. "It's not as cold as we might suppose," said Oberfield after
his first readings. "There's a certain amount of heat all along the rim of the
dark side. Radiation, I suppose, as well as the fact that there's a certain
amount of wobbling done by the planet."
Burl was studying the surface. "Seems to me that much of the dark side has
a gleam to it. Something reflects the stars; I see little glints of light, shifting
and blinking."
summed up Burl. "It seems to me that the absence of an atmosphere could
answer part of the problem."
Haines nodded. "Let's get to work on a plan of action, men. We've got a few
days to get our equipment laid out."
Those few days passed quickly enough. When several possible schemes had
been outlined, the men made lists of the types of equipment that might be
used with each. Then, putting on pressurized space suits and carrying air
tanks, they left the inner sphere and worked through the cargo space
surrounding it within the outer frame of the spaceship. There had originally
been air here, but now they found most of it was gone, thinned out from
infinitely tiny leaks in the outer shell caused by the constant bombardment
of microscopic bits of meteoric dust.
They located each piece of equipment and moved it into position for easy
handling.
The ship came to its halting point, where the repulsion against the Sun
finally braked it against the gravitational pull of the Sun. Then, by
increasing the selective pull of the approaching planet Mercury, they moved
off in that direction.
Mercury was changing in appearance. As they neared it from the outer side,
its lighted half swung away from their view, and what they saw was a
constantly narrowing crescent, growing larger even as it narrowed. Finally
the hour came when they swung up close, coming in on the eternally
sunless, night side of the little planet.
They swooped low over the dark surface, taking observations and
measurements. "It's not as cold as we might suppose," said Oberfield after
his first readings. "There's a certain amount of heat all along the rim of the
dark side. Radiation, I suppose, as well as the fact that there's a certain
amount of wobbling done by the planet."
Burl was studying the surface. "Seems to me that much of the dark side has
a gleam to it. Something reflects the stars; I see little glints of light, shifting
and blinking."
Page 58
"I can guess what that is," said Russ. "It must be covered, at least in the
central portions, with a sea of frozen gases. What atmosphere Mercury had
long ago must have congealed there."
The ship moved along toward the twilight edge, then began circling the
planet along that intermediate belt, where the Sun could be seen peeking
over the horizon in eternal dawn. There was a cluster of men at the radiation
counter, looking for evidence of the Sun-tap station. Finally, after passing
over a chain of darkened mountains, eerily lighted at the peaks by the Sun,
there came a yell. Distortion had been detected.
Once on it, they swung the ship outward into space again and moved along
further over the sunlit side. Burl stared into the telescopic viewers as they
probed the surface.
He saw an ugly and terrifying world. The planet, which had a diameter of
only 3,100 miles, compared to Earth's 7,900, was virtually without an
atmosphere. Its surface was baked hard, brilliantly white, covered with
long, deep cracks that cut hundreds of miles into the shriveled and burned
surface. There were areas of dark mountain ranges, bare and jagged, whose
metallic surfaces imparted a darker shade to the pervading glare. And there
were patches here and there on the surface that gleamed balefully—
probably spots of molten material.
Haines, standing next to him, was muttering, "It can't be too far in, it can't.
How could they build it?"
Then Burl found what they were looking for.
A huge canyon tore raggedly across a plain. There was a jumble of
mountains, a chain edging in from the twilight zone. And in a corner, about
two hundred miles out into the hot side, at a narrow ledge where the
mountains came down and the canyon came together, there was a circular
structure.
They could see, as soon as the telescopic sight had been adjusted, that it
was a large station. It was encircled by a featureless wall. It had no roof.
Rising on masts above it was a whole forest of gleaming discs pointing at
the Sun low in the sky.
central portions, with a sea of frozen gases. What atmosphere Mercury had
long ago must have congealed there."
The ship moved along toward the twilight edge, then began circling the
planet along that intermediate belt, where the Sun could be seen peeking
over the horizon in eternal dawn. There was a cluster of men at the radiation
counter, looking for evidence of the Sun-tap station. Finally, after passing
over a chain of darkened mountains, eerily lighted at the peaks by the Sun,
there came a yell. Distortion had been detected.
Once on it, they swung the ship outward into space again and moved along
further over the sunlit side. Burl stared into the telescopic viewers as they
probed the surface.
He saw an ugly and terrifying world. The planet, which had a diameter of
only 3,100 miles, compared to Earth's 7,900, was virtually without an
atmosphere. Its surface was baked hard, brilliantly white, covered with
long, deep cracks that cut hundreds of miles into the shriveled and burned
surface. There were areas of dark mountain ranges, bare and jagged, whose
metallic surfaces imparted a darker shade to the pervading glare. And there
were patches here and there on the surface that gleamed balefully—
probably spots of molten material.
Haines, standing next to him, was muttering, "It can't be too far in, it can't.
How could they build it?"
Then Burl found what they were looking for.
A huge canyon tore raggedly across a plain. There was a jumble of
mountains, a chain edging in from the twilight zone. And in a corner, about
two hundred miles out into the hot side, at a narrow ledge where the
mountains came down and the canyon came together, there was a circular
structure.
They could see, as soon as the telescopic sight had been adjusted, that it
was a large station. It was encircled by a featureless wall. It had no roof.
Rising on masts above it was a whole forest of gleaming discs pointing at
the Sun low in the sky.
Page 59
On the tops of the mountain peaks, a half mile from the station, was another
series of masts. These were aimed away from the Sun into the dark airless
sky and toward the other planets.
"The accumulators and the transmitters," said Burl. "We'll have to get them
both."
"Getting the transmitters will be easy," said Haines. "After we shut off the
station, we'll just bomb the mountain masts out of action."
Burl choked. "Why, it never occurred to me, but why can't we bomb the
station from the air? One atomic bomb should finish it off." He almost
added, And you wouldn't have needed me after all, but squashed the
thought. He wouldn't have given up coming along for anything, he now
realized.
"There's a distortion, as there was at the Andes station, that would make it
hard to hit. But I imagine we could do it if we tried hard enough. But that
isn't what we want at first. It's important, very important, that we get
pictures and details of this station from inside. We can't just break up the
enemy installations—we've got to learn from them, we must find out how
they do it and how we can use it." This was Lockhart speaking. "You'd
better start the job," he added to Haines. "Are you ready?"
Haines nodded reluctantly. "Yep," and turning to the three who would
accompany him, he ordered, "let's go."
The four explorers gathered near the exit port. They had put on space suits
and strapped on various items of equipment, weapons and work tools. They
passed through the airlock into the cargo section of the ship.
Communicating through the helmet radios, Haines directed each what to do,
and also directed Lockhart where to bring the ship for the landing.
Burl heard Lockhart's voice warn them that he did not want to hold the ship
too long over the sunny hot side. "We've already noticed a buildup of heat
from the solar radiation on the skin. And the heat radiating from Mercury is
accumulating too fast. We can't get rid of it if both sides of this ship are
going to be heated up. As soon as you make your landing, I'm taking the
ship back to the cold side."
series of masts. These were aimed away from the Sun into the dark airless
sky and toward the other planets.
"The accumulators and the transmitters," said Burl. "We'll have to get them
both."
"Getting the transmitters will be easy," said Haines. "After we shut off the
station, we'll just bomb the mountain masts out of action."
Burl choked. "Why, it never occurred to me, but why can't we bomb the
station from the air? One atomic bomb should finish it off." He almost
added, And you wouldn't have needed me after all, but squashed the
thought. He wouldn't have given up coming along for anything, he now
realized.
"There's a distortion, as there was at the Andes station, that would make it
hard to hit. But I imagine we could do it if we tried hard enough. But that
isn't what we want at first. It's important, very important, that we get
pictures and details of this station from inside. We can't just break up the
enemy installations—we've got to learn from them, we must find out how
they do it and how we can use it." This was Lockhart speaking. "You'd
better start the job," he added to Haines. "Are you ready?"
Haines nodded reluctantly. "Yep," and turning to the three who would
accompany him, he ordered, "let's go."
The four explorers gathered near the exit port. They had put on space suits
and strapped on various items of equipment, weapons and work tools. They
passed through the airlock into the cargo section of the ship.
Communicating through the helmet radios, Haines directed each what to do,
and also directed Lockhart where to bring the ship for the landing.
Burl heard Lockhart's voice warn them that he did not want to hold the ship
too long over the sunny hot side. "We've already noticed a buildup of heat
from the solar radiation on the skin. And the heat radiating from Mercury is
accumulating too fast. We can't get rid of it if both sides of this ship are
going to be heated up. As soon as you make your landing, I'm taking the
ship back to the cold side."
Page 60
"Uh huh," came Haines's voice. "We don't want to hang around here any too
long, either."
Then the four, as prearranged, unlimbered the work rocket they had picked.
There were several sizes of small exploration craft. They had at first
thought of the tractor—an enclosed, airtight truck on tractor wheels which
could crawl up to the station while the men inside it were protected by air
conditioning. But a quick survey showed that it would overheat too fast and
might easily bog down in one of the many soft spots. So they took the four-
man, rocket-propelled cargo plane instead.
The ship was airtight and pressurized. They had taken every precaution.
The four piled in with their supplies. Then, as the Magellan swooped
momentarily lower, the escape hatch opened and, with Ferrati at the
controls, the rocket plane shot out with a roar of its exhausts.
They raced low over the burning landscape, and before them the wide, dark,
forbidding canyon cut its way through the plain. It was into this canyon that
the rocket plunged.
The precipitous rocky sides rose above them, and suddenly they were in
darkness. Immediately, the plane's cooling system became more effective as
Ferrati guided the rocket through the shadowy depths away from the
blazing sunbeams. Burl saw, by means of the radar, that the bottom of the
heat crack was many miles down.
They raced along the crevice until they reached the mountain chain. Here,
Ferrati abruptly raised the nose of the plane and they shot upward, popping
out of the shadow into the sunlight.
Before them loomed the hard unbroken walls of the Sun-tap station. The
rocket plane came to a stop a hundred feet away.
As soon as it had halted, Burl and Ferrati leaped out, with white sheets
thrown over their suits to afford some extra protection from the Sun's rays.
Between them they carried a long, awkward affair of poles and plastic.
Burl's feet touched the ground; through the cushioned leather of his thick
boots he felt the heat just as if he had stepped on a hot stove. He moved
quickly, and as they had rehearsed, he and the explorer slapped the rig
long, either."
Then the four, as prearranged, unlimbered the work rocket they had picked.
There were several sizes of small exploration craft. They had at first
thought of the tractor—an enclosed, airtight truck on tractor wheels which
could crawl up to the station while the men inside it were protected by air
conditioning. But a quick survey showed that it would overheat too fast and
might easily bog down in one of the many soft spots. So they took the four-
man, rocket-propelled cargo plane instead.
The ship was airtight and pressurized. They had taken every precaution.
The four piled in with their supplies. Then, as the Magellan swooped
momentarily lower, the escape hatch opened and, with Ferrati at the
controls, the rocket plane shot out with a roar of its exhausts.
They raced low over the burning landscape, and before them the wide, dark,
forbidding canyon cut its way through the plain. It was into this canyon that
the rocket plunged.
The precipitous rocky sides rose above them, and suddenly they were in
darkness. Immediately, the plane's cooling system became more effective as
Ferrati guided the rocket through the shadowy depths away from the
blazing sunbeams. Burl saw, by means of the radar, that the bottom of the
heat crack was many miles down.
They raced along the crevice until they reached the mountain chain. Here,
Ferrati abruptly raised the nose of the plane and they shot upward, popping
out of the shadow into the sunlight.
Before them loomed the hard unbroken walls of the Sun-tap station. The
rocket plane came to a stop a hundred feet away.
As soon as it had halted, Burl and Ferrati leaped out, with white sheets
thrown over their suits to afford some extra protection from the Sun's rays.
Between them they carried a long, awkward affair of poles and plastic.
Burl's feet touched the ground; through the cushioned leather of his thick
boots he felt the heat just as if he had stepped on a hot stove. He moved
quickly, and as they had rehearsed, he and the explorer slapped the rig
Page 61
together and set up a gleaming plastic skin sunbreak to shield the rocket
plane. The plastic sheets reflected the Sun's heat and cut off a fair portion of
the direct radiation which would otherwise have rendered the rocket plane
inoperable and uninhabitable in short order.
While they were assembling the sunbreak, Haines and Boulton unloaded a
portable antitank rocket launcher. With no wasted motion, Boulton aimed
the launcher at the wall, and Haines thrust a long, wicked-looking rocket
projectile into the tube. There was a flash of soundless fire and a line of
dissipating white smoke. Nothing could be heard in the airlessness.
Burl felt the shock through the ground as the shell hit. A chunk of the wall
ripped apart and collapsed.
As quickly as he saw it, Burl acted. Haines's voice rang in his ear, but
already Burl was in action. Back into the rocket plane, out again with—an
umbrella!
He made a flying leap toward the Sun-tap station. He felt terrifically strong
in the slight gravity, and the leap carried him thirty feet forward. As he slid
through the space above the surface, he opened the umbrella. Its outer side
had been painted white, and partly shielded him from the direct heat. He
made the station in five leaps and climbed through the broken wall. Boulton
followed him with another umbrella and a pack under his arm.
Inside the station it was cool—the walls had been high enough to create
shade within. It was like the station in the Andes, but bigger, much bigger.
Boulton joined him, folded his umbrella calmly, and yanked an air-
compression pistol from his belt. "See anyone?" he asked.
"No."
Burl remembered then that there could possibly be a living guard at this
station. They searched carefully, but there was no sign of life. Boulton was
doing a soldier's job, that was all.
While Boulton set up his photographic equipment, Burl made his way
around the shining globes and strange tubes that were the nerve center of
plane. The plastic sheets reflected the Sun's heat and cut off a fair portion of
the direct radiation which would otherwise have rendered the rocket plane
inoperable and uninhabitable in short order.
While they were assembling the sunbreak, Haines and Boulton unloaded a
portable antitank rocket launcher. With no wasted motion, Boulton aimed
the launcher at the wall, and Haines thrust a long, wicked-looking rocket
projectile into the tube. There was a flash of soundless fire and a line of
dissipating white smoke. Nothing could be heard in the airlessness.
Burl felt the shock through the ground as the shell hit. A chunk of the wall
ripped apart and collapsed.
As quickly as he saw it, Burl acted. Haines's voice rang in his ear, but
already Burl was in action. Back into the rocket plane, out again with—an
umbrella!
He made a flying leap toward the Sun-tap station. He felt terrifically strong
in the slight gravity, and the leap carried him thirty feet forward. As he slid
through the space above the surface, he opened the umbrella. Its outer side
had been painted white, and partly shielded him from the direct heat. He
made the station in five leaps and climbed through the broken wall. Boulton
followed him with another umbrella and a pack under his arm.
Inside the station it was cool—the walls had been high enough to create
shade within. It was like the station in the Andes, but bigger, much bigger.
Boulton joined him, folded his umbrella calmly, and yanked an air-
compression pistol from his belt. "See anyone?" he asked.
"No."
Burl remembered then that there could possibly be a living guard at this
station. They searched carefully, but there was no sign of life. Boulton was
doing a soldier's job, that was all.
While Boulton set up his photographic equipment, Burl made his way
around the shining globes and strange tubes that were the nerve center of
Page 62
the station. He finally found the same type of control panel that he had
found in the Andes station.
He hesitated before it, wondering if, after all, this, the original charge,
would work. He hoped that there might be another charger globe available,
but saw none. It would be up to him.
He put a gloved hand on the control. Perhaps, he worried, the charge would
not conduct through the insulated, cooled material of his suit. He pushed the
levers, and knew then that it did.
The pulsing of the spheres halted. There was a sharp dip in the faint
vibration he had been feeling in his feet. He shoved the levers all the way,
and suddenly the station went dead. Above him, one of the great discs atop
its mast snapped and burst apart under what must have become an
impossible concentration of power without a channel for outlet.
"Sun-tap Station Mercury is dead," Burl said quietly into his helmet phone.
At that very instant a distant globe, perched on a pedestal against the wall
away from the rest of the equipment, flared a brilliant red.
found in the Andes station.
He hesitated before it, wondering if, after all, this, the original charge,
would work. He hoped that there might be another charger globe available,
but saw none. It would be up to him.
He put a gloved hand on the control. Perhaps, he worried, the charge would
not conduct through the insulated, cooled material of his suit. He pushed the
levers, and knew then that it did.
The pulsing of the spheres halted. There was a sharp dip in the faint
vibration he had been feeling in his feet. He shoved the levers all the way,
and suddenly the station went dead. Above him, one of the great discs atop
its mast snapped and burst apart under what must have become an
impossible concentration of power without a channel for outlet.
"Sun-tap Station Mercury is dead," Burl said quietly into his helmet phone.
At that very instant a distant globe, perched on a pedestal against the wall
away from the rest of the equipment, flared a brilliant red.
Page 63
Chapter 8.
The Veil of Venus
In an artificially constructed chamber somewhere in the solar system, an
intelligent being sat before a bank of instruments that was designed to bring
to his attention various factors concerning the things that mattered to his
species. This being had been on duty for the average length of time such a
duty entailed and had been paying little conscious attention to the routine—
for there had been nothing to report for some time.
The drop in channeling from Planet III that had occurred some time ago had
thus far not caused too much concern. It was assumed by the other
intelligent beings involved that the matter was possibly a weather condition,
a volcanic discharge or quite simply that the planet was in unfavorable
orbit. Not all the stations ever worked simultaneously. There were always
some behind the Sun, or blocked in some other manner. But the main
channels were at work, and the different lines and shifts continued to build
up satisfactorily.
But now something occurred that focused the attention of the watcher more
closely on his instruments. A facet of his panel had flashed a color at the
lowest end of his visible spectrum. How the being registered that color
cannot be said; the inhabitants of Planet III would have termed it red.
With trained reaction, the watcher activated the full signal. Instantly there
appeared before his eyes a vision of a scene. There was the interior of the
major station on Planet I. It was non-functioning, and there were two
strange creatures turning now to look directly at him. They were bipeds
with two armlike extensions, lumpy objects, clad in bulky white folds. They
wore cumbersome helmets and he could see two eyes shielded beneath
thick transparencies over the face.
One of these creatures raised his arm and there was a puff of steam. Then
the vision flashed off, but not before the trained watcher had activated the
crash mechanism.
The Veil of Venus
In an artificially constructed chamber somewhere in the solar system, an
intelligent being sat before a bank of instruments that was designed to bring
to his attention various factors concerning the things that mattered to his
species. This being had been on duty for the average length of time such a
duty entailed and had been paying little conscious attention to the routine—
for there had been nothing to report for some time.
The drop in channeling from Planet III that had occurred some time ago had
thus far not caused too much concern. It was assumed by the other
intelligent beings involved that the matter was possibly a weather condition,
a volcanic discharge or quite simply that the planet was in unfavorable
orbit. Not all the stations ever worked simultaneously. There were always
some behind the Sun, or blocked in some other manner. But the main
channels were at work, and the different lines and shifts continued to build
up satisfactorily.
But now something occurred that focused the attention of the watcher more
closely on his instruments. A facet of his panel had flashed a color at the
lowest end of his visible spectrum. How the being registered that color
cannot be said; the inhabitants of Planet III would have termed it red.
With trained reaction, the watcher activated the full signal. Instantly there
appeared before his eyes a vision of a scene. There was the interior of the
major station on Planet I. It was non-functioning, and there were two
strange creatures turning now to look directly at him. They were bipeds
with two armlike extensions, lumpy objects, clad in bulky white folds. They
wore cumbersome helmets and he could see two eyes shielded beneath
thick transparencies over the face.
One of these creatures raised his arm and there was a puff of steam. Then
the vision flashed off, but not before the trained watcher had activated the
crash mechanism.
Page 64
If the watcher had been closer in space to the station, the destruction would
have come quicker. Unfortunately for him, the speed of light and radio
impulses is limited, so that it was several minutes before the destruction
impulse reached Planet I.
A short while later, after the guiding beings had digested the news,
preparations were made for a vessel to go sunward to investigate—and
remove—the interference.
Burl twisted on his heel sharply as he whirled around to look at the flash of
red. Boulton drew his hand weapon, aimed and fired.
There was a jet of steam as the compressed air blasted the dart from the
gun. The glowing globe was pierced, there was a small explosion, and then
the globe and its pedestal vanished.
"What was that?" cried Burl.
Boulton holstered his gun. "A signal of some kind—a warning probably.
My guess is that it was an alarm tipping off the remote control masters of
this place that it was out of commission. Help me with the photo stuff; I
think we'd better get out of here quick!"
Without wasting more time, the two men snapped the scene as fast as the
shutters would click. Then they picked up the cameras, grabbed their
umbrellas and ran for the break in the wall.
Just as they made their first flying leaps toward the shielded rocket plane,
the globes within the Sun-tap station started to go off. One after another,
like a chain reaction, they blew up, and within seconds the interior of the
walled station was a turmoil of falling metals, beams, wires, and sharp
transparent shards.
Haines and Ferrati were ready for take-off and puffs of smoke were coming
from the exhaust. Without bothering to take down the plastic Sun-shield,
Burl and Boulton tumbled into the cabin. Before the door was even closed,
Haines lifted the ship and headed for the dark depths of the canyon.
have come quicker. Unfortunately for him, the speed of light and radio
impulses is limited, so that it was several minutes before the destruction
impulse reached Planet I.
A short while later, after the guiding beings had digested the news,
preparations were made for a vessel to go sunward to investigate—and
remove—the interference.
Burl twisted on his heel sharply as he whirled around to look at the flash of
red. Boulton drew his hand weapon, aimed and fired.
There was a jet of steam as the compressed air blasted the dart from the
gun. The glowing globe was pierced, there was a small explosion, and then
the globe and its pedestal vanished.
"What was that?" cried Burl.
Boulton holstered his gun. "A signal of some kind—a warning probably.
My guess is that it was an alarm tipping off the remote control masters of
this place that it was out of commission. Help me with the photo stuff; I
think we'd better get out of here quick!"
Without wasting more time, the two men snapped the scene as fast as the
shutters would click. Then they picked up the cameras, grabbed their
umbrellas and ran for the break in the wall.
Just as they made their first flying leaps toward the shielded rocket plane,
the globes within the Sun-tap station started to go off. One after another,
like a chain reaction, they blew up, and within seconds the interior of the
walled station was a turmoil of falling metals, beams, wires, and sharp
transparent shards.
Haines and Ferrati were ready for take-off and puffs of smoke were coming
from the exhaust. Without bothering to take down the plastic Sun-shield,
Burl and Boulton tumbled into the cabin. Before the door was even closed,
Haines lifted the ship and headed for the dark depths of the canyon.
Page 65
The inside of the plane was perilously hot. The shield had been a temporary
protection, but even the ground radiated heat like an oven. They had to seek
the cold of the sunless canyon to allow some of the heat to escape. To have
flown directly to the Magellan without cooling the plane would have been
disastrous.
The Magellan emerged from the cold side to meet them. From the heights
of space, they saw that they would not need to bomb the mountain relayer
masts—for the same alarm that had triggered the station had shattered them.
After the Magellan had scuttled back to the cold side, there was a council of
war in the control room. Burl and Boulton described very carefully what
had happened.
"This must have been their primary station," said Russ thoughtfully. "No
matter what they seek to channel from the Sun on other planets, it is from
here that the first and strongest diversion of solar energy must have been
coming. This station may have been the last constructed—the final link put
into place. And for that reason, they installed an alarm."
"Ah," said Lockhart, "even if they did, would it necessarily have destroyed
the station? After all, they would normally have figured on repairing
whatever went wrong."
"It seems to me," said Burl, "that the red flash itself didn't start the
destruction. There was a delay—must have been several minutes—before it
started. Could it be, that what was alerted was a watcher?"
"Where?" said Boulton. "There was no place for a watcher to be in that
station. We saw no sign of it."
"Maybe deep underground?" suggested the engineer, Caton. "They might
have living quarters a few miles underneath."
"Highly unlikely," said Russ Clyde. "It would still be too hot, and,
remember, these people plan to incinerate Mercury and the inner planets.
They must be from the edge of the system. The delay may be a valuable
clue to that. It would take time for a remote control station on another
planet to see what was happening and take steps. If you can figure out
protection, but even the ground radiated heat like an oven. They had to seek
the cold of the sunless canyon to allow some of the heat to escape. To have
flown directly to the Magellan without cooling the plane would have been
disastrous.
The Magellan emerged from the cold side to meet them. From the heights
of space, they saw that they would not need to bomb the mountain relayer
masts—for the same alarm that had triggered the station had shattered them.
After the Magellan had scuttled back to the cold side, there was a council of
war in the control room. Burl and Boulton described very carefully what
had happened.
"This must have been their primary station," said Russ thoughtfully. "No
matter what they seek to channel from the Sun on other planets, it is from
here that the first and strongest diversion of solar energy must have been
coming. This station may have been the last constructed—the final link put
into place. And for that reason, they installed an alarm."
"Ah," said Lockhart, "even if they did, would it necessarily have destroyed
the station? After all, they would normally have figured on repairing
whatever went wrong."
"It seems to me," said Burl, "that the red flash itself didn't start the
destruction. There was a delay—must have been several minutes—before it
started. Could it be, that what was alerted was a watcher?"
"Where?" said Boulton. "There was no place for a watcher to be in that
station. We saw no sign of it."
"Maybe deep underground?" suggested the engineer, Caton. "They might
have living quarters a few miles underneath."
"Highly unlikely," said Russ Clyde. "It would still be too hot, and,
remember, these people plan to incinerate Mercury and the inner planets.
They must be from the edge of the system. The delay may be a valuable
clue to that. It would take time for a remote control station on another
planet to see what was happening and take steps. If you can figure out
Page 66
exactly how many minutes and seconds elapsed between the flashing of the
red bulb and the blowup, we could work out the approximate distance."
But, unfortunately, the time could not be judged that accurately. Neither
Burl nor Boulton had had time to look at his watch.
They hung over the cold side of Mercury for several hours more while the
two astronomers figured their next move. When the orbits had been
determined, the Magellan turned its massive wide nose away from the Sun
toward a gleaming white disc that dominated the dark skies of outer space.
With full power on, they pushed away from the littlest planet and began the
long fall toward the Sun's second planet, that which some had considered to
be Earth's veiled twin, Venus.
There was a matter of thirty million miles to cross, and the crossing would
be made fighting the pull of the Sun all the way.
Caton and his men had spent the wait on Mercury working on the great
generators in the powerhouse nose. They recalibrated the output and
corrected it from the records kept during the flight inward. Now they were
confident of its ability to drive the ship away from the Sun. Coming in, they
had not been sure what their A-G drive would do and could do. Going
outward they knew just what to expect.
They did not travel blindly outward, for that would have been both a crude
waste of power and inaccurate. Instead, the ship drove at a long slant from
the Sun, moving in a gently curving orbit that would bring it onto Venus at
the same time that Venus itself was moving along in its orbit. This is what
they had tried to do before, but without success. Venus travels around the
Sun at a speed of about 32 miles per second, and takes about 224.5 days to
complete the circuit. From where the Magellan took off, it would approach
and overtake Venus at a speed a little greater than the 32 miles per second.
The days passed swiftly enough. They had developed the pictures taken in
the Mercury station, and the engineers and astronomers spent long hours
debating their features, matching up what they had seen with what was
known about the Andes station.
The shining face of Venus grew larger. It was a mysterious planet, the most
mysterious in the system, even though it was the closest of the planets to
red bulb and the blowup, we could work out the approximate distance."
But, unfortunately, the time could not be judged that accurately. Neither
Burl nor Boulton had had time to look at his watch.
They hung over the cold side of Mercury for several hours more while the
two astronomers figured their next move. When the orbits had been
determined, the Magellan turned its massive wide nose away from the Sun
toward a gleaming white disc that dominated the dark skies of outer space.
With full power on, they pushed away from the littlest planet and began the
long fall toward the Sun's second planet, that which some had considered to
be Earth's veiled twin, Venus.
There was a matter of thirty million miles to cross, and the crossing would
be made fighting the pull of the Sun all the way.
Caton and his men had spent the wait on Mercury working on the great
generators in the powerhouse nose. They recalibrated the output and
corrected it from the records kept during the flight inward. Now they were
confident of its ability to drive the ship away from the Sun. Coming in, they
had not been sure what their A-G drive would do and could do. Going
outward they knew just what to expect.
They did not travel blindly outward, for that would have been both a crude
waste of power and inaccurate. Instead, the ship drove at a long slant from
the Sun, moving in a gently curving orbit that would bring it onto Venus at
the same time that Venus itself was moving along in its orbit. This is what
they had tried to do before, but without success. Venus travels around the
Sun at a speed of about 32 miles per second, and takes about 224.5 days to
complete the circuit. From where the Magellan took off, it would approach
and overtake Venus at a speed a little greater than the 32 miles per second.
The days passed swiftly enough. They had developed the pictures taken in
the Mercury station, and the engineers and astronomers spent long hours
debating their features, matching up what they had seen with what was
known about the Andes station.
The shining face of Venus grew larger. It was a mysterious planet, the most
mysterious in the system, even though it was the closest of the planets to
Page 67
Earth. Venus was a world whose atmosphere—of Earthly depth—was a
solid mass of clouds. Never had the clouds lifted to reveal the surface. The
clouds reflected the sunlight brilliantly, yet as Burl could now see with the
naked eye, parts of it were hazy, as if mighty storms were raising dark
particles from below.
"We've had a couple of prober rockets shot into its surface," said Russ, as
they watched the oncoming planet. "They didn't prove much—faded out
fast, but we think they established its length of day. Nobody knew how
many hours it took Venus to rotate on its axis. Some even thought it always
presented one face to the Sun as does Mercury. Others thought it had a
quick day, shorter than Earth's. Others gave it a day almost a month long.
"Our prober rockets, carrying unmanned instruments, rather definitely
indicate that the planet has a day about twenty Earth-days long. Even
though it's shielded by the clouds, it must be miserably hot near the
surface."
"We'll soon find out." Burl grinned. "After Mercury, it couldn't be so bad.
Maybe it rains all the time."
Russ shrugged. "Who knows?" he said.
Venus was a vast sea of swirling white and gray clouds beneath them when
the Magellan reached it. They hung above the cloud level, while stretching
below them lay the circular bowl of veiled mystery that was the fabled
evening star of poem and song.
Oberfield was probing the surface with the radiation counters for the Sun-
tap distortion. None had been detected from Earth, but observation of the
sunny face of Venus had always been difficult from the third planetary
orbit. But quickly the dour astronomer proved the fact. A calculation of the
planet's albedo—its rate of reflected sunlight—showed that in one large
central section there was a dimming out. Somewhere in that spot, the light
was being diverted.
Lockhart brought the Magellan down gradually, closer, closer, and finally
sank it into the soupy atmosphere of Venus. Now, from every viewplate,
nothing reflected but a glare of white mist. But the ship was not operating
solid mass of clouds. Never had the clouds lifted to reveal the surface. The
clouds reflected the sunlight brilliantly, yet as Burl could now see with the
naked eye, parts of it were hazy, as if mighty storms were raising dark
particles from below.
"We've had a couple of prober rockets shot into its surface," said Russ, as
they watched the oncoming planet. "They didn't prove much—faded out
fast, but we think they established its length of day. Nobody knew how
many hours it took Venus to rotate on its axis. Some even thought it always
presented one face to the Sun as does Mercury. Others thought it had a
quick day, shorter than Earth's. Others gave it a day almost a month long.
"Our prober rockets, carrying unmanned instruments, rather definitely
indicate that the planet has a day about twenty Earth-days long. Even
though it's shielded by the clouds, it must be miserably hot near the
surface."
"We'll soon find out." Burl grinned. "After Mercury, it couldn't be so bad.
Maybe it rains all the time."
Russ shrugged. "Who knows?" he said.
Venus was a vast sea of swirling white and gray clouds beneath them when
the Magellan reached it. They hung above the cloud level, while stretching
below them lay the circular bowl of veiled mystery that was the fabled
evening star of poem and song.
Oberfield was probing the surface with the radiation counters for the Sun-
tap distortion. None had been detected from Earth, but observation of the
sunny face of Venus had always been difficult from the third planetary
orbit. But quickly the dour astronomer proved the fact. A calculation of the
planet's albedo—its rate of reflected sunlight—showed that in one large
central section there was a dimming out. Somewhere in that spot, the light
was being diverted.
Lockhart brought the Magellan down gradually, closer, closer, and finally
sank it into the soupy atmosphere of Venus. Now, from every viewplate,
nothing reflected but a glare of white mist. But the ship was not operating
Page 68
blind. Radar pierced the clouds, and from the wide screens the crew could
see that they had not yet touched the surface.
"Watch out for mountains," whispered Russ, hanging over Lockhart's
shoulder.
Their progress was slow but steady. The cloud bank around them did not
clear, but still glowed gray. After a descent of nearly two hours, there was a
flicker on the radar. It registered no features, no mountains, nothing but a
seemingly flat plain.
Above and around them the white clouds still blanketed everything. But
now Burl thought he saw a pale glow. Gradually the white faded away into
wisps and shreds, and in a flash the ship broke out of the clouds.
They hung beneath a grayish-white sky. Below them, scarcely a half mile of
visibility in misty, thin air, they saw the surface of Venus. They were over
water. An ocean stretched below them as far as the eye could see, with
neither a rock nor an island. Venus was a water world!
see that they had not yet touched the surface.
"Watch out for mountains," whispered Russ, hanging over Lockhart's
shoulder.
Their progress was slow but steady. The cloud bank around them did not
clear, but still glowed gray. After a descent of nearly two hours, there was a
flicker on the radar. It registered no features, no mountains, nothing but a
seemingly flat plain.
Above and around them the white clouds still blanketed everything. But
now Burl thought he saw a pale glow. Gradually the white faded away into
wisps and shreds, and in a flash the ship broke out of the clouds.
They hung beneath a grayish-white sky. Below them, scarcely a half mile of
visibility in misty, thin air, they saw the surface of Venus. They were over
water. An ocean stretched below them as far as the eye could see, with
neither a rock nor an island. Venus was a water world!
Page 69
Chapter 9.
The Ocean Primeval
The Magellan hung in the air while the men studied the surface of this
world that had so long been a mystery. The air was not the clear air of
Earth; rather, it was the kind that precedes the coming of a fog, thick, heavy
with moisture, the horizons fading into gray. Below them lay a mottled
expanse of water, reflecting the gray sky, and verging almost to a deep
brown. The water was still, occasionally stirred by a slight wave. "No tides
have ever moved these waters," commented Russ quietly to Burl. "There is
no moon to pull and sway them. The motion of this world, so slow in the
passage of its day, hardly disturbs the water."
"It looks shallow to me," said Burl. "The darker sections look as if the
bottom must be close."
"I imagine it is. We'll take soundings," Russ answered. "I have a feeling the
whole world may be like this ... one vast, shallow, swampy sea. See the
scum floating on it?"
"See it? Now that you mention it, there's hardly a part that hasn't something
on it," was Burl's reply. "There're patches of muck all over it, like floating
oil, or even drifting masses of weeds."
It was true. The water showed on its surface a strange filth unlike anything
one would expect on the surface of a Terrestrial sea. There were wide areas
of brownish-gray slime and little floating blobs of green. Shining flecks of
yellow, like bright oil drops, seemed to flow through and between the
masses of scum.
At the radar, Haines began to call out figures. As Russ had guessed, it was a
shallow sea. In places, the bottom was only a dozen feet beneath. For a
while, all the men of the crew were quiet, watching the silent waters
beneath them.
The Ocean Primeval
The Magellan hung in the air while the men studied the surface of this
world that had so long been a mystery. The air was not the clear air of
Earth; rather, it was the kind that precedes the coming of a fog, thick, heavy
with moisture, the horizons fading into gray. Below them lay a mottled
expanse of water, reflecting the gray sky, and verging almost to a deep
brown. The water was still, occasionally stirred by a slight wave. "No tides
have ever moved these waters," commented Russ quietly to Burl. "There is
no moon to pull and sway them. The motion of this world, so slow in the
passage of its day, hardly disturbs the water."
"It looks shallow to me," said Burl. "The darker sections look as if the
bottom must be close."
"I imagine it is. We'll take soundings," Russ answered. "I have a feeling the
whole world may be like this ... one vast, shallow, swampy sea. See the
scum floating on it?"
"See it? Now that you mention it, there's hardly a part that hasn't something
on it," was Burl's reply. "There're patches of muck all over it, like floating
oil, or even drifting masses of weeds."
It was true. The water showed on its surface a strange filth unlike anything
one would expect on the surface of a Terrestrial sea. There were wide areas
of brownish-gray slime and little floating blobs of green. Shining flecks of
yellow, like bright oil drops, seemed to flow through and between the
masses of scum.
At the radar, Haines began to call out figures. As Russ had guessed, it was a
shallow sea. In places, the bottom was only a dozen feet beneath. For a
while, all the men of the crew were quiet, watching the silent waters
beneath them.
Page 70
"Unclean, the whole place looks unclean," Lockhart said finally. "We've got
work to do. Let's find the Sun-tap station."
The rest of the crew came to action. The spaceship began to move slowly,
while Oberfield and Caton probed for the lines of force which would lead to
the station.
Now a long, low bank appeared, a ridge of mud protruding above the water.
Here and there stretched other low mud bars, and once a ridge of rock.
"I've seen no animals or birds," said Burl. "Do you suppose there are any?"
Russ pursed his lips. "I don't think so. From the look of this world, life
probably isn't developed that far. You won't find animals until there is dry
land—and I'd guess now that there's no place on all Venus where there is
much dry land. There may be fish or fish life, but even that's questionable.
Consider—the long, long day, the absence of violent, unshielded Sun rays,
the steady damp warmth, the quiet, barely moving waters, the heavy
amounts of carbon dioxide in the air...."
He paused and went over to Lockhart's chart table to pick up a paper.
"Oberfield worked out the atmosphere. It is very heavy in carbon dioxide,
very low in free oxygen. There's water vapor down here, but the clouds
have kept it below; it didn't show up in the outer atmosphere at all."
"There's the Sun-tap base," said Burl, and added as an afterthought, "I
think."
This one did not look at all like the other stations he had seen. There was
indeed a ringed wall station, but the wall was low and slanted outward. It
stood on the end of a wide mudbank, and near it veins of rock glistened as if
wet.
The interior machinery was a neat, compact mass of crystalline globes and
levers. But the masts and shining discs which had characterized the stations
on Mercury and Earth were missing. Instead, there floated upon the surface
of the water, for a mile around, great shining bowls, like huge saucers
gently rocking in the faint wavelets. Thin, flexible, shining lines of metal
connected this surface layout with the station.
work to do. Let's find the Sun-tap station."
The rest of the crew came to action. The spaceship began to move slowly,
while Oberfield and Caton probed for the lines of force which would lead to
the station.
Now a long, low bank appeared, a ridge of mud protruding above the water.
Here and there stretched other low mud bars, and once a ridge of rock.
"I've seen no animals or birds," said Burl. "Do you suppose there are any?"
Russ pursed his lips. "I don't think so. From the look of this world, life
probably isn't developed that far. You won't find animals until there is dry
land—and I'd guess now that there's no place on all Venus where there is
much dry land. There may be fish or fish life, but even that's questionable.
Consider—the long, long day, the absence of violent, unshielded Sun rays,
the steady damp warmth, the quiet, barely moving waters, the heavy
amounts of carbon dioxide in the air...."
He paused and went over to Lockhart's chart table to pick up a paper.
"Oberfield worked out the atmosphere. It is very heavy in carbon dioxide,
very low in free oxygen. There's water vapor down here, but the clouds
have kept it below; it didn't show up in the outer atmosphere at all."
"There's the Sun-tap base," said Burl, and added as an afterthought, "I
think."
This one did not look at all like the other stations he had seen. There was
indeed a ringed wall station, but the wall was low and slanted outward. It
stood on the end of a wide mudbank, and near it veins of rock glistened as if
wet.
The interior machinery was a neat, compact mass of crystalline globes and
levers. But the masts and shining discs which had characterized the stations
on Mercury and Earth were missing. Instead, there floated upon the surface
of the water, for a mile around, great shining bowls, like huge saucers
gently rocking in the faint wavelets. Thin, flexible, shining lines of metal
connected this surface layout with the station.
Page 71
"With no direct Sun to aim at, this station seems to be directed toward a
nonfocused system of light diversion," Lockhart announced. "The wrecking
crew please get under way!"
"I'm going down with you," Russ joined in. "I've gotten permission to take
some observations from the surface."
"Good," said Burl, and hurried with him down to the central floor.
They disembarked in two parties. Haines and Ferrati used the two-man
rocket plane and would make a wide encirclement of the vicinity, mapping
and finally blowing up the accumulator discs floating on the surface. Burl,
Russ, and Boulton took a helicopter.
The helicopter, under the control of the Marine captain, dropped out of the
cargo port of the Magellan. Steadied by the regular whirl of its great blades
and driven by tiny rocket jets in the tip of each wing, the whirlybird swung
down like a huge mosquito hovering over a swamp patch.
It moved over the water and finally hung directly over the mudbank.
Maneuvering so that the helicopter was directly in the protected circle of
the walls, Burl and Russ dropped a rope ladder and swung down hand over
hand to be the first human beings to set foot on Venus.
They were lightly dressed, for the temperature was hot, around 110°, and it
was humid. No breezes blew here. They wore shorts and shirts and high-
laced leather boots. Each carried two small tanks of oxygen on his back. A
leather mouth nozzle strapped across the shoulders guaranteed a steady
flow of breathable air. In their belts were strapped knives and army pistols.
Russ carried recording equipment, and Burl a hatchet.
They dropped off the swaying ladder inside the station. The ground was
hard-packed as if the builders had beaten it down and smoothed it off. The
globes were familiar to Burl—he had studied the pictures of the two he had
already visited and he realized that they followed the same general system.
Where the mast towers would have been, there were leads running through
the plastic walls out across the sea. He wondered briefly why the walls were
curved outward.
nonfocused system of light diversion," Lockhart announced. "The wrecking
crew please get under way!"
"I'm going down with you," Russ joined in. "I've gotten permission to take
some observations from the surface."
"Good," said Burl, and hurried with him down to the central floor.
They disembarked in two parties. Haines and Ferrati used the two-man
rocket plane and would make a wide encirclement of the vicinity, mapping
and finally blowing up the accumulator discs floating on the surface. Burl,
Russ, and Boulton took a helicopter.
The helicopter, under the control of the Marine captain, dropped out of the
cargo port of the Magellan. Steadied by the regular whirl of its great blades
and driven by tiny rocket jets in the tip of each wing, the whirlybird swung
down like a huge mosquito hovering over a swamp patch.
It moved over the water and finally hung directly over the mudbank.
Maneuvering so that the helicopter was directly in the protected circle of
the walls, Burl and Russ dropped a rope ladder and swung down hand over
hand to be the first human beings to set foot on Venus.
They were lightly dressed, for the temperature was hot, around 110°, and it
was humid. No breezes blew here. They wore shorts and shirts and high-
laced leather boots. Each carried two small tanks of oxygen on his back. A
leather mouth nozzle strapped across the shoulders guaranteed a steady
flow of breathable air. In their belts were strapped knives and army pistols.
Russ carried recording equipment, and Burl a hatchet.
They dropped off the swaying ladder inside the station. The ground was
hard-packed as if the builders had beaten it down and smoothed it off. The
globes were familiar to Burl—he had studied the pictures of the two he had
already visited and he realized that they followed the same general system.
Where the mast towers would have been, there were leads running through
the plastic walls out across the sea. He wondered briefly why the walls were
curved outward.
Page 72
As the helicopter moved away, the metal weight on the end of the dangling
ladder brushed the top of the wall. There was a crackling noise, and a spark
jumped between them.
"The wall is electrically charged," said Burl. "I wonder why?"
Russ shook his head. "From the looks of it, to keep off something. Perhaps
some kind of native life. But what? I'm sure there's nothing of a highly
organized physical structure here."
Burl found the controls of the station, but before touching them, he
remembered the alarm on Mercury. "I'd better try to smash the alarm first,"
he called out to Russ.
Finally, Burl located an isolated globe perched on a post, which resembled
the one he had briefly glimpsed on Mercury. He ran his hands over it,
feeling a mild vibration within. Then, at its base, he found the levers. He
moved them and the vibration died out. "I think I've turned it off," he
announced. "But stand by with a gun, just in case."
Russ drew his pistol, and Burl switched off the main controls of the Sun-
tap. A globe or two burst; there was a sort of settling down in the station.
Abruptly they felt the heat intensify and knew that the sky was shining
more brilliantly than before. The diversion of the Sun was over for Venus.
The alarm globe remained quiet, but Burl took his hatchet and smashed it.
Russ was carefully photographing the station, measuring the distances, and
tracing the lines. Overhead, the wide blades of the helicopter flapped
around and around, accompanied by little hissing puffs of rocket smoke.
They could see Boulton looking down at them from the tiny cabin.
Russ was scooping up bits of soil to bring back for analysis when he saw
what seemed to be a wet patch on top of the wall. As he watched, it spread
until it reached the bottom. In a remarkably short time a whole section of
wall was gleaming wet. A patch of damp oiliness spread over the floor.
"This I've got to get a sample of," said the rusty-haired astronomer. He
reached for a sampling bottle in his pocket, and at the same time the patch
of wetness spread to his shoes.
ladder brushed the top of the wall. There was a crackling noise, and a spark
jumped between them.
"The wall is electrically charged," said Burl. "I wonder why?"
Russ shook his head. "From the looks of it, to keep off something. Perhaps
some kind of native life. But what? I'm sure there's nothing of a highly
organized physical structure here."
Burl found the controls of the station, but before touching them, he
remembered the alarm on Mercury. "I'd better try to smash the alarm first,"
he called out to Russ.
Finally, Burl located an isolated globe perched on a post, which resembled
the one he had briefly glimpsed on Mercury. He ran his hands over it,
feeling a mild vibration within. Then, at its base, he found the levers. He
moved them and the vibration died out. "I think I've turned it off," he
announced. "But stand by with a gun, just in case."
Russ drew his pistol, and Burl switched off the main controls of the Sun-
tap. A globe or two burst; there was a sort of settling down in the station.
Abruptly they felt the heat intensify and knew that the sky was shining
more brilliantly than before. The diversion of the Sun was over for Venus.
The alarm globe remained quiet, but Burl took his hatchet and smashed it.
Russ was carefully photographing the station, measuring the distances, and
tracing the lines. Overhead, the wide blades of the helicopter flapped
around and around, accompanied by little hissing puffs of rocket smoke.
They could see Boulton looking down at them from the tiny cabin.
Russ was scooping up bits of soil to bring back for analysis when he saw
what seemed to be a wet patch on top of the wall. As he watched, it spread
until it reached the bottom. In a remarkably short time a whole section of
wall was gleaming wet. A patch of damp oiliness spread over the floor.
"This I've got to get a sample of," said the rusty-haired astronomer. He
reached for a sampling bottle in his pocket, and at the same time the patch
of wetness spread to his shoes.
Page 73
As Russ stepped forward, there was a sucking sound, and he lifted a thick
gummy mass that was stuck to his sole. He shook his foot, set it down, and
lifted the other, but it, too, was imbedded in thick slime. The stuff now was
running up his ankle.
"Hey!" he called out, and swung one foot vigorously to free it. More swiftly
than he could move, the whole patch slid down the wall and swept around
him. It was moving up his legs, as if trying to envelop him.
"It's alive!" he shouted, and grabbed for the knife in his belt. In vain he tried
to slash out. "It's like a giant amoeba that engulfs its food! Get it off me!"
But the knife was ineffective. He fired his pistol, but the thing was just a
vast wide puddle of slime, without brain, heart or organ that could be
harmed. The soles of Russ's boots were already half eaten away and his
socks were going fast. Some of it was touching the skin of his knees.
He screamed as the stuff burned him.
Burl had joined the attack with his knife, but leaped back when that proved
useless. His mind raced for a way to help. Above them, Boulton was
swinging the helicopter down so Russ could hoist himself out of harm's
way, but time would not permit it. In another instant the mass would have
Russ.
Burl grabbed at the straps crossing his shoulder and swung the two oxygen
tanks from his back. He snatched one from its leather holster, and pointed
its nozzle at the mass of slime. He turned the stream of oxygen on, and
then, taking his pistol, held its muzzle in the jet of oxygen and fired it.
The roar of the gun was matched by the roar of a stream of fire that shot
from the tank. Wherever the burning jet of oxygen touched, the mass
shriveled and blackened. Yards and yards of amoeba seemed to writhe,
hump upward in agony, and pull away.
There was a ring of burned white along the ground, a sickening smell in the
air, but the thing was dead.
Russell Clyde grabbed the ladder as it swung toward him, and climbed up.
The soles of his boots were gone and the sides were strings of raw, half-
gummy mass that was stuck to his sole. He shook his foot, set it down, and
lifted the other, but it, too, was imbedded in thick slime. The stuff now was
running up his ankle.
"Hey!" he called out, and swung one foot vigorously to free it. More swiftly
than he could move, the whole patch slid down the wall and swept around
him. It was moving up his legs, as if trying to envelop him.
"It's alive!" he shouted, and grabbed for the knife in his belt. In vain he tried
to slash out. "It's like a giant amoeba that engulfs its food! Get it off me!"
But the knife was ineffective. He fired his pistol, but the thing was just a
vast wide puddle of slime, without brain, heart or organ that could be
harmed. The soles of Russ's boots were already half eaten away and his
socks were going fast. Some of it was touching the skin of his knees.
He screamed as the stuff burned him.
Burl had joined the attack with his knife, but leaped back when that proved
useless. His mind raced for a way to help. Above them, Boulton was
swinging the helicopter down so Russ could hoist himself out of harm's
way, but time would not permit it. In another instant the mass would have
Russ.
Burl grabbed at the straps crossing his shoulder and swung the two oxygen
tanks from his back. He snatched one from its leather holster, and pointed
its nozzle at the mass of slime. He turned the stream of oxygen on, and
then, taking his pistol, held its muzzle in the jet of oxygen and fired it.
The roar of the gun was matched by the roar of a stream of fire that shot
from the tank. Wherever the burning jet of oxygen touched, the mass
shriveled and blackened. Yards and yards of amoeba seemed to writhe,
hump upward in agony, and pull away.
There was a ring of burned white along the ground, a sickening smell in the
air, but the thing was dead.
Russell Clyde grabbed the ladder as it swung toward him, and climbed up.
The soles of his boots were gone and the sides were strings of raw, half-
Page 74
eaten leather. His legs and knees bore ugly patches of red where the slime
had touched.
"Well done!" called Boulton to Burl from the cabin. "Come on up before
something else comes along!"
Burl grabbed the ladder. He took two steps on the swaying, swinging rope
as the helicopter started to climb and suddenly he felt himself losing
strength. He became dizzy and tried to hold on, but began to lose
consciousness. Dimly he heard Boulton yell at him, "The oxygen, the other
tank, turn it on!"
The second tank was still dangling from his chest.
Fighting for consciousness, Burl twisted the nozzle. There was a hiss and he
felt air blow against him. Miraculously, his senses cleared, and holding the
oxygen tank tight against him, he climbed up the ladder and into the safety
of the helicopter.
had touched.
"Well done!" called Boulton to Burl from the cabin. "Come on up before
something else comes along!"
Burl grabbed the ladder. He took two steps on the swaying, swinging rope
as the helicopter started to climb and suddenly he felt himself losing
strength. He became dizzy and tried to hold on, but began to lose
consciousness. Dimly he heard Boulton yell at him, "The oxygen, the other
tank, turn it on!"
The second tank was still dangling from his chest.
Fighting for consciousness, Burl twisted the nozzle. There was a hiss and he
felt air blow against him. Miraculously, his senses cleared, and holding the
oxygen tank tight against him, he climbed up the ladder and into the safety
of the helicopter.
Page 75
Chapter 10.
The Dying Planet
Russell Clyde was confined to his bunk during the next four days, his feet
wrapped in bandages and ointment. Fortunately the digestive juices of the
Venusian amoeba had only just begun their attack upon the skin after eating
through the footgear. Except for some painful blisters and rawness, his
condition was not serious.
The little stateroom was cramped, containing as it did two bunks, one above
the other, like the cabin of a liner. What with a couple of built-in lockers for
clothes, and a bolted-down chair and a reading lamp, it was not a place to
spend any more time than necessary. The lack of a window added to the
inhospitality of the room. But Burl had accepted long ago the fact that a
spaceship could not yet be considered a luxury liner. In time, the A-G drive
would permit such things, but the Magellan was an experimental vessel
turned by emergency into a warship.
During those four days, Burl spent most of his time with Russ, getting to
know him better, and talking about the trip. The young astronomer was not
at all chagrined by his misadventure. In fact, the whole experience had him
quite buoyed up.
"What a wonderful place for biologists to study! Venus will be a Mecca for
scientific learning!"
"But not for anything else, I don't think," said Burl. "Anyway, we're in for
another experience now. Mars is our next goal. What's it like?"
Russ put his hands behind his head and looked up at the bottom of the bunk
above him. "We can see Mars well enough; there's no cloud blanket and the
atmosphere is thin but clear. You've seen the photos and the colored
sketches?"
"I've seen it from our viewplates, but so far it's just a tiny, red disc. We're
about at Earth's orbit now, even though Earth is many millions of miles
The Dying Planet
Russell Clyde was confined to his bunk during the next four days, his feet
wrapped in bandages and ointment. Fortunately the digestive juices of the
Venusian amoeba had only just begun their attack upon the skin after eating
through the footgear. Except for some painful blisters and rawness, his
condition was not serious.
The little stateroom was cramped, containing as it did two bunks, one above
the other, like the cabin of a liner. What with a couple of built-in lockers for
clothes, and a bolted-down chair and a reading lamp, it was not a place to
spend any more time than necessary. The lack of a window added to the
inhospitality of the room. But Burl had accepted long ago the fact that a
spaceship could not yet be considered a luxury liner. In time, the A-G drive
would permit such things, but the Magellan was an experimental vessel
turned by emergency into a warship.
During those four days, Burl spent most of his time with Russ, getting to
know him better, and talking about the trip. The young astronomer was not
at all chagrined by his misadventure. In fact, the whole experience had him
quite buoyed up.
"What a wonderful place for biologists to study! Venus will be a Mecca for
scientific learning!"
"But not for anything else, I don't think," said Burl. "Anyway, we're in for
another experience now. Mars is our next goal. What's it like?"
Russ put his hands behind his head and looked up at the bottom of the bunk
above him. "We can see Mars well enough; there's no cloud blanket and the
atmosphere is thin but clear. You've seen the photos and the colored
sketches?"
"I've seen it from our viewplates, but so far it's just a tiny, red disc. We're
about at Earth's orbit now, even though Earth is many millions of miles
Page 76
away from us. Mars is still about fifty million miles further, but we're
gaining speed quite rapidly and Lockhart thinks we'll make it soon enough."
Burl picked up one of the books from the ship's library and started to thumb
through it to locate a color chart of the planet.
Russ waved a hand. "You don't have to show me. I've studied Mars by
telescope so often I know it by heart. It's mostly a sort of light, reddish-tan,
a kind of pale russet. We think that's desert. There are some fairly large
sections that are bluish-green—at least in the Martian summers. In their
winters these sections fade very greatly."
"That's vegetation," Burl broke in. "It must be! Everybody agrees it acts like
it. And there are the white polar caps, too."
"You can tell which season is which by the size of the polar ice caps. When
one is big, the other is almost gone. Then there's the problem of the
canals...."
"Do you believe in them?" asked Burl. "The books disagree. Some think
they're real—even say they look as if they had been built by intelligent
beings as irrigation channels to take the melting waters of the poles down to
the fertile lands. But other astronomers claim they can't see them—or that
they're illusions, series of cracks, or lines of dark dust blown by winds."
"Personally, I've come to believe in them," Russ argued. "They've been
photographed—something is there. They're very faint, spidery lines, but
they certainly are straight and regular. We'll find out soon enough."
Find out they did. Russ was up and about and the normal life of the ship
resumed. During their passage of Earth's orbit, they had managed to raise
the United States on the ship's radio. For three days they were able to
converse with their home base. They exchanged news and data, transmitted
back all they had learned and eagerly asked for news.
The men of the crew had the chance to send messages home, and Burl even
talked briefly with his father. There had been an important discovery made
on Earth.
The lines of force had finally been traced. The distortions visible on Mars,
as well as the one from Mercury before its cutoff, had been worked out
gaining speed quite rapidly and Lockhart thinks we'll make it soon enough."
Burl picked up one of the books from the ship's library and started to thumb
through it to locate a color chart of the planet.
Russ waved a hand. "You don't have to show me. I've studied Mars by
telescope so often I know it by heart. It's mostly a sort of light, reddish-tan,
a kind of pale russet. We think that's desert. There are some fairly large
sections that are bluish-green—at least in the Martian summers. In their
winters these sections fade very greatly."
"That's vegetation," Burl broke in. "It must be! Everybody agrees it acts like
it. And there are the white polar caps, too."
"You can tell which season is which by the size of the polar ice caps. When
one is big, the other is almost gone. Then there's the problem of the
canals...."
"Do you believe in them?" asked Burl. "The books disagree. Some think
they're real—even say they look as if they had been built by intelligent
beings as irrigation channels to take the melting waters of the poles down to
the fertile lands. But other astronomers claim they can't see them—or that
they're illusions, series of cracks, or lines of dark dust blown by winds."
"Personally, I've come to believe in them," Russ argued. "They've been
photographed—something is there. They're very faint, spidery lines, but
they certainly are straight and regular. We'll find out soon enough."
Find out they did. Russ was up and about and the normal life of the ship
resumed. During their passage of Earth's orbit, they had managed to raise
the United States on the ship's radio. For three days they were able to
converse with their home base. They exchanged news and data, transmitted
back all they had learned and eagerly asked for news.
The men of the crew had the chance to send messages home, and Burl even
talked briefly with his father. There had been an important discovery made
on Earth.
The lines of force had finally been traced. The distortions visible on Mars,
as well as the one from Mercury before its cutoff, had been worked out
Page 77
directionally. There was no doubt that a line of force had been channeled
outward to a point in space that now proved to be that of a planet. The
planet was Pluto.
"Pluto!" That was the shocked word uttered by everyone within hearing
distance when the radio voice said it.
"Pluto! Why, that's the end of the line! The most distant planet," said
Oberfield, shocked. "We'll have to go there—all the way!"
That fact sobered everyone. It meant the trip must last many times longer
than anyone had expected. But they were a band of men who had achieved
great things—they had managed so far to work together in harmony, and
they felt that since they had conquered two planets—what were a few
more?
Mars gradually grew larger on their telescopic viewers as the Magellan fell
onward through space, riding the beam of gravity that was like a pulling
rope to them. The slow down and reverse was made in good order—the
sphere swinging around, readjusting, and the great, driving Zeta-ring
generators now pushing and braking.
Then one wake period, Russ and Burl went to the telescope and trained it
again on the oncoming planet. The now large disc of the ruddy world swung
onto the screen. It looked strange, not at all like the drawings.
Burl had never seen it through Terrestrial telescopes, but he sensed
something was wrong. He realized suddenly, "Both poles are enlarged! It's
winter on both hemispheres! And that's impossible!"
Yet it was so. Both the Martian ice caps were present and both extended
down the northern and southern hemispheres of the world. The men stared
in silence.
Slowly Russ tried to figure it out, "The greenish-blue areas can scarcely be
seen. Where they should be, there're darker patches of brown, against the
yellowish-red that now seems to be the desert areas. It seems to be winter
on both sides and it looks bad. It looks to me as if Mars were a fast-dying
world."
outward to a point in space that now proved to be that of a planet. The
planet was Pluto.
"Pluto!" That was the shocked word uttered by everyone within hearing
distance when the radio voice said it.
"Pluto! Why, that's the end of the line! The most distant planet," said
Oberfield, shocked. "We'll have to go there—all the way!"
That fact sobered everyone. It meant the trip must last many times longer
than anyone had expected. But they were a band of men who had achieved
great things—they had managed so far to work together in harmony, and
they felt that since they had conquered two planets—what were a few
more?
Mars gradually grew larger on their telescopic viewers as the Magellan fell
onward through space, riding the beam of gravity that was like a pulling
rope to them. The slow down and reverse was made in good order—the
sphere swinging around, readjusting, and the great, driving Zeta-ring
generators now pushing and braking.
Then one wake period, Russ and Burl went to the telescope and trained it
again on the oncoming planet. The now large disc of the ruddy world swung
onto the screen. It looked strange, not at all like the drawings.
Burl had never seen it through Terrestrial telescopes, but he sensed
something was wrong. He realized suddenly, "Both poles are enlarged! It's
winter on both hemispheres! And that's impossible!"
Yet it was so. Both the Martian ice caps were present and both extended
down the northern and southern hemispheres of the world. The men stared
in silence.
Slowly Russ tried to figure it out, "The greenish-blue areas can scarcely be
seen. Where they should be, there're darker patches of brown, against the
yellowish-red that now seems to be the desert areas. It seems to be winter
on both sides and it looks bad. It looks to me as if Mars were a fast-dying
world."
Page 78
Burl squinted his eyes. "Yet I see the canals. The straight lines are still
visible—see?"
Russ nodded. "They're real. But what's happened?"
Indeed, the planet seemed blighted. "It's the Sun-tap," Burl decided. "We
should have realized what it would do."
"Remember Earth the week it was working? The temperature fell several
degrees, began to damage crops? Remember how it snowed in places where
snow had never fallen in July? Remember the predictions of disaster for
crops, of danger from winter snows if the drop continued?"
Russ went on in his careful, explanatory way. "And for Mars it has
continued. Mars was always colder than Earth; life there must have been far
more precariously balanced. During the day, on the Martian equator in
midsummer, the highest temperature is not likely to be more than 70° or
80°; and at night, even then, it would fall below freezing. Vegetation on
Mars must have been hardy in the best of times, and life carried on under
great difficulties.
"Now the margin of warmth and light has been cut. It has been just enough
to keep both polar caps frozen, to prevent water from reaching the fertile
regions, and the cold has advanced enough to bar the growth and
regeneration of plant life. If the Sun-tapping on Mars is not stopped, all life
there will die out, and it will be a permanently dead world forever."
The news spread throughout the crew and there was a feeling of anger and
urgency. Nobody knew what lived on Mars, yet the subject of Mars and
Martians had always intrigued the imaginations of people on Earth. Now, to
hear that the unknown enemy had nearly slain a neighboring world brought
home vividly just what would also have been the fate of Earth.
The day finally came when the big spaceship slid into an orbit about the
ruddy planet. It circled just outside the atmospheric level while the men
aboard studied the surface for its secrets.
Mars was indeed inhabited. This fact was borne home by the canals and the
very evident artificial nature of their construction. They could see clearly
through their telescopes that there was an intricate global network of
visible—see?"
Russ nodded. "They're real. But what's happened?"
Indeed, the planet seemed blighted. "It's the Sun-tap," Burl decided. "We
should have realized what it would do."
"Remember Earth the week it was working? The temperature fell several
degrees, began to damage crops? Remember how it snowed in places where
snow had never fallen in July? Remember the predictions of disaster for
crops, of danger from winter snows if the drop continued?"
Russ went on in his careful, explanatory way. "And for Mars it has
continued. Mars was always colder than Earth; life there must have been far
more precariously balanced. During the day, on the Martian equator in
midsummer, the highest temperature is not likely to be more than 70° or
80°; and at night, even then, it would fall below freezing. Vegetation on
Mars must have been hardy in the best of times, and life carried on under
great difficulties.
"Now the margin of warmth and light has been cut. It has been just enough
to keep both polar caps frozen, to prevent water from reaching the fertile
regions, and the cold has advanced enough to bar the growth and
regeneration of plant life. If the Sun-tapping on Mars is not stopped, all life
there will die out, and it will be a permanently dead world forever."
The news spread throughout the crew and there was a feeling of anger and
urgency. Nobody knew what lived on Mars, yet the subject of Mars and
Martians had always intrigued the imaginations of people on Earth. Now, to
hear that the unknown enemy had nearly slain a neighboring world brought
home vividly just what would also have been the fate of Earth.
The day finally came when the big spaceship slid into an orbit about the
ruddy planet. It circled just outside the atmospheric level while the men
aboard studied the surface for its secrets.
Mars was indeed inhabited. This fact was borne home by the canals and the
very evident artificial nature of their construction. They could see clearly
through their telescopes that there was an intricate global network of
Page 79
pipelines, pumping stations, and irrigation viaducts from pole to pole. They
also saw that at the intersections of the canals were dark sections
crisscrossed with thin blobs of gray and black which proved under the
telescopes to be clusters of buildings. There were cities on Mars, linked by
the waterways.
They saw no aircraft. They detected no railroad lines or roadways beyond
the canalways themselves. The many regions of darker, better ground,
intersected by the canals which no longer fulfilled their purposes, were
covered with thick vegetation—forests of dying, wintery stalks. Only a
flicker of dark green here and there showed where some faint irrigation still
got through.
They saw also that there were lines of white, which had not been visible
before. Snow was gathering in low spots, and the planet was freezing up.
The lines of solar distortion were strong, and they traced them to their point
of concentration. The point was not some isolated spot far in a desert, away
from Martian investigation. To the amazement of the men, the location of
the Sun-tap station was actually within a Martian city!
"Do you suppose," Lockhart queried the others, "that the Martians
themselves are the builders of this setup—that this is their project—that
they are the criminals and not the victims?"
There was no answer. The evidence was apparent, but it made no sense. If
the Martians had created this thing, it was destroying them. And yet, if they
had not created it, why did they—so clearly a race that had attained a high
level of engineering ability—tolerate its continual existence?
As the ship descended, they saw the city emerge. It consisted of hundreds of
gray mounds—buildings laid out in the form of neat hemispherical
structures, like skyscraper igloos, with rows of circular windows. Each
building was like the next, and they fitted together in a series of great
circles, radiating outward from the meeting spot of the canals.
The explorer crew waited at the ship's rocket launchers for an attack. The
tail of the teardrop housed the built-in armament—the rocket tubes which
could send forth destruction to an enemy. But though Haines sat with his
also saw that at the intersections of the canals were dark sections
crisscrossed with thin blobs of gray and black which proved under the
telescopes to be clusters of buildings. There were cities on Mars, linked by
the waterways.
They saw no aircraft. They detected no railroad lines or roadways beyond
the canalways themselves. The many regions of darker, better ground,
intersected by the canals which no longer fulfilled their purposes, were
covered with thick vegetation—forests of dying, wintery stalks. Only a
flicker of dark green here and there showed where some faint irrigation still
got through.
They saw also that there were lines of white, which had not been visible
before. Snow was gathering in low spots, and the planet was freezing up.
The lines of solar distortion were strong, and they traced them to their point
of concentration. The point was not some isolated spot far in a desert, away
from Martian investigation. To the amazement of the men, the location of
the Sun-tap station was actually within a Martian city!
"Do you suppose," Lockhart queried the others, "that the Martians
themselves are the builders of this setup—that this is their project—that
they are the criminals and not the victims?"
There was no answer. The evidence was apparent, but it made no sense. If
the Martians had created this thing, it was destroying them. And yet, if they
had not created it, why did they—so clearly a race that had attained a high
level of engineering ability—tolerate its continual existence?
As the ship descended, they saw the city emerge. It consisted of hundreds of
gray mounds—buildings laid out in the form of neat hemispherical
structures, like skyscraper igloos, with rows of circular windows. Each
building was like the next, and they fitted together in a series of great
circles, radiating outward from the meeting spot of the canals.
The explorer crew waited at the ship's rocket launchers for an attack. The
tail of the teardrop housed the built-in armament—the rocket tubes which
could send forth destruction to an enemy. But though Haines sat with his
Page 80
finger on the launcher button, no aircraft rose to meet them from the city
below. No guns barked at them. No panic started in the streets.
They could see tiny dots of living beings moving about, but no sign of
alarm, no evidence that they had been noticed.
Even here, at the equator, there were streaks of white snow in the streets
and rings of rime along the bases of the buildings.
Directly below them lay the Sun-tap station. The lines converged here, and
the rings of distortion could be seen in the atmosphere, causing the city to
flicker as if from the presence of invisible waves.
Then they saw the masts and their shining accumulators projecting about a
cleared spot near the outskirts of the city. The customary walled ring and
the open machinery were not visible.
"The Sun-tap station is under the city!" said Lockhart, shocked. "It's been
built beneath the streets somewhere, and the Martians walk around above it
and let the masts alone! They must be the builders!"
"If so, why are they killing themselves?" Burl couldn't see the sense of it.
"And if they have reasons, then why don't they defend it? They were alerted
while we were on Mercury. They must have spaceships if they are the
enemy. Where are they?"
The ground was now but a few hundred feet below them, and still no one
paid the strange ship hanging in the sky any attention. While the crew stood
with bated breath, Lockhart brought the ship down and down, until it came
to rest barely fifty feet above an intersection. There it hung, nearly touching
the roofs, and was ignored.
The shining masts of the Sun-tap station continued to gleam, following the
tiny bright Sun in its course through the dark blue of the sky. One of the two
small Martian moons was climbing upward along the horizon. The canals
beyond were dark lines of conduit, through which no life-giving waters
flowed. And the Martians did nothing.
below. No guns barked at them. No panic started in the streets.
They could see tiny dots of living beings moving about, but no sign of
alarm, no evidence that they had been noticed.
Even here, at the equator, there were streaks of white snow in the streets
and rings of rime along the bases of the buildings.
Directly below them lay the Sun-tap station. The lines converged here, and
the rings of distortion could be seen in the atmosphere, causing the city to
flicker as if from the presence of invisible waves.
Then they saw the masts and their shining accumulators projecting about a
cleared spot near the outskirts of the city. The customary walled ring and
the open machinery were not visible.
"The Sun-tap station is under the city!" said Lockhart, shocked. "It's been
built beneath the streets somewhere, and the Martians walk around above it
and let the masts alone! They must be the builders!"
"If so, why are they killing themselves?" Burl couldn't see the sense of it.
"And if they have reasons, then why don't they defend it? They were alerted
while we were on Mercury. They must have spaceships if they are the
enemy. Where are they?"
The ground was now but a few hundred feet below them, and still no one
paid the strange ship hanging in the sky any attention. While the crew stood
with bated breath, Lockhart brought the ship down and down, until it came
to rest barely fifty feet above an intersection. There it hung, nearly touching
the roofs, and was ignored.
The shining masts of the Sun-tap station continued to gleam, following the
tiny bright Sun in its course through the dark blue of the sky. One of the two
small Martian moons was climbing upward along the horizon. The canals
beyond were dark lines of conduit, through which no life-giving waters
flowed. And the Martians did nothing.
Page 81
Page 82
Chapter 11.
Martians Don't Care
"I don't like the looks of this at all," said Lockhart finally. "I suspect a trap.
Yet we've got to land and get at that base. I'm going to take the ship out into
the desert beyond the city and let a scouting squad go in first."
The Magellan lifted back into the sky, then moved out over the ocher
wasteland that was the barren desert of the red planet. Slowly the ship
dropped again until its pointed nether end hung about twenty feet above the
cold shale and time-worn sand.
Captain Boulton and Ferrati were selected to do the initial survey. Burl and
Haines helped them climb through the packed spaces of the outer hold. The
jeep was swung out to the lowermost cargo port, and the spaceship's cargo
derrick lowered the compact army vehicle to the ground.
The two scouts then put on altitude suits with oxygen masks, slung walkie-
talkies about their chests, took light carbines in hand and pistols in belts and
went down the rope ladder from the cargo port. They climbed into the
sturdy jeep with its specially-designed carburetor and pressurized engine.
The vehicle had been prepared to operate in the light atmosphere of Mars,
as thin as the air on a Himalayan mountaintop, and low in free oxygen.
Burl and Haines, clad in pressure suits themselves, sat in the open port and
watched the jeep set off. The engine kicked over and barked a few times in
the strange air. Then Boulton at the wheel threw in the clutch, stepped on
the gas, and the squat little car, painted in Air Force blue, rolled off over the
flat rocky surface, kicking up a light cloud of sand as it went.
On Haines's lap sat a walkie-talkie. Boulton and Ferrati kept up a running
commentary as they approached the city. Ferrati described the ground and
the appearance of the oncoming city.
The jeep was now a small object merging with the dark mounds of the city's
outermost buildings. "We haven't met any Martians yet," came Ferrari's
Martians Don't Care
"I don't like the looks of this at all," said Lockhart finally. "I suspect a trap.
Yet we've got to land and get at that base. I'm going to take the ship out into
the desert beyond the city and let a scouting squad go in first."
The Magellan lifted back into the sky, then moved out over the ocher
wasteland that was the barren desert of the red planet. Slowly the ship
dropped again until its pointed nether end hung about twenty feet above the
cold shale and time-worn sand.
Captain Boulton and Ferrati were selected to do the initial survey. Burl and
Haines helped them climb through the packed spaces of the outer hold. The
jeep was swung out to the lowermost cargo port, and the spaceship's cargo
derrick lowered the compact army vehicle to the ground.
The two scouts then put on altitude suits with oxygen masks, slung walkie-
talkies about their chests, took light carbines in hand and pistols in belts and
went down the rope ladder from the cargo port. They climbed into the
sturdy jeep with its specially-designed carburetor and pressurized engine.
The vehicle had been prepared to operate in the light atmosphere of Mars,
as thin as the air on a Himalayan mountaintop, and low in free oxygen.
Burl and Haines, clad in pressure suits themselves, sat in the open port and
watched the jeep set off. The engine kicked over and barked a few times in
the strange air. Then Boulton at the wheel threw in the clutch, stepped on
the gas, and the squat little car, painted in Air Force blue, rolled off over the
flat rocky surface, kicking up a light cloud of sand as it went.
On Haines's lap sat a walkie-talkie. Boulton and Ferrati kept up a running
commentary as they approached the city. Ferrati described the ground and
the appearance of the oncoming city.
The jeep was now a small object merging with the dark mounds of the city's
outermost buildings. "We haven't met any Martians yet," came Ferrari's
Page 83
voice. "Apparently they aren't interested in investigating us even now. And
here we are rolling right up to the city limits." There was a pause.
The walkie-talkie emitted a series of squeaks and squawks, and Ferrati's
voice came through now with distortion. "We're crossing the city limits—
there's a sort of hard, plastic pavement that begins at the very edge. Now
we're going down an intersection between the buildings."
The squawks became increasingly louder. They could hear only a word or
two. Haines asked whether he was getting through to them, but he could not
make out an answer because of the racket.
"It's the Sun-tap station. It's generating distortion. We'll have to wait until
they return," said Burl.
Haines nodded and turned off the set which had begun to utter ear-piercing
howls. The two men waited quietly for about half an hour. Only a phone
call from the curious men in the control room interrupted their vigil.
Then finally Burl spotted a little cloud of dust on the horizon. "There they
are!"
The two men stood up as the little jeep made its way back over the desert to
the ship. As it drew closer, they saw a third occupant sitting in the back with
Ferrati. Haines opened the walkie-talkie. "Wait till you see this fellow,"
Ferrati's comment came through.
The jeep drew up to the ship and stopped. Ferrati waved them down. A few
seconds later they were joined by Lockhart and Clyde, also in pressure
suits.
The creature in the back of the jeep was a Martian. They stared in
fascination. It was about three feet long with a small, oval-shaped head and
two very large, many-faceted eyes. A small, beaklike mouth and short,
stubby antennae completed its face. The head was attached by a short neck
to a body that consisted of three oval masses joined together by narrow
belts, much like the joints of an insect. A pair of arms, ending in long three-
fingered hands, grew from the first segment. A set of long, thin legs grew
out of each of the two other segments. A glistening grayish-blue shell, its
skin, covered it from head to foot.
here we are rolling right up to the city limits." There was a pause.
The walkie-talkie emitted a series of squeaks and squawks, and Ferrati's
voice came through now with distortion. "We're crossing the city limits—
there's a sort of hard, plastic pavement that begins at the very edge. Now
we're going down an intersection between the buildings."
The squawks became increasingly louder. They could hear only a word or
two. Haines asked whether he was getting through to them, but he could not
make out an answer because of the racket.
"It's the Sun-tap station. It's generating distortion. We'll have to wait until
they return," said Burl.
Haines nodded and turned off the set which had begun to utter ear-piercing
howls. The two men waited quietly for about half an hour. Only a phone
call from the curious men in the control room interrupted their vigil.
Then finally Burl spotted a little cloud of dust on the horizon. "There they
are!"
The two men stood up as the little jeep made its way back over the desert to
the ship. As it drew closer, they saw a third occupant sitting in the back with
Ferrati. Haines opened the walkie-talkie. "Wait till you see this fellow,"
Ferrati's comment came through.
The jeep drew up to the ship and stopped. Ferrati waved them down. A few
seconds later they were joined by Lockhart and Clyde, also in pressure
suits.
The creature in the back of the jeep was a Martian. They stared in
fascination. It was about three feet long with a small, oval-shaped head and
two very large, many-faceted eyes. A small, beaklike mouth and short,
stubby antennae completed its face. The head was attached by a short neck
to a body that consisted of three oval masses joined together by narrow
belts, much like the joints of an insect. A pair of arms, ending in long three-
fingered hands, grew from the first segment. A set of long, thin legs grew
out of each of the two other segments. A glistening grayish-blue shell, its
skin, covered it from head to foot.
Page 84
At the moment, this particular Martian was tightly restrained by a strong
nylon net, and was obviously the captive of the two explorers.
"Why, it looks like a giant insect!" exclaimed Burl.
"More like a kind of lobster," was Ferrati's answer. "But this is it. This is
one of the city dwellers."
Lockhart shook his head. "I don't like this. We shouldn't do anything to
antagonize the Martians. Taking one prisoner like this may be a bad first
move."
Boulton stepped out of the jeep. "There wasn't anything else we could do.
Besides, who said that Martians were ever our friends?"
"We got into the city," he went on, "and drove around the streets. There
were plenty of these fellows around, going about their business. Hundreds
of 'em. Do you think they stopped to look at us? Do you think they were
curious? Do you think they talked to us? Called the police? Did anything at
all?
"No," he answered himself. "They just walked around us as if we were a
stick of something in the way. They don't say anything to each other. They
just go on about their affairs, dragging things, carrying food, herding young
ones, and not a darn word.
"They looked at us, and didn't even act as if they saw us. When we stopped
one, it squirmed out of our grasp and walked away. Finally we took this
fellow, simply grabbed him off the street, tied him up, stuffed him in the
jeep and kidnaped him. And do you think anybody cared or turned in an
alarm or tried to help him? No!"
Lockhart looked at the prisoner a moment. The Martian stared at him out of
his unwinking multiple eyes. "Are you sure these are the engineers of the
canals, the builders?"
Boulton nodded. "Definitely. We saw some of them at work. They were
repairing a house and they used tools and fire. They have machines, and
they use them. They've got their city working and well laid out, but I don't
know how they do it. They must communicate in some way, but they act as
nylon net, and was obviously the captive of the two explorers.
"Why, it looks like a giant insect!" exclaimed Burl.
"More like a kind of lobster," was Ferrati's answer. "But this is it. This is
one of the city dwellers."
Lockhart shook his head. "I don't like this. We shouldn't do anything to
antagonize the Martians. Taking one prisoner like this may be a bad first
move."
Boulton stepped out of the jeep. "There wasn't anything else we could do.
Besides, who said that Martians were ever our friends?"
"We got into the city," he went on, "and drove around the streets. There
were plenty of these fellows around, going about their business. Hundreds
of 'em. Do you think they stopped to look at us? Do you think they were
curious? Do you think they talked to us? Called the police? Did anything at
all?
"No," he answered himself. "They just walked around us as if we were a
stick of something in the way. They don't say anything to each other. They
just go on about their affairs, dragging things, carrying food, herding young
ones, and not a darn word.
"They looked at us, and didn't even act as if they saw us. When we stopped
one, it squirmed out of our grasp and walked away. Finally we took this
fellow, simply grabbed him off the street, tied him up, stuffed him in the
jeep and kidnaped him. And do you think anybody cared or turned in an
alarm or tried to help him? No!"
Lockhart looked at the prisoner a moment. The Martian stared at him out of
his unwinking multiple eyes. "Are you sure these are the engineers of the
canals, the builders?"
Boulton nodded. "Definitely. We saw some of them at work. They were
repairing a house and they used tools and fire. They have machines, and
they use them. They've got their city working and well laid out, but I don't
know how they do it. They must communicate in some way, but they act as
Page 85
if they had been drilled in their jobs and were going through an elaborate
and complicated pantomime. Even the young don't utter a peep."
Lockhart stepped back a bit. "Untie this fellow. Let's see what he does."
When the Martian had been released from the enveloping net, it made no
effort to communicate. It turned slowly around, a little wobbly at first, and
wandered off, paying no attention to the men, the ship, or the jeep. Then it
started walking at a rapid pace. The men watched as it trotted into the desert
—away from the city!
It seemed to wander around as if lost, and then set out in another direction,
but still one that would not take it to the city which was quite plainly in
view.
The Martian disappeared from view behind a series of small hummocks,
still bound for nowhere.
The men were lost in amazement. Russell Clyde uttered a low whistle.
"Burl's right. It must be a sort of insect."
"This whole civilization seems to be insectlike, if you ask me," said Burl.
"It's like a huge anthill, or a big bee-hive. It seems complicated, and the
creatures go through complex activities, and all the time it's something they
were born with."
Ferrati nodded. "Now that you mention it, that's exactly what the city was
like. Nobody gave orders—everybody just did what they were supposed to
do. Nobody was curious about us because it wasn't their business."
"And, individually, they haven't intelligence," Clyde added. "That one—the
one you took away from his work—plainly is lost. He doesn't know how to
go about getting back. He has no curiosity about us ... he may not even have
much of a brain. Individual ants have no brain—only a sort of central nerve
center. Collectively, they perform wonders; individually, they are quite
helpless."
Lockhart interrupted the discussion. "Well, then, let's get on with it.
Obviously, the Sun-tap builders placed their station in this city because it
was a safe spot, protected by the Martians themselves, and because the
and complicated pantomime. Even the young don't utter a peep."
Lockhart stepped back a bit. "Untie this fellow. Let's see what he does."
When the Martian had been released from the enveloping net, it made no
effort to communicate. It turned slowly around, a little wobbly at first, and
wandered off, paying no attention to the men, the ship, or the jeep. Then it
started walking at a rapid pace. The men watched as it trotted into the desert
—away from the city!
It seemed to wander around as if lost, and then set out in another direction,
but still one that would not take it to the city which was quite plainly in
view.
The Martian disappeared from view behind a series of small hummocks,
still bound for nowhere.
The men were lost in amazement. Russell Clyde uttered a low whistle.
"Burl's right. It must be a sort of insect."
"This whole civilization seems to be insectlike, if you ask me," said Burl.
"It's like a huge anthill, or a big bee-hive. It seems complicated, and the
creatures go through complex activities, and all the time it's something they
were born with."
Ferrati nodded. "Now that you mention it, that's exactly what the city was
like. Nobody gave orders—everybody just did what they were supposed to
do. Nobody was curious about us because it wasn't their business."
"And, individually, they haven't intelligence," Clyde added. "That one—the
one you took away from his work—plainly is lost. He doesn't know how to
go about getting back. He has no curiosity about us ... he may not even have
much of a brain. Individual ants have no brain—only a sort of central nerve
center. Collectively, they perform wonders; individually, they are quite
helpless."
Lockhart interrupted the discussion. "Well, then, let's get on with it.
Obviously, the Sun-tap builders placed their station in this city because it
was a safe spot, protected by the Martians themselves, and because the
Page 86
Martians would never think to interfere with them. So you men can go
back, take your stuff, dig out the station and put it out of commission. Get
going."
Haines and Burl climbed into the jeep with Boulton and Ferrati. Russell
Clyde insisted on joining them, and Lockhart gave his consent. Off they
went, rumbling over the sand toward the city of instinct.
Burl was excited and curious about the Martians. They presented a strange
mixture of contradictions. "How," he asked Russ, "could they have built a
world-wide network of canals, set up pumping stations, laid out plantations,
mastered hydraulic and power engineering, if they are mere creatures of
instinct? Surely there must be brainy ones somewhere? A thinker species?"
"Not necessarily," said Russ. "Remember, these creatures are operating
without opposition—they are really the highest type of life here. The need
to conserve water and continue their hive life forced them to learn a
practical kind of engineering. Nobody knows how the ants and bees formed
their complex societies—there are none among them with any larger brains
than the rest, and they do not talk. But somehow ants and bees
communicate and somehow they act as a mass. Figure it on a world-wide
scale, driven by the threat of their world drying up, and these creatures built
up a mechanical civilization to meet it. But it also accounts for why they
have never flown, not through the air and not through space, why they
haven't attempted radio communication with Earth, and why they don't
understand what the Sun-tap station is doing to them. Their world is being
killed, and they literally haven't the brains to understand it."
They reached the city. All about was a silent hustle and bustle of enigmatic,
shining, shelled creatures. Superficially, it looked like an intelligent
civilization. There were wheeled carts driven by some sort of steam
generator. Steam-driven engines ran factories.
The Martians made way for the jeep with unconcern. Never had they seen
creatures as large as themselves that were not of their own kind on hive
business. Hence, none such could exist. This was a world totally without
individualism, a civilization without a spoken language, without names,
without banners. Wherever or however the mass knowledge was located or
transmitted, no individual of another species could ever hope to know. It
back, take your stuff, dig out the station and put it out of commission. Get
going."
Haines and Burl climbed into the jeep with Boulton and Ferrati. Russell
Clyde insisted on joining them, and Lockhart gave his consent. Off they
went, rumbling over the sand toward the city of instinct.
Burl was excited and curious about the Martians. They presented a strange
mixture of contradictions. "How," he asked Russ, "could they have built a
world-wide network of canals, set up pumping stations, laid out plantations,
mastered hydraulic and power engineering, if they are mere creatures of
instinct? Surely there must be brainy ones somewhere? A thinker species?"
"Not necessarily," said Russ. "Remember, these creatures are operating
without opposition—they are really the highest type of life here. The need
to conserve water and continue their hive life forced them to learn a
practical kind of engineering. Nobody knows how the ants and bees formed
their complex societies—there are none among them with any larger brains
than the rest, and they do not talk. But somehow ants and bees
communicate and somehow they act as a mass. Figure it on a world-wide
scale, driven by the threat of their world drying up, and these creatures built
up a mechanical civilization to meet it. But it also accounts for why they
have never flown, not through the air and not through space, why they
haven't attempted radio communication with Earth, and why they don't
understand what the Sun-tap station is doing to them. Their world is being
killed, and they literally haven't the brains to understand it."
They reached the city. All about was a silent hustle and bustle of enigmatic,
shining, shelled creatures. Superficially, it looked like an intelligent
civilization. There were wheeled carts driven by some sort of steam
generator. Steam-driven engines ran factories.
The Martians made way for the jeep with unconcern. Never had they seen
creatures as large as themselves that were not of their own kind on hive
business. Hence, none such could exist. This was a world totally without
individualism, a civilization without a spoken language, without names,
without banners. Wherever or however the mass knowledge was located or
transmitted, no individual of another species could ever hope to know. It
Page 87
would be forever as remote from human explorers as the farthest star on the
farthest galaxy.
They drove to where the Sun-tap masts rose from the ground. The men
parked the jeep out of the way of the silent traffic, climbed out and walked
into the rounded door of a building. Its architecture was not like that of the
other buildings. Inside the chambers were dark.
"These creatures have no lights," remarked Boulton. "They must use their
feelers indoors."
"Ah, but look," said Burl, reaching out a hand to a little globe set on a pole
in the floor. He touched it and the globe lighted up. "The Sun-tap builders
needed light and put in their own fixtures here. I recognize their style."
The five men followed a hallway that sloped down into the ground, and
came out into a large underground cellar—several hundred feet wide. It was
the Sun-tap station. There were the now-familiar globes and rods, the force
fields, the controls, the pedestals and the ends of the rotating masts.
They made their recordings, and Burl got ready to turn off the station.
Ferrati and Haines uncrated a small, tactical atomic bomb they had carried
with them—one of the smallest perfected by the Army during the past half
dozen years. They laid it down in the center of the equipment and set the
timer for a half hour away.
Boulton found the alarm globe and prepared to blow it up. Then Burl took
the control panel and switched off the station. They heard the thud of a
crumbling mast. Boulton fired a shot into the alarm globe which had begun
to turn red. It smashed.
"All right, men," snapped Haines, "let's go!"
As they moved toward the exit, Boulton hesitated. "Hey," he said, "there's
one globe still in action!"
The others turned in time to see Boulton stride over to a very small globe
which was glowing pale yellow against the wall near the doorway.
The Marine captain drew his pistol, aimed and fired. The globe burst, but as
it did so, a level bolt of yellow light shot back along the path of the bullet.
farthest galaxy.
They drove to where the Sun-tap masts rose from the ground. The men
parked the jeep out of the way of the silent traffic, climbed out and walked
into the rounded door of a building. Its architecture was not like that of the
other buildings. Inside the chambers were dark.
"These creatures have no lights," remarked Boulton. "They must use their
feelers indoors."
"Ah, but look," said Burl, reaching out a hand to a little globe set on a pole
in the floor. He touched it and the globe lighted up. "The Sun-tap builders
needed light and put in their own fixtures here. I recognize their style."
The five men followed a hallway that sloped down into the ground, and
came out into a large underground cellar—several hundred feet wide. It was
the Sun-tap station. There were the now-familiar globes and rods, the force
fields, the controls, the pedestals and the ends of the rotating masts.
They made their recordings, and Burl got ready to turn off the station.
Ferrati and Haines uncrated a small, tactical atomic bomb they had carried
with them—one of the smallest perfected by the Army during the past half
dozen years. They laid it down in the center of the equipment and set the
timer for a half hour away.
Boulton found the alarm globe and prepared to blow it up. Then Burl took
the control panel and switched off the station. They heard the thud of a
crumbling mast. Boulton fired a shot into the alarm globe which had begun
to turn red. It smashed.
"All right, men," snapped Haines, "let's go!"
As they moved toward the exit, Boulton hesitated. "Hey," he said, "there's
one globe still in action!"
The others turned in time to see Boulton stride over to a very small globe
which was glowing pale yellow against the wall near the doorway.
The Marine captain drew his pistol, aimed and fired. The globe burst, but as
it did so, a level bolt of yellow light shot back along the path of the bullet.
Page 88
For a split second, Boulton was outlined in yellow fire. There was a flash
like lightning.
Each man reached for his weapons, but the underground station remained
dark and dead. Their flashlights turned on Boulton. The stocky Marine was
lying on the ground.
They ran to him. "He's alive!" cried Haines, as he saw that Boulton was still
breathing, his breath whistling back and forth through the oxygen mask.
Quickly Haines examined him. "His heart's all right. He's just been knocked
unconscious."
Ferrati and Haines picked up the captain by his arms and legs. Though he
would have been heavy on Earth, his weight on Mars was very slight, and
each man knew he was capable of carrying great loads with his Earth-
attuned muscles. Then, in single file, they left the cellar and came out of the
doorway of the building.
As they emerged they were stopped short. Surrounding them was a
tremendous and growing crowd of Martians. A solid wall of shell-like faces
stared at them, and a small forest of short antennae waved and flickered in
great agitation.
As they pushed their way with great difficulty toward the jeep, the crowd
began to sway, as if in anger. Now, for the first time, they heard the
creatures make a noise—a sort of humming and buzzing like angered bees.
"They see us now," muttered Haines. "I don't like it."
"The Sun-tap builders did it," said Burl. "They must have booby-trapped the
place against intruders. The globe that got Boulton must have set off some
sort of vibration that enrages these creatures. And it looks as if we're the
victims."
As they reached their jeep, the encircling mass of Martians moved forward.
The humming rose to a higher pitch, and then the mob, with the berserk
ferocity of a swarm of bees, lunged toward them.
like lightning.
Each man reached for his weapons, but the underground station remained
dark and dead. Their flashlights turned on Boulton. The stocky Marine was
lying on the ground.
They ran to him. "He's alive!" cried Haines, as he saw that Boulton was still
breathing, his breath whistling back and forth through the oxygen mask.
Quickly Haines examined him. "His heart's all right. He's just been knocked
unconscious."
Ferrati and Haines picked up the captain by his arms and legs. Though he
would have been heavy on Earth, his weight on Mars was very slight, and
each man knew he was capable of carrying great loads with his Earth-
attuned muscles. Then, in single file, they left the cellar and came out of the
doorway of the building.
As they emerged they were stopped short. Surrounding them was a
tremendous and growing crowd of Martians. A solid wall of shell-like faces
stared at them, and a small forest of short antennae waved and flickered in
great agitation.
As they pushed their way with great difficulty toward the jeep, the crowd
began to sway, as if in anger. Now, for the first time, they heard the
creatures make a noise—a sort of humming and buzzing like angered bees.
"They see us now," muttered Haines. "I don't like it."
"The Sun-tap builders did it," said Burl. "They must have booby-trapped the
place against intruders. The globe that got Boulton must have set off some
sort of vibration that enrages these creatures. And it looks as if we're the
victims."
As they reached their jeep, the encircling mass of Martians moved forward.
The humming rose to a higher pitch, and then the mob, with the berserk
ferocity of a swarm of bees, lunged toward them.
Page 89
Page 90
Chapter 12.
At Rope's End
With Boulton lying across the back seat, the four men acted simultaneously.
Thinking only of self-defense, they drew their pistols and fired point-blank
into the monsters attacking them. As the men emptied their guns, the
Martians in front stumbled, fell, rolled over, or began to run aimlessly as the
heavy slugs tore through them.
They were not easy to kill—which was to be expected of creatures without
much of a central consciousness—but on the other hand, once struck or
injured, they seemed to lose contact with their fellows and to act wholly
without direction. They plunged wildly into each other, and before the men
in the jeep had finished their barrage, the clearing was a milling, confused
mob. Body clashed against body, legs scrambled under legs, and the angry
buzz was now lost amid the clattering and banging of shell against shell.
Haines slid into the front seat behind the steering wheel, stepped on the gas,
and drove toward a momentary gap in the mob. The jeep tore through, raced
around the corner, and headed down an empty street. Crouching in the back,
Burl, Russ, and Ferrati hastily reloaded.
"We can't let ourselves get stopped, or even hole up. That A-bomb's going
to go off in about twenty minutes, and we'd better be back at the ship before
then," cried Russ.
As they bumped along, they noticed that the Martians who came within
fifty feet of their jeep suddenly stopped whatever they were doing and
turned toward them, hostile. They were like a stick drawn along among bees
—as they traveled they left fury in their wake.
"It must be Boulton," Russ yelled to Burl above the roar of their passage.
"He must be charged with the irritating vibration."
Burl nodded as he looked back. The Martians had started after them on foot,
and could lope fast when they wanted to. "They've got some sort of
At Rope's End
With Boulton lying across the back seat, the four men acted simultaneously.
Thinking only of self-defense, they drew their pistols and fired point-blank
into the monsters attacking them. As the men emptied their guns, the
Martians in front stumbled, fell, rolled over, or began to run aimlessly as the
heavy slugs tore through them.
They were not easy to kill—which was to be expected of creatures without
much of a central consciousness—but on the other hand, once struck or
injured, they seemed to lose contact with their fellows and to act wholly
without direction. They plunged wildly into each other, and before the men
in the jeep had finished their barrage, the clearing was a milling, confused
mob. Body clashed against body, legs scrambled under legs, and the angry
buzz was now lost amid the clattering and banging of shell against shell.
Haines slid into the front seat behind the steering wheel, stepped on the gas,
and drove toward a momentary gap in the mob. The jeep tore through, raced
around the corner, and headed down an empty street. Crouching in the back,
Burl, Russ, and Ferrati hastily reloaded.
"We can't let ourselves get stopped, or even hole up. That A-bomb's going
to go off in about twenty minutes, and we'd better be back at the ship before
then," cried Russ.
As they bumped along, they noticed that the Martians who came within
fifty feet of their jeep suddenly stopped whatever they were doing and
turned toward them, hostile. They were like a stick drawn along among bees
—as they traveled they left fury in their wake.
"It must be Boulton," Russ yelled to Burl above the roar of their passage.
"He must be charged with the irritating vibration."
Burl nodded as he looked back. The Martians had started after them on foot,
and could lope fast when they wanted to. "They've got some sort of
Page 91
organized action going," he called to Haines. "I think it's steam carts!"
"The mass mind caught on fast," said Russ. "And look! They're warned in
advance now!"
They were nearing the edge of the city, and looming before them, blocking
their right-of-way, were two steam carts—big ones carrying a large number
of Martians. They were holding metallic rods and instruments in their hand-
members.
Ferrati opened a chest built against the back of the seat and took out a light
machine gun. Climbing into the front, next to Haines, he kneeled down
behind the windshield, raised the gun, and blazed away.
The steam carts suddenly swerved, one after the other, ran wildly into the
side of a building, and turned over. The jeep roared past them, raced across
the last hundred feet of city paving and out onto the desert. Haines had to
slow down to navigate safely the uneven layers of barren soil, rock and
sand. Burl holstered his gun and reached across for one of the abandoned
walkie-talkies.
In the excitement of their exit, none had noticed the change in the Martian
scenery. But now it occurred to Burl that the day was distinctly lighter, and
he fancied the Sun—small though it was—felt warmer. The Sun-tap
demolished, this was to be expected, and by the same token, radio
communication should now be practical.
Sure enough, he got Lockhart's voice at once. Hastily, he warned the
commander of what had happened.
As they drew nearer the Magellan, the great spaceship lowered toward the
ground and let down its grapples and ladders. Burl saw that there was no
time to be lost. A stream of Martians and steam carts was pouring out of the
city on their trail.
They reached the spaceship and slammed to a halt. The men leaped out.
Burl and Russ lifted Boulton's unconscious body from the jeep and,
between them, managed to hoist him awkwardly up the dangling rope
ladder.
"The mass mind caught on fast," said Russ. "And look! They're warned in
advance now!"
They were nearing the edge of the city, and looming before them, blocking
their right-of-way, were two steam carts—big ones carrying a large number
of Martians. They were holding metallic rods and instruments in their hand-
members.
Ferrati opened a chest built against the back of the seat and took out a light
machine gun. Climbing into the front, next to Haines, he kneeled down
behind the windshield, raised the gun, and blazed away.
The steam carts suddenly swerved, one after the other, ran wildly into the
side of a building, and turned over. The jeep roared past them, raced across
the last hundred feet of city paving and out onto the desert. Haines had to
slow down to navigate safely the uneven layers of barren soil, rock and
sand. Burl holstered his gun and reached across for one of the abandoned
walkie-talkies.
In the excitement of their exit, none had noticed the change in the Martian
scenery. But now it occurred to Burl that the day was distinctly lighter, and
he fancied the Sun—small though it was—felt warmer. The Sun-tap
demolished, this was to be expected, and by the same token, radio
communication should now be practical.
Sure enough, he got Lockhart's voice at once. Hastily, he warned the
commander of what had happened.
As they drew nearer the Magellan, the great spaceship lowered toward the
ground and let down its grapples and ladders. Burl saw that there was no
time to be lost. A stream of Martians and steam carts was pouring out of the
city on their trail.
They reached the spaceship and slammed to a halt. The men leaped out.
Burl and Russ lifted Boulton's unconscious body from the jeep and,
between them, managed to hoist him awkwardly up the dangling rope
ladder.
Page 92
The others hooked grapples onto the jeep, and when it was secure, leaped
for safety themselves.
As the first of the Martian steam carts was almost on them, the Magellan
lifted into the air. It rose high above the surface and swung off into the
desert. The Martians drew to a halt. Burl, looking down from the doorway
of the cargo hatch, could see them milling aimlessly around. None, he
noticed, ever glanced up. Air flight, apparently, was an inconceivable
phenomenon to them.
After the jeep had been pulled into the cargo hold and secured, the outer
ports were sealed. When everyone was safely in the inner sphere, the
Magellan drew away from Mars and started on the next lap of its long
mission.
Boulton was carefully examined. Nothing could be made of his condition.
He seemed to bear no physical hurt, although he slept on. He was placed in
his bunk, and there he rested, breathing slowly, temperature normal,
dormant.
The life of the spaceship resumed, for the time being, without him. The next
port of call was Jupiter, and that presented problems of its own. Between
Mars and Jupiter was the great asteroid belt, a region of many thousands of
tiny planetoids, ranging in size from worldlets of two or three hundred
miles in diameter down to rocks the size of footballs. "The debris of an
exploded planet," was the comment Russ made to Burl. "That's the most
likely explanation. Anyway," he added, "there seems to be no Sun-tap
station on any of them. The next one is beyond the asteroids, in Jupiter's
orbit."
During the next few days, Lockhart and the two astrogators were busy
working out a rather complex maneuver, which consisted of having the ship
jump over the asteroid belt rather than travel directly through it. While the
orbits of thousands of the larger asteroids had been charted, there were
thousands more that consisted of just chunks of rock too small to notice.
They could not chance a collision with one of these—yet to work out the
whereabouts of all of them was impossibly time-consuming.
for safety themselves.
As the first of the Martian steam carts was almost on them, the Magellan
lifted into the air. It rose high above the surface and swung off into the
desert. The Martians drew to a halt. Burl, looking down from the doorway
of the cargo hatch, could see them milling aimlessly around. None, he
noticed, ever glanced up. Air flight, apparently, was an inconceivable
phenomenon to them.
After the jeep had been pulled into the cargo hold and secured, the outer
ports were sealed. When everyone was safely in the inner sphere, the
Magellan drew away from Mars and started on the next lap of its long
mission.
Boulton was carefully examined. Nothing could be made of his condition.
He seemed to bear no physical hurt, although he slept on. He was placed in
his bunk, and there he rested, breathing slowly, temperature normal,
dormant.
The life of the spaceship resumed, for the time being, without him. The next
port of call was Jupiter, and that presented problems of its own. Between
Mars and Jupiter was the great asteroid belt, a region of many thousands of
tiny planetoids, ranging in size from worldlets of two or three hundred
miles in diameter down to rocks the size of footballs. "The debris of an
exploded planet," was the comment Russ made to Burl. "That's the most
likely explanation. Anyway," he added, "there seems to be no Sun-tap
station on any of them. The next one is beyond the asteroids, in Jupiter's
orbit."
During the next few days, Lockhart and the two astrogators were busy
working out a rather complex maneuver, which consisted of having the ship
jump over the asteroid belt rather than travel directly through it. While the
orbits of thousands of the larger asteroids had been charted, there were
thousands more that consisted of just chunks of rock too small to notice.
They could not chance a collision with one of these—yet to work out the
whereabouts of all of them was impossibly time-consuming.
Page 93
What the Magellan did was to depart from the plane of the ecliptic, that
level around the Sun to which all the planets generally adhere, and to draw
outward so as to avoid the path of the asteroids, then to come back in onto
the orbit and plane of Jupiter. This involved some tricky work with the
various gravitational lines, using Mars and the Sun for repulsion and certain
stars for attraction.
There were quite a number of gravity shifts, and during this period no one
could be quite sure what his weight would be from one moment to another.
There were several periods of zero gravity, when the crew members would
float and face the complex annoyances of a steady feeling of free fall. Burl,
after a couple of such sessions, got the hang of it rather comfortably.
Lockhart looked at him oddly and smiled. "Glad to know it. I may have a
task for you soon, then."
Others found the weightless conditions not so bearable. One of the
engineering crew, Detmar, had to be hospitalized. What he had resembled
severe seasickness. Oberfield also experienced moments of acute upset.
Boulton's condition did not change. Once or twice he stirred slightly in his
sleep, and seemed to murmur something, but then he would lapse back into
his coma. Fortunately he did not resist food, and did swallow liquids forced
into his mouth.
Except for one or two rare intervals, communication with Earth had ceased.
Besides, the mother world was now moving away from them and would
pass behind the Sun. Efforts to obtain medical advice for Boulton proved
futile.
After they had passed the orbital line of the asteroids and had rearranged
their drive so that they were falling freely toward Jupiter, Lockhart called
the exploring crew together. "I've got a job for you men," he announced.
Haines, Ferrati, and Burl gathered about the control board to listen. They
were restless for something to do—plans for the Jupiter landing could not
be made until they knew what the situation was going to be, for it would be
one thing if the station were located on that giant planet itself, another if on
one of its satellites.
level around the Sun to which all the planets generally adhere, and to draw
outward so as to avoid the path of the asteroids, then to come back in onto
the orbit and plane of Jupiter. This involved some tricky work with the
various gravitational lines, using Mars and the Sun for repulsion and certain
stars for attraction.
There were quite a number of gravity shifts, and during this period no one
could be quite sure what his weight would be from one moment to another.
There were several periods of zero gravity, when the crew members would
float and face the complex annoyances of a steady feeling of free fall. Burl,
after a couple of such sessions, got the hang of it rather comfortably.
Lockhart looked at him oddly and smiled. "Glad to know it. I may have a
task for you soon, then."
Others found the weightless conditions not so bearable. One of the
engineering crew, Detmar, had to be hospitalized. What he had resembled
severe seasickness. Oberfield also experienced moments of acute upset.
Boulton's condition did not change. Once or twice he stirred slightly in his
sleep, and seemed to murmur something, but then he would lapse back into
his coma. Fortunately he did not resist food, and did swallow liquids forced
into his mouth.
Except for one or two rare intervals, communication with Earth had ceased.
Besides, the mother world was now moving away from them and would
pass behind the Sun. Efforts to obtain medical advice for Boulton proved
futile.
After they had passed the orbital line of the asteroids and had rearranged
their drive so that they were falling freely toward Jupiter, Lockhart called
the exploring crew together. "I've got a job for you men," he announced.
Haines, Ferrati, and Burl gathered about the control board to listen. They
were restless for something to do—plans for the Jupiter landing could not
be made until they knew what the situation was going to be, for it would be
one thing if the station were located on that giant planet itself, another if on
one of its satellites.
Page 94
The colonel wasted no time. "While you were on Mars and we were waiting
for you, I took the opportunity to examine the outer shell of this ship. You
know, of course, that we are constantly being bombarded by cosmic dust,
the micrometeorites that always prove troublesome to the Earth satellites
and space platforms. The ship has been fortunate in that it has not been
struck by any meteoric matter of size, but we have been peppered heavily
by dust particles. As a result, the outer shell of our ship is pitted in some
spots, and in several places worn perhaps dangerously thin. I don't mean to
imply that there are going to be any holes very soon, but I think that there
are some parts which we should reinforce or patch."
When he stopped for breath, Burl broke in. "You mean you want us to work
on the outer shell?"
Lockhart nodded. "Someone has to do it, and during flights you men are the
deck crew. So it's going to be your baby. I am going to keep the ship on free
fall for the next several periods and this should make it simpler for you to
go outside, in space suits, and do the job."
The next hour saw all three hard at work. Dressed in heavy, sealed, warmed
outer-space outfits, wearing metal bowl-like helmets with sealed glass
fronts, and drawing oxygen from tanks strapped on their backs, the three
men left the inner sphere and emerged on the outer surface of the Magellan.
Burl found it a weird and awesome experience. There was no gravitational
drag, so that even as he stepped through the exit port, the scene shifted until
he seemed to be standing on metal ground, looking upward at thousands
and tens of thousands of silent white stars. Nothing moved—except, of
course, the space-suited bodies of the two men already half out of sight and
looking not quite human. There was no sound save that of his own breath
and the faint hum of the radio phone tucked in his helmet.
He was firmly attached to the ship by a long nylon rope which he hooked to
rings set on the outer shell. He made his way toward the wide rounded nose
of the ship. In one hand he carried a bucket of a liquid plastic resembling tar
in thickness and consistency. With a brush in the other hand he would stop
—held to the surface by magnetic soles—and smear the plastic protective
surfacing over the little pits and pockmarks that now marred the surface of
for you, I took the opportunity to examine the outer shell of this ship. You
know, of course, that we are constantly being bombarded by cosmic dust,
the micrometeorites that always prove troublesome to the Earth satellites
and space platforms. The ship has been fortunate in that it has not been
struck by any meteoric matter of size, but we have been peppered heavily
by dust particles. As a result, the outer shell of our ship is pitted in some
spots, and in several places worn perhaps dangerously thin. I don't mean to
imply that there are going to be any holes very soon, but I think that there
are some parts which we should reinforce or patch."
When he stopped for breath, Burl broke in. "You mean you want us to work
on the outer shell?"
Lockhart nodded. "Someone has to do it, and during flights you men are the
deck crew. So it's going to be your baby. I am going to keep the ship on free
fall for the next several periods and this should make it simpler for you to
go outside, in space suits, and do the job."
The next hour saw all three hard at work. Dressed in heavy, sealed, warmed
outer-space outfits, wearing metal bowl-like helmets with sealed glass
fronts, and drawing oxygen from tanks strapped on their backs, the three
men left the inner sphere and emerged on the outer surface of the Magellan.
Burl found it a weird and awesome experience. There was no gravitational
drag, so that even as he stepped through the exit port, the scene shifted until
he seemed to be standing on metal ground, looking upward at thousands
and tens of thousands of silent white stars. Nothing moved—except, of
course, the space-suited bodies of the two men already half out of sight and
looking not quite human. There was no sound save that of his own breath
and the faint hum of the radio phone tucked in his helmet.
He was firmly attached to the ship by a long nylon rope which he hooked to
rings set on the outer shell. He made his way toward the wide rounded nose
of the ship. In one hand he carried a bucket of a liquid plastic resembling tar
in thickness and consistency. With a brush in the other hand he would stop
—held to the surface by magnetic soles—and smear the plastic protective
surfacing over the little pits and pockmarks that now marred the surface of
Page 95
the once spotless ship. The work was not hard, and shortly became a routine
which he found did not require much concentration.
It was dip and smear, in a steady rhythmic motion. Haines was working out
of sight on a more complex repair job which involved welding a sheet of
metal over a badly beaten and sprung section. Ferrati was on the opposite
side of the ship.
As he worked, Burl watched the stars, and every now and then was
rewarded by the sight of a moving spark of light—an asteroid or meteor. He
could see mighty Jupiter ahead—a wide disc of white and yellow, faintly
belted with gray and pale blue bands. The famous red spot was not visible.
Four of the planet's twelve attendant satellites strung out alongside it, and
he recognized them as the big ones discovered by Galileo with his first
telescope: Io, Europa, Ganymede, and Callisto. The other eight were tiny,
and probably would not be visible until they were right on top of Jupiter,
though he supposed that Russell Clyde could probably pick them out now
by telescopic sightings.
Burl could hear in his radio the sound of someone whistling softly, and
supposed it was Ferrati. There was a short cut-in as Lockhart called a time-
shift on the general intercom. A brief exchange followed between Caton in
the Zeta-ring chamber of the ship's nose and the colonel, with the
information that Caton was coming down into the living section.
Then, after a brief period of silence, Burl heard a series of odd noises on his
phones, something went bump, and the sound faded. He was now on the
nose of the ship itself, the wide mushrooming surface beneath his feet, and
Jupiter high over his head. Bending over, about to smear a dab of plastic on
a tiny pitted mark, he suddenly felt himself gripped and pulled.
Caught by surprise, he jerked upward, the brush flying from his hand and
sailing into the sky. His shoes clung momentarily to the surface, but their
magnetic grip was too weak, and they loosened. He kicked out wildly,
falling away into the emptiness of outer space—a space which had a
moment ago been a sky and had suddenly turned into a bottomless pit.
He fell backward, seized momentarily by terror. He was brought up short by
his rope. It held, and he grabbed it and hung on.
which he found did not require much concentration.
It was dip and smear, in a steady rhythmic motion. Haines was working out
of sight on a more complex repair job which involved welding a sheet of
metal over a badly beaten and sprung section. Ferrati was on the opposite
side of the ship.
As he worked, Burl watched the stars, and every now and then was
rewarded by the sight of a moving spark of light—an asteroid or meteor. He
could see mighty Jupiter ahead—a wide disc of white and yellow, faintly
belted with gray and pale blue bands. The famous red spot was not visible.
Four of the planet's twelve attendant satellites strung out alongside it, and
he recognized them as the big ones discovered by Galileo with his first
telescope: Io, Europa, Ganymede, and Callisto. The other eight were tiny,
and probably would not be visible until they were right on top of Jupiter,
though he supposed that Russell Clyde could probably pick them out now
by telescopic sightings.
Burl could hear in his radio the sound of someone whistling softly, and
supposed it was Ferrati. There was a short cut-in as Lockhart called a time-
shift on the general intercom. A brief exchange followed between Caton in
the Zeta-ring chamber of the ship's nose and the colonel, with the
information that Caton was coming down into the living section.
Then, after a brief period of silence, Burl heard a series of odd noises on his
phones, something went bump, and the sound faded. He was now on the
nose of the ship itself, the wide mushrooming surface beneath his feet, and
Jupiter high over his head. Bending over, about to smear a dab of plastic on
a tiny pitted mark, he suddenly felt himself gripped and pulled.
Caught by surprise, he jerked upward, the brush flying from his hand and
sailing into the sky. His shoes clung momentarily to the surface, but their
magnetic grip was too weak, and they loosened. He kicked out wildly,
falling away into the emptiness of outer space—a space which had a
moment ago been a sky and had suddenly turned into a bottomless pit.
He fell backward, seized momentarily by terror. He was brought up short by
his rope. It held, and he grabbed it and hung on.
Page 96
Something had changed. Somebody had altered the ship's drive. The ship
was no longer on free fall; it was on gravity drive—and going backward!
Not driving toward Jupiter under added acceleration, but fighting to reduce
its fall, to stop its drive, to fly away from Jupiter!
In his earphones there was a jumble of sounds. He heard Ferrati yelling and
realized that he, too, must be falling away from the ship, saved only by a
rope. And the voice of Haines—plastered flat against the surface, the ship
driving upward against him.
Vague noises emanated from the control room. Evidently no one was at the
commander's mike. He called into it, adding his voice to those of his
comrades.
After several agonizing minutes, a voice came over the radio. It was Russell
Clyde's and it was excited and angry. "Hold on out there as long as you can!
Lockhart's been knocked unconscious! We're trying to get into the engine
room and take back control!"
Perplexed, Burl shouted, "Who's in the engine room? Take control from
whom?"
There was another pause as he heard sounds of pounding, as if someone
were trying to hammer open a metal panel. Then Russ's voice came on
again. "Its Boulton! He came to suddenly, sneaked up here, knocked out the
commander, and climbed up into the Zeta-ring chamber! Caton was down
below—and Boulton's locked the trap door and is running the drive. He's
reversed our route, away from Jupiter, and into outer space! Boulton's
apparently gone crazy! And we can't get in to stop him!"
Burl, suspended over an abyss, clung to the end of the taut, thin nylon line,
as the ship pulled him helplessly along into the uncharted depths of infinity,
with a mad-man at the controls.
was no longer on free fall; it was on gravity drive—and going backward!
Not driving toward Jupiter under added acceleration, but fighting to reduce
its fall, to stop its drive, to fly away from Jupiter!
In his earphones there was a jumble of sounds. He heard Ferrati yelling and
realized that he, too, must be falling away from the ship, saved only by a
rope. And the voice of Haines—plastered flat against the surface, the ship
driving upward against him.
Vague noises emanated from the control room. Evidently no one was at the
commander's mike. He called into it, adding his voice to those of his
comrades.
After several agonizing minutes, a voice came over the radio. It was Russell
Clyde's and it was excited and angry. "Hold on out there as long as you can!
Lockhart's been knocked unconscious! We're trying to get into the engine
room and take back control!"
Perplexed, Burl shouted, "Who's in the engine room? Take control from
whom?"
There was another pause as he heard sounds of pounding, as if someone
were trying to hammer open a metal panel. Then Russ's voice came on
again. "Its Boulton! He came to suddenly, sneaked up here, knocked out the
commander, and climbed up into the Zeta-ring chamber! Caton was down
below—and Boulton's locked the trap door and is running the drive. He's
reversed our route, away from Jupiter, and into outer space! Boulton's
apparently gone crazy! And we can't get in to stop him!"
Burl, suspended over an abyss, clung to the end of the taut, thin nylon line,
as the ship pulled him helplessly along into the uncharted depths of infinity,
with a mad-man at the controls.
Page 97
Chapter 13.
The Pole of Callisto
Burl surveyed his position. Judging from the apparent weight of his body,
Boulton was decelerating the ship at a little less than one gravity. The nylon
cord was hooked into a bolt near the center of the ship. It would be possible
for Burl to climb up it and reach a firmer grip on the outside shell.
There was no time to be lost. An increase in the ship's speed might increase
his weight several times over. He began to climb back, reeling in the rope,
pulling himself up hand over hand, just as he had done many times in the
gymnasium of his high school back home.
Halfway up, Clyde's voice came on his helmet phones. "Will all members
of the crew report their present positions to me? Haines?"
He called each man's name, beginning with the three outside. Haines and
Ferrati were clinging to the surface, on the far—now forward—end of the
ship. The rest of the crew was somewhere in the living sphere. Lockhart
was still unconscious. Burl could hear the faint sounds of a discussion in the
control room, and also thumps as Caton and Shea continued to try to break
open the entry to the generator chambers.
Then Russ spoke again. "Burl, it looks as if you're elected. You seem to be
the only one in the right place. There's a hatchway into the nose of the ship
from the outside. It's just below the central circle. Can you see it? How
close are you to it?"
Burl was almost at the surface now. The circular inset ring that marked the
hatchway entry port was a few feet from where his rope was hooked. He
described it to Russ.
"Can you reach it without losing your grip? If you can, do you think you
can open it?" came the radio voice quickly.
The Pole of Callisto
Burl surveyed his position. Judging from the apparent weight of his body,
Boulton was decelerating the ship at a little less than one gravity. The nylon
cord was hooked into a bolt near the center of the ship. It would be possible
for Burl to climb up it and reach a firmer grip on the outside shell.
There was no time to be lost. An increase in the ship's speed might increase
his weight several times over. He began to climb back, reeling in the rope,
pulling himself up hand over hand, just as he had done many times in the
gymnasium of his high school back home.
Halfway up, Clyde's voice came on his helmet phones. "Will all members
of the crew report their present positions to me? Haines?"
He called each man's name, beginning with the three outside. Haines and
Ferrati were clinging to the surface, on the far—now forward—end of the
ship. The rest of the crew was somewhere in the living sphere. Lockhart
was still unconscious. Burl could hear the faint sounds of a discussion in the
control room, and also thumps as Caton and Shea continued to try to break
open the entry to the generator chambers.
Then Russ spoke again. "Burl, it looks as if you're elected. You seem to be
the only one in the right place. There's a hatchway into the nose of the ship
from the outside. It's just below the central circle. Can you see it? How
close are you to it?"
Burl was almost at the surface now. The circular inset ring that marked the
hatchway entry port was a few feet from where his rope was hooked. He
described it to Russ.
"Can you reach it without losing your grip? If you can, do you think you
can open it?" came the radio voice quickly.
Page 98
Burl reached the surface and grasped the hook. He studied the circular panel
carefully. "I can reach it all right. There's a holder hook alongside it. But
what will I do when I get there?"
"Open it," Russ ordered brusquely. "It unscrews from either side. There's a
short lock space between the outer shell and the inner shielding of the
generator chamber. Get inside and seal the door after you. From there you
can work your way into the emergency nose door to the engines. Keep your
suit on. While the generators are shielded, there's no telling what Boulton
may have done. The suit will give you some protection.
"After you go through the door, it's up to you. Boulton will be there. You'll
have to stop him, somehow. Caton says if you can find the tool kit you may
be able to get a wrench to use as a weapon. If you can get through without
his seeing you and open the trap door to us, we'll do the rest. But it depends
on you."
Burl bit his lip. "Okay. Here I go." There was no question of argument.
Everyone's life was at stake, and he happened to be in the strategic position.
He swung over to the panel, hooked his foot under the handgrip and
grasped the lever inset in the surface. He twisted it. After a brief moment of
resistance, the panel turned slowly. There was a sudden puff as the air
within escaped, and then the hatchway stood open. Burl climbed inside.
He caught at the open plug, pulled it back and screwed it tightly from the
inside. Now he was in a dark, narrow space. He could feel the flow of air
automatically being pumped back in and heard the humming of the
generators through his suit.
Working his way along the inner wall in darkness, he finally felt the edge of
the metal door that opened into the Zeta-ring chamber itself. He leaned
against it, listening, but there was no sound. He turned the handle and threw
his shoulder against the door.
It gave, then swung open. He stepped cautiously into the engine room.
It was large and circular, fitting neatly within the nose of the ship. The wide
tubes of the A-G generator ring ran around the outside. The reactors were
heavy blocks of ceiling-high metal, shielded, and showing only the dials
carefully. "I can reach it all right. There's a holder hook alongside it. But
what will I do when I get there?"
"Open it," Russ ordered brusquely. "It unscrews from either side. There's a
short lock space between the outer shell and the inner shielding of the
generator chamber. Get inside and seal the door after you. From there you
can work your way into the emergency nose door to the engines. Keep your
suit on. While the generators are shielded, there's no telling what Boulton
may have done. The suit will give you some protection.
"After you go through the door, it's up to you. Boulton will be there. You'll
have to stop him, somehow. Caton says if you can find the tool kit you may
be able to get a wrench to use as a weapon. If you can get through without
his seeing you and open the trap door to us, we'll do the rest. But it depends
on you."
Burl bit his lip. "Okay. Here I go." There was no question of argument.
Everyone's life was at stake, and he happened to be in the strategic position.
He swung over to the panel, hooked his foot under the handgrip and
grasped the lever inset in the surface. He twisted it. After a brief moment of
resistance, the panel turned slowly. There was a sudden puff as the air
within escaped, and then the hatchway stood open. Burl climbed inside.
He caught at the open plug, pulled it back and screwed it tightly from the
inside. Now he was in a dark, narrow space. He could feel the flow of air
automatically being pumped back in and heard the humming of the
generators through his suit.
Working his way along the inner wall in darkness, he finally felt the edge of
the metal door that opened into the Zeta-ring chamber itself. He leaned
against it, listening, but there was no sound. He turned the handle and threw
his shoulder against the door.
It gave, then swung open. He stepped cautiously into the engine room.
It was large and circular, fitting neatly within the nose of the ship. The wide
tubes of the A-G generator ring ran around the outside. The reactors were
heavy blocks of ceiling-high metal, shielded, and showing only the dials
Page 99
that registered their output. Other machines—the rod storage units and the
condensers—were all carefully hidden behind clean metal shielding.
The panel that controlled the engines was unattended in the center of the
room. Standing by one of the shielded reactors was Boulton, his back to
Burl. He was hammering at the reactor with a bar, evidently trying to tear
away the shielding to get at the guts.
Stealthily, the boy made his way to the locker where the tools were kept.
Just as he opened it, his hand slipped. The door of the locker clanged
against the wall. The burly Marine captain whirled, saw Burl, and gave a
yell of rage.
Burl grabbed a wrench and swung it threateningly. Boulton drew back. His
face was pale, with an odd expression on it, as if he did not recognize Burl
or understand what Burl said. Burl tried to reason with him, but the glaring
eyes were those of a total stranger, or, as it seemed then, an alien beast.
Boulton cried in anger, dropped his bar, and charged Burl with his hands
outstretched.
Burl swung the wrench, but the strength of the older man tore it from his
grasp, hurling it away. The boy tried to dodge, and then the two bodies
collided.
The instant the two men touched there was a violent flash of light. Burl felt
a shock that left him stunned and reeling. Boulton collapsed in a heap on
the floor.
Burl steadied himself, keeping a wary eye on the captain. Boulton sat up
slowly, putting a hand to his head. "Boy, that was some kickback," he
muttered. He looked at Burl. "Give me a hand up. We've got to get back to
the jeep and scram out of here fast. The A-bomb's already set."
Burl was startled. He realized in a moment, though, that Boulton recalled
nothing of the past few days—his last memory seemed to be of the blast in
the Martian basement. But now, the captain was apparently himself again.
Boulton got shakily to his feet. He seemed confused. "How'd I get here,
son?" he asked in surprise.
condensers—were all carefully hidden behind clean metal shielding.
The panel that controlled the engines was unattended in the center of the
room. Standing by one of the shielded reactors was Boulton, his back to
Burl. He was hammering at the reactor with a bar, evidently trying to tear
away the shielding to get at the guts.
Stealthily, the boy made his way to the locker where the tools were kept.
Just as he opened it, his hand slipped. The door of the locker clanged
against the wall. The burly Marine captain whirled, saw Burl, and gave a
yell of rage.
Burl grabbed a wrench and swung it threateningly. Boulton drew back. His
face was pale, with an odd expression on it, as if he did not recognize Burl
or understand what Burl said. Burl tried to reason with him, but the glaring
eyes were those of a total stranger, or, as it seemed then, an alien beast.
Boulton cried in anger, dropped his bar, and charged Burl with his hands
outstretched.
Burl swung the wrench, but the strength of the older man tore it from his
grasp, hurling it away. The boy tried to dodge, and then the two bodies
collided.
The instant the two men touched there was a violent flash of light. Burl felt
a shock that left him stunned and reeling. Boulton collapsed in a heap on
the floor.
Burl steadied himself, keeping a wary eye on the captain. Boulton sat up
slowly, putting a hand to his head. "Boy, that was some kickback," he
muttered. He looked at Burl. "Give me a hand up. We've got to get back to
the jeep and scram out of here fast. The A-bomb's already set."
Burl was startled. He realized in a moment, though, that Boulton recalled
nothing of the past few days—his last memory seemed to be of the blast in
the Martian basement. But now, the captain was apparently himself again.
Boulton got shakily to his feet. He seemed confused. "How'd I get here,
son?" he asked in surprise.
Page 100
Burl gave a sigh of relief. "I guess you're all right now. But let's get the trap
door to the control room open. Clyde and Caton have got to get the ship
back on course. There'll be time to explain afterward."
Half an hour later, when Lockhart had recovered and resumed command,
the ship was restored to its proper course. Russ filled Boulton in on what
had happened and ventured a guess as to why.
"You must have been given some sort of charge by that globe in the Mars
Sun-tap station," Russ said. "It turned you into a sort of robot—a human
body running on a charge of alien energy that responded to the commands
of the Sun-tap outfit. Apparently, it took a long time before the charge had
complete control of your body. Obviously, it then could act only in some
general way—telling you to wreck the ship.
"Now, Burl, your body received a charge a long time ago. Whatever its
nature, it counteracted or shorted Boulton's when you came into contact."
Both Boulton and Burl thought that made sense. "But," Burl conjectured,
"isn't it possible that the charge in my own body has also been shorted?"
Russ shrugged. "Maybe. We'll find out at the next stop. And, incidentally,
that's not going to be on Jupiter itself, but on its moon Callisto. We've traced
the line of distortions."
"That's good news," said Burl. "I had the feeling you were worried about
Jupiter. The planet's so huge it would have meant real trouble trying to land.
The books say its atmosphere is thick, unbreathable, and moves in gale
velocity around it."
Russ nodded. "With Jupiter almost 89,000 miles in diameter, it would have
been a tough problem to maneuver outside this ship ... in fact, impossible,
not to mention the fact that the atmosphere, mostly ammonia and other
frigid gases, moves in several independent belts. However, Callisto should
be okay."
"That's something we know about our opponents, anyway," said Burl,
"They must have physical limitations enough like ours to rule out places
where we couldn't move, either."
door to the control room open. Clyde and Caton have got to get the ship
back on course. There'll be time to explain afterward."
Half an hour later, when Lockhart had recovered and resumed command,
the ship was restored to its proper course. Russ filled Boulton in on what
had happened and ventured a guess as to why.
"You must have been given some sort of charge by that globe in the Mars
Sun-tap station," Russ said. "It turned you into a sort of robot—a human
body running on a charge of alien energy that responded to the commands
of the Sun-tap outfit. Apparently, it took a long time before the charge had
complete control of your body. Obviously, it then could act only in some
general way—telling you to wreck the ship.
"Now, Burl, your body received a charge a long time ago. Whatever its
nature, it counteracted or shorted Boulton's when you came into contact."
Both Boulton and Burl thought that made sense. "But," Burl conjectured,
"isn't it possible that the charge in my own body has also been shorted?"
Russ shrugged. "Maybe. We'll find out at the next stop. And, incidentally,
that's not going to be on Jupiter itself, but on its moon Callisto. We've traced
the line of distortions."
"That's good news," said Burl. "I had the feeling you were worried about
Jupiter. The planet's so huge it would have meant real trouble trying to land.
The books say its atmosphere is thick, unbreathable, and moves in gale
velocity around it."
Russ nodded. "With Jupiter almost 89,000 miles in diameter, it would have
been a tough problem to maneuver outside this ship ... in fact, impossible,
not to mention the fact that the atmosphere, mostly ammonia and other
frigid gases, moves in several independent belts. However, Callisto should
be okay."
"That's something we know about our opponents, anyway," said Burl,
"They must have physical limitations enough like ours to rule out places
where we couldn't move, either."
Page 101
Boulton showed no further effects from his experience. In time, the
Magellan drew near Jupiter. Callisto, its fifth satellite outward, moved
about the mighty planet at a distance of 1,170,000 miles. It was a large
satellite as they go, 3,220 miles in diameter, larger, in fact, than Mercury.
But, as Russ explained, it was a queer place in its own fashion.
For despite its size, Callisto was apparently not a solid body as we think of
it. Its density totaled only a little more than that of water, its mass half that
of the Earth's Moon—a notoriously porous body.
They bore down on Callisto, matching their speed to its, and swung close to
its surface. It had almost no atmosphere, just a thin layer of the heavier
gases. It was a belted world, without clearly defined continents or surface
markings. Its equatorial zone was one vast, featureless belt of darkish-gray.
Its temperate zones were white, with patches of yellow here and there. But
its poles were gray again.
"The satellite's like a huge ball of thin mud that's never hardened," said Burl
as they studied the strange terrain.
"The equator's the softest—it seems to be a river of muddy water, hundreds
of miles wide—only it can't be water. Probably semisolidified gases holding
dust and grains of matter in suspension," said Russ. "The temperate zones
are the same stuff, only colder, and therefore more stable. A thin crust of
frozen gases over a planet-wide ocean of semiliquid substance."
"The Sun-tap station's on the southern pole," said Burl. "That must be
solid."
It was. The poles of Callisto were actually two continent-sized islands of
shell. Dry, mudlike stuff, hard as rock, floating on the endless seas of the
semiliquid planet.
The station, a ringed setup quite like the one on Earth, stood in the
geographic center of the south pole. The Magellan hovered over it while a
landing party went down in the four-man rocket plane.
Clyde, Haines and Burl were the landing party. This time, only Burl entered
the station after a hole had been blasted in the outer shell. While the
Magellan drew near Jupiter. Callisto, its fifth satellite outward, moved
about the mighty planet at a distance of 1,170,000 miles. It was a large
satellite as they go, 3,220 miles in diameter, larger, in fact, than Mercury.
But, as Russ explained, it was a queer place in its own fashion.
For despite its size, Callisto was apparently not a solid body as we think of
it. Its density totaled only a little more than that of water, its mass half that
of the Earth's Moon—a notoriously porous body.
They bore down on Callisto, matching their speed to its, and swung close to
its surface. It had almost no atmosphere, just a thin layer of the heavier
gases. It was a belted world, without clearly defined continents or surface
markings. Its equatorial zone was one vast, featureless belt of darkish-gray.
Its temperate zones were white, with patches of yellow here and there. But
its poles were gray again.
"The satellite's like a huge ball of thin mud that's never hardened," said Burl
as they studied the strange terrain.
"The equator's the softest—it seems to be a river of muddy water, hundreds
of miles wide—only it can't be water. Probably semisolidified gases holding
dust and grains of matter in suspension," said Russ. "The temperate zones
are the same stuff, only colder, and therefore more stable. A thin crust of
frozen gases over a planet-wide ocean of semiliquid substance."
"The Sun-tap station's on the southern pole," said Burl. "That must be
solid."
It was. The poles of Callisto were actually two continent-sized islands of
shell. Dry, mudlike stuff, hard as rock, floating on the endless seas of the
semiliquid planet.
The station, a ringed setup quite like the one on Earth, stood in the
geographic center of the south pole. The Magellan hovered over it while a
landing party went down in the four-man rocket plane.
Clyde, Haines and Burl were the landing party. This time, only Burl entered
the station after a hole had been blasted in the outer shell. While the
Page 102
redheaded astronomer took samples and made observations, Haines kept
watch. Nobody knew what type of defense awaited them here.
Burl found the controls easily enough. He was afraid that he might have lost
his physical charge, but it was not so. The controls functioned, the Sun-tap
station died. The effect was not very noticeable, for Callisto was already far
from the Sun and the thin atmosphere could not diminish the dark sky of
outer space. What the great masts caught must have been only the relay
from other stations—or perhaps the invisible rays of the distant Sun.
Burl saw no reason to linger, and the three of them gathered up their
equipment. As they started back toward the rocket plane, they heard an
ominous rumble in the ground.
A sudden spurt of blazing gas shot up from the center of the station.
"Duck!" yelled Haines, and they fell flat on the ground. Burl held his hands
protectively over his head, as an explosion shook the building.
There was no rain of rocks. Whatever the blast, Callisto's gravity was too
weak to attract the debris that flew high above the station.
"It was an atomic explosion!" Haines shouted into his helmet mike. "They
mined the station. Run for it!"
They raced for the rocket plane. As they ran, Burl felt the ground quiver
beneath him, and huge cracks began to spread, rippling through the hard
ground.
They reached the plane and piled in. Russ took off just as the surface
cracked open in a thousand places like an ice sheet breaking in an Arctic
thaw.
As they rocketed back to the Magellan, the whole polar cap, an area
hundreds of miles around the Sun-tap station, split apart. Great spurts of
liquid magma, the liquid gas-dust from the heart of the planet, shot up like
fountains. Parts of the shell-like polar continent were disappearing beneath
this new ocean.
"Their little atomic bomb shattered the thin crust. The whole polar island
will probably sink," said Russ. "It was a clever trap. They knew what would
watch. Nobody knew what type of defense awaited them here.
Burl found the controls easily enough. He was afraid that he might have lost
his physical charge, but it was not so. The controls functioned, the Sun-tap
station died. The effect was not very noticeable, for Callisto was already far
from the Sun and the thin atmosphere could not diminish the dark sky of
outer space. What the great masts caught must have been only the relay
from other stations—or perhaps the invisible rays of the distant Sun.
Burl saw no reason to linger, and the three of them gathered up their
equipment. As they started back toward the rocket plane, they heard an
ominous rumble in the ground.
A sudden spurt of blazing gas shot up from the center of the station.
"Duck!" yelled Haines, and they fell flat on the ground. Burl held his hands
protectively over his head, as an explosion shook the building.
There was no rain of rocks. Whatever the blast, Callisto's gravity was too
weak to attract the debris that flew high above the station.
"It was an atomic explosion!" Haines shouted into his helmet mike. "They
mined the station. Run for it!"
They raced for the rocket plane. As they ran, Burl felt the ground quiver
beneath him, and huge cracks began to spread, rippling through the hard
ground.
They reached the plane and piled in. Russ took off just as the surface
cracked open in a thousand places like an ice sheet breaking in an Arctic
thaw.
As they rocketed back to the Magellan, the whole polar cap, an area
hundreds of miles around the Sun-tap station, split apart. Great spurts of
liquid magma, the liquid gas-dust from the heart of the planet, shot up like
fountains. Parts of the shell-like polar continent were disappearing beneath
this new ocean.
"Their little atomic bomb shattered the thin crust. The whole polar island
will probably sink," said Russ. "It was a clever trap. They knew what would
Page 103
happen."
"Saturn next," said Burl. "What'll they have set up there?"
They reached the Magellan, loaded the rocket plane aboard, and pulled out,
setting their course for the ringed planet. But even as they did so, something
was coming from Saturn to meet them.
"Saturn next," said Burl. "What'll they have set up there?"
They reached the Magellan, loaded the rocket plane aboard, and pulled out,
setting their course for the ringed planet. But even as they did so, something
was coming from Saturn to meet them.
Page 104
Chapter 14.
Rockets Away!
The next lap of their journey was uneventful. Saturn, the next outward
planet from the Sun, and the second largest, would present the same
problem as Jupiter. This world, famous for its mysterious rings, was about
71,000 miles in diameter and had a large family of satellites—nine in all.
The Sun-tap station would be on one of these, Burl thought.
Saturn was also almost as far out from Jupiter as Jupiter itself had been
from the Sun. This meant that the trip would be as long for the Magellan as
the distance they had already traveled to get to Jupiter. Fortunately the A-G
drive was a remarkable thing—it was possible to accelerate to fantastic
speeds—in theory, probably right up to the speed of light. And so, where
great distances were concerned, the ship simply rushed its fall through on
Saturn's line of gravitation.
Boulton had fully recovered and showed no lingering signs of the strange
electronic charge. Because of the limited size of the crew, Lockhart put the
Marine captain back on full duty—he would participate in future landings
as if nothing had ever happened.
At the same time, Lockhart cautioned Haines, Burl and Ferrati to keep their
eyes on him. It was always possible that the foe's weapon had made some
more lasting mark.
Haines had his group make a new inventory of their weapons. Burl,
working with them in a space suit, in the partially protected region of the
cargo hull, was surprised at the variety. There was a second rocket plane, a
two-man outfit. In addition, they had a large store of offensive weapons,
including a small but formidable supply of atomic explosives.
Haines gave Burl and Ferrati—who were new to military weapons—brief
introductory lectures on their use. Burl saw just what a hand-sized, tactical
atomic shell looked like and how it worked. He learned how to operate the
heavy-caliber rocket gun which hurled this tiniest of atomic bombs.
Rockets Away!
The next lap of their journey was uneventful. Saturn, the next outward
planet from the Sun, and the second largest, would present the same
problem as Jupiter. This world, famous for its mysterious rings, was about
71,000 miles in diameter and had a large family of satellites—nine in all.
The Sun-tap station would be on one of these, Burl thought.
Saturn was also almost as far out from Jupiter as Jupiter itself had been
from the Sun. This meant that the trip would be as long for the Magellan as
the distance they had already traveled to get to Jupiter. Fortunately the A-G
drive was a remarkable thing—it was possible to accelerate to fantastic
speeds—in theory, probably right up to the speed of light. And so, where
great distances were concerned, the ship simply rushed its fall through on
Saturn's line of gravitation.
Boulton had fully recovered and showed no lingering signs of the strange
electronic charge. Because of the limited size of the crew, Lockhart put the
Marine captain back on full duty—he would participate in future landings
as if nothing had ever happened.
At the same time, Lockhart cautioned Haines, Burl and Ferrati to keep their
eyes on him. It was always possible that the foe's weapon had made some
more lasting mark.
Haines had his group make a new inventory of their weapons. Burl,
working with them in a space suit, in the partially protected region of the
cargo hull, was surprised at the variety. There was a second rocket plane, a
two-man outfit. In addition, they had a large store of offensive weapons,
including a small but formidable supply of atomic explosives.
Haines gave Burl and Ferrati—who were new to military weapons—brief
introductory lectures on their use. Burl saw just what a hand-sized, tactical
atomic shell looked like and how it worked. He learned how to operate the
heavy-caliber rocket gun which hurled this tiniest of atomic bombs.
Page 105
And so the time passed, and the amazing disc of Saturn began to grow in
their viewplates. It was banded, much like Jupiter, and its brilliant rings
surrounded it with a mystic halo that set it apart from all the other worlds of
the Sun's family.
Burl was watching Saturn through the largest of the nose viewplates when
he thought that he saw a black dot crossing its face. He had located the
known moons of Saturn and this was not one of them. Excited, he called
Russell Clyde. "Could it be a tenth satellite?" he asked, pointing out the tiny
dot.
Russ squinted his eyes; then, calculating mentally, he shook his head, "I
don't think so. It looks to me more like something that's in space between us
and Saturn. In fact—it must be fairly close to us for us to see it at all." He
turned to Lockhart who was at the control panel with Oberfield.
"You'd better have a look. Could be a giant meteor coming in our direction."
"We're moving mighty fast," commented Oberfield. "It should have passed
us already if it were a meteor. Instead, it seems to be maintaining the same
distance—neither growing larger nor smaller. Acts very odd for a natural
body."
"Uh, uh," said Lockhart. "This calls for caution." He quickly went back to
the controls, pressed the general alarm button, then called into the intercom.
"All hands to emergency stations. Haines and party, please prepare
defensive positions."
"This means me," gulped Burl, and scooted down the central hatch, almost
colliding with Caton and Shea on their way to the engine room. He met
Haines, and, with neat dispatch, all four slipped into space suits. Then out
through the cargo hold to posts by escape hatches.
Burl and Haines, at the main entry port, unlimbered the long rocket
launcher that had been set up in the passageway. Haines placed three shells
of differing strength in position.
They heard through their helmet phones that the mysterious dot was
drawing closer. Haines set up one of the launching racks, which was
equipped with a telescopic sighter, and peered through the eyepiece.
their viewplates. It was banded, much like Jupiter, and its brilliant rings
surrounded it with a mystic halo that set it apart from all the other worlds of
the Sun's family.
Burl was watching Saturn through the largest of the nose viewplates when
he thought that he saw a black dot crossing its face. He had located the
known moons of Saturn and this was not one of them. Excited, he called
Russell Clyde. "Could it be a tenth satellite?" he asked, pointing out the tiny
dot.
Russ squinted his eyes; then, calculating mentally, he shook his head, "I
don't think so. It looks to me more like something that's in space between us
and Saturn. In fact—it must be fairly close to us for us to see it at all." He
turned to Lockhart who was at the control panel with Oberfield.
"You'd better have a look. Could be a giant meteor coming in our direction."
"We're moving mighty fast," commented Oberfield. "It should have passed
us already if it were a meteor. Instead, it seems to be maintaining the same
distance—neither growing larger nor smaller. Acts very odd for a natural
body."
"Uh, uh," said Lockhart. "This calls for caution." He quickly went back to
the controls, pressed the general alarm button, then called into the intercom.
"All hands to emergency stations. Haines and party, please prepare
defensive positions."
"This means me," gulped Burl, and scooted down the central hatch, almost
colliding with Caton and Shea on their way to the engine room. He met
Haines, and, with neat dispatch, all four slipped into space suits. Then out
through the cargo hold to posts by escape hatches.
Burl and Haines, at the main entry port, unlimbered the long rocket
launcher that had been set up in the passageway. Haines placed three shells
of differing strength in position.
They heard through their helmet phones that the mysterious dot was
drawing closer. Haines set up one of the launching racks, which was
equipped with a telescopic sighter, and peered through the eyepiece.
Page 106
Apparently he caught it, for he grunted, then motioned to Burl to take a
look.
It was no natural object. It was the shape of a dumbbell—two spheres
joined together by a short middle bar. One sphere was a deep, golden color,
the other a bluish-silver, the connecting rod a coppery metal.
"The pattern of spheres certainly suggests the Sun-tappers to me," said Burl.
Haines murmured his agreement.
Lockhart's voice came on the phones. "We've decided it's one of the Sun-
tapper ships. We're not going to wait to make sure. Before we left Earth, I
can now inform you, I received a directive from the President to regard the
builders of these Sun-tap stations as active enemies. My orders are that we
are not to attempt to undertake peaceful contact, but are to treat them on
sight as armed foes in the field. To do otherwise is to risk Earth's last active
defense—this ship.
"I think I don't have to argue this further, considering our recent
experiences." His voice hesitated, then rang out firmly, "Haines, you can
commence firing at will!"
Haines clicked his tongue and reached for one of the shells. "Okay, Burl,
aim at her direct. This one's got a proximity nose that'll beam at her and
drive itself where ever she ducks."
He slid the rocket shell into the launcher, Burl sighted, and then Haines
pressed the trigger. There was a whoosh of fire and a flare from the
launcher's nose. A minute spark winged into the darkness toward the spot,
still many miles away, where the strange ship hung.
They watched with bated breath. Suddenly there was a flash of light from
the other ship—a vivid lightning bolt which leaped out and flared up briefly
in space. Then darkness again.
"They fired a burst of energy at us. It hit the rocket shell instead," said
Haines. "Well, now we know. They use bolts of pure energy—something
like the one they fired at Boulton."
look.
It was no natural object. It was the shape of a dumbbell—two spheres
joined together by a short middle bar. One sphere was a deep, golden color,
the other a bluish-silver, the connecting rod a coppery metal.
"The pattern of spheres certainly suggests the Sun-tappers to me," said Burl.
Haines murmured his agreement.
Lockhart's voice came on the phones. "We've decided it's one of the Sun-
tapper ships. We're not going to wait to make sure. Before we left Earth, I
can now inform you, I received a directive from the President to regard the
builders of these Sun-tap stations as active enemies. My orders are that we
are not to attempt to undertake peaceful contact, but are to treat them on
sight as armed foes in the field. To do otherwise is to risk Earth's last active
defense—this ship.
"I think I don't have to argue this further, considering our recent
experiences." His voice hesitated, then rang out firmly, "Haines, you can
commence firing at will!"
Haines clicked his tongue and reached for one of the shells. "Okay, Burl,
aim at her direct. This one's got a proximity nose that'll beam at her and
drive itself where ever she ducks."
He slid the rocket shell into the launcher, Burl sighted, and then Haines
pressed the trigger. There was a whoosh of fire and a flare from the
launcher's nose. A minute spark winged into the darkness toward the spot,
still many miles away, where the strange ship hung.
They watched with bated breath. Suddenly there was a flash of light from
the other ship—a vivid lightning bolt which leaped out and flared up briefly
in space. Then darkness again.
"They fired a burst of energy at us. It hit the rocket shell instead," said
Haines. "Well, now we know. They use bolts of pure energy—something
like the one they fired at Boulton."
Page 107
He fitted another shell into the launcher, and fired again. Again a spark
winged its way, and the bolt of energy burst out to detonate the shell. Burl
whistled. "How did they spot it so fast?" he asked.
"I don't think they did. They're firing at us—the rocket shell only happened
to be between," snapped Haines.
"Ferrati," he called into his mike, "fire a shrapnel shell at them when I say
the word. Advise me when ready!"
Ferrati's voice snapped back. "Right you are, sir. Here it is now, one minute
—okay, on target!"
While Ferrati and Boulton were readying their shot from the lower cargo
port near the tail of the ship, Haines and Burl had been fitting the largest of
their shells into their own launcher. They aimed it carefully at the front-
most sphere of the enemy.
"Ferrati, fire!" cried Haines, and then slowly counted to five and pressed the
stud of his own launcher.
There was a momentary flicker as Ferrati's rocket shell raced forth below.
Then, after a definite time lapse, the exhaust of Haines' heavy shell
appeared.
"The shrapnel shell is segmented and doesn't have a proximity guide,"
Haines explained. "As soon as it's on its way, the nose comes apart into a
dozen small shells, each with a standard explosive charge. The shell we
used has an atomic bomb warhead and is on proximity guide. It'll chase that
ship to the ends of the system if they don't blast it first."
He paused. There was another bolt of raw energy from the dumbbell-shaped
craft, and this time a series of flares in the space between—the shrapnel
charges had been touched off. Burl held his breath.
"I figure it takes them a while to recharge their gun," said Haines. "Our own
blockbuster should get there before they fire again."
Then suddenly there came a sharper flare of brilliant light. For an instant
Burl was blinded by the glare. When he recovered, he peered avidly through
winged its way, and the bolt of energy burst out to detonate the shell. Burl
whistled. "How did they spot it so fast?" he asked.
"I don't think they did. They're firing at us—the rocket shell only happened
to be between," snapped Haines.
"Ferrati," he called into his mike, "fire a shrapnel shell at them when I say
the word. Advise me when ready!"
Ferrati's voice snapped back. "Right you are, sir. Here it is now, one minute
—okay, on target!"
While Ferrati and Boulton were readying their shot from the lower cargo
port near the tail of the ship, Haines and Burl had been fitting the largest of
their shells into their own launcher. They aimed it carefully at the front-
most sphere of the enemy.
"Ferrati, fire!" cried Haines, and then slowly counted to five and pressed the
stud of his own launcher.
There was a momentary flicker as Ferrati's rocket shell raced forth below.
Then, after a definite time lapse, the exhaust of Haines' heavy shell
appeared.
"The shrapnel shell is segmented and doesn't have a proximity guide,"
Haines explained. "As soon as it's on its way, the nose comes apart into a
dozen small shells, each with a standard explosive charge. The shell we
used has an atomic bomb warhead and is on proximity guide. It'll chase that
ship to the ends of the system if they don't blast it first."
He paused. There was another bolt of raw energy from the dumbbell-shaped
craft, and this time a series of flares in the space between—the shrapnel
charges had been touched off. Burl held his breath.
"I figure it takes them a while to recharge their gun," said Haines. "Our own
blockbuster should get there before they fire again."
Then suddenly there came a sharper flare of brilliant light. For an instant
Burl was blinded by the glare. When he recovered, he peered avidly through
Page 108
the telescopic sighter. He saw the ship, but where there had been a golden
sphere there was now only a shattered fragment of twisted metal.
The enemy ship changed before his eyes. The remaining silvery sphere
glowed brighter, and took on a golden hue. Then it seemed as if the ship
were growing smaller. He realized finally that it was retreating.
Burl gave an involuntary shout, and in his earphones he heard the same
shouts of triumph from every voice on the ship.
Although it might have been possible to pursue the battered enemy ship, the
Magellan did not try. They were still on course for Saturn and were not
going to deviate.
They reached Saturn after several more days. Matching their great speed
with that of the ringed world in its orbit took time, and then they began their
survey.
As they had suspected, the Sun-tap station was on one of the moons. The
moon was called Iapetus, the third largest of Saturn's family. It was about
eight hundred miles in diameter and the next to the farthest satellite from
Saturn. Russ was disappointed that they hadn't picked Titan, the biggest
moon of all. Titan was over two thousand miles wide and appeared to have
an atmosphere of methane.
The view of Saturn was awesome, even from Iapetus' orbit two million
miles away. Burl knew it would be a sight unparalleled in the system. The
great broad rings, composed of innumerable tiny particles of metal, stone,
and possibly ice, encircled it as if held there by an invisible hand. They
were, he knew, the particles of a moon that had either come too close to
Saturn's great gravitational pull to hold its shape, or else had never escaped
far enough to congeal as one solid mass.
Iapetus was a solid world, though. A rocky body, it had a dull gleam, and
was streaked here and there with layers of white and yellow, where veins of
frozen gases lay forever upon the frigid surface. No atmosphere veiled the
surface nor softened the harsh, jagged mountains and clefts of this
forbidding little subplanet.
sphere there was now only a shattered fragment of twisted metal.
The enemy ship changed before his eyes. The remaining silvery sphere
glowed brighter, and took on a golden hue. Then it seemed as if the ship
were growing smaller. He realized finally that it was retreating.
Burl gave an involuntary shout, and in his earphones he heard the same
shouts of triumph from every voice on the ship.
Although it might have been possible to pursue the battered enemy ship, the
Magellan did not try. They were still on course for Saturn and were not
going to deviate.
They reached Saturn after several more days. Matching their great speed
with that of the ringed world in its orbit took time, and then they began their
survey.
As they had suspected, the Sun-tap station was on one of the moons. The
moon was called Iapetus, the third largest of Saturn's family. It was about
eight hundred miles in diameter and the next to the farthest satellite from
Saturn. Russ was disappointed that they hadn't picked Titan, the biggest
moon of all. Titan was over two thousand miles wide and appeared to have
an atmosphere of methane.
The view of Saturn was awesome, even from Iapetus' orbit two million
miles away. Burl knew it would be a sight unparalleled in the system. The
great broad rings, composed of innumerable tiny particles of metal, stone,
and possibly ice, encircled it as if held there by an invisible hand. They
were, he knew, the particles of a moon that had either come too close to
Saturn's great gravitational pull to hold its shape, or else had never escaped
far enough to congeal as one solid mass.
Iapetus was a solid world, though. A rocky body, it had a dull gleam, and
was streaked here and there with layers of white and yellow, where veins of
frozen gases lay forever upon the frigid surface. No atmosphere veiled the
surface nor softened the harsh, jagged mountains and clefts of this
forbidding little subplanet.
Page 109
The Sun-tap station stood in plain sight on a high plateau near a polar
region. The Magellan hovered over it while Lockhart held a council of war.
"I don't see what's to be gained by attempting a landing party," he said.
"We've taken all the readings and pictures of the other stations—and we've
had a couple of narrow escapes. They've probably mined this one, and they
have had plenty of time to prepare a trap. I'm in favor of simply dropping an
H-bomb on it and leaving."
After a brief discussion, with only perfunctory objections from Clyde and
Oberfield who, as astronomers, wanted to land to take other readings, the
decision was carried.
The Magellan swung up a couple of hundred miles above the Sun-tappers'
plateau. Haines and his crew loaded the bulky H-bomb into the main
launcher in the tail of the ship. Then the Magellan aimed itself at the target,
and the rocket-driven bomb roared out.
Down it sped, zeroing in on the wall of the station. There was a blinding
flash, a glare as brilliant as that of the Sun itself, as it hit square on the
mark. This time Burl watched through carefully shielded viewscreens. The
scene was obscured by a wide-flung cloud of white—tens of thousands of
cubic feet of satellite rock turned instantaneously into dust particles. After
the dust cleared away, they saw only a gaping crater where the plateau had
been—a volcanic hole, miles wide and glowing red, from which spread
vast, deep cracks throughout the entire visible hemisphere of the moon.
The men on the Magellan were awed and silent. The thought occurred to
each of them, beyond his capacity to deny it: what if this had happened on
Earth?
"Of course," said Ferrati slowly, "the low gravity of Iapetus accounts for the
greater extent of the disaster. If this had been Bikini or...." But under the
glares of the rest of the crew, his sentence trailed off weakly.
Lockhart turned away from the viewer. "Mr. Oberfield," he said,
unexpectedly formal and official, "you may chart our course for Uranus."
"Aye, aye, sir," said that usually dour personage, with alacrity.
region. The Magellan hovered over it while Lockhart held a council of war.
"I don't see what's to be gained by attempting a landing party," he said.
"We've taken all the readings and pictures of the other stations—and we've
had a couple of narrow escapes. They've probably mined this one, and they
have had plenty of time to prepare a trap. I'm in favor of simply dropping an
H-bomb on it and leaving."
After a brief discussion, with only perfunctory objections from Clyde and
Oberfield who, as astronomers, wanted to land to take other readings, the
decision was carried.
The Magellan swung up a couple of hundred miles above the Sun-tappers'
plateau. Haines and his crew loaded the bulky H-bomb into the main
launcher in the tail of the ship. Then the Magellan aimed itself at the target,
and the rocket-driven bomb roared out.
Down it sped, zeroing in on the wall of the station. There was a blinding
flash, a glare as brilliant as that of the Sun itself, as it hit square on the
mark. This time Burl watched through carefully shielded viewscreens. The
scene was obscured by a wide-flung cloud of white—tens of thousands of
cubic feet of satellite rock turned instantaneously into dust particles. After
the dust cleared away, they saw only a gaping crater where the plateau had
been—a volcanic hole, miles wide and glowing red, from which spread
vast, deep cracks throughout the entire visible hemisphere of the moon.
The men on the Magellan were awed and silent. The thought occurred to
each of them, beyond his capacity to deny it: what if this had happened on
Earth?
"Of course," said Ferrati slowly, "the low gravity of Iapetus accounts for the
greater extent of the disaster. If this had been Bikini or...." But under the
glares of the rest of the crew, his sentence trailed off weakly.
Lockhart turned away from the viewer. "Mr. Oberfield," he said,
unexpectedly formal and official, "you may chart our course for Uranus."
"Aye, aye, sir," said that usually dour personage, with alacrity.
Page 110
With forced smiles, the rest of the crew drifted away to their duties. The
Magellan pulled away from Saturn, heading out again toward the limits of
the solar system, but it was several days before everyone had quite managed
to dismiss the vision of the H-bomb from his mind.
Magellan pulled away from Saturn, heading out again toward the limits of
the solar system, but it was several days before everyone had quite managed
to dismiss the vision of the H-bomb from his mind.
Page 111
Chapter 15.
Ice Cold on Oberon
Nevertheless, from that point on, a different spirit seemed to animate
everyone aboard the Magellan. There was the feeling that they had closed
with the enemy and found themselves not wanting. There was the feeling
that they possessed powers not inferior to those of their unknown enemies.
The thought had been haunting them all along that they were in the position
of a backward people facing an advanced invader—something like the
problem of the Aztecs when faced with the gunpowder and armor of the
conquistadors.
Now they knew that though the Sun-tappers' weapons were different and
indeed advanced beyond Earthly technology, they themselves were not
without resources equally deadly to the foe.
After the memory of the H-bomb's powers had been finally absorbed, the
crew's activities began to indicate that the ship was coming into the crucial
phase of its journey. Haines and Boulton were going over the list of military
supplies with sharp, calculating eyes and slight grins at the thought of
retribution to come. Ferrati was overhauling the rocket planes and land
traveling devices, making them shipshape.
Russell Clyde and Burl surveyed the sky, anxious to be the first to spot what
they hoped would be the limping body of the battered and fleeing dumbbell
ship, a little atingle at the hope of spotting another such ship—feeling now
almost like the hunting dog that has finally spotted the fox.
Lockhart himself reflected this mood of growing excitement. He prowled
the ship, examining the mighty purring engines, querying Caton, Shea and
Detmar as to how it could better its performance, how fast it could be made
to shift speed and directions. He studied the orbits and locations of the
remaining planets.
"Uranus is not too far off our path to Pluto," he announced one day. "We'll
make it in time to wipe out their plant there. But Neptune, whose orbit is
Ice Cold on Oberon
Nevertheless, from that point on, a different spirit seemed to animate
everyone aboard the Magellan. There was the feeling that they had closed
with the enemy and found themselves not wanting. There was the feeling
that they possessed powers not inferior to those of their unknown enemies.
The thought had been haunting them all along that they were in the position
of a backward people facing an advanced invader—something like the
problem of the Aztecs when faced with the gunpowder and armor of the
conquistadors.
Now they knew that though the Sun-tappers' weapons were different and
indeed advanced beyond Earthly technology, they themselves were not
without resources equally deadly to the foe.
After the memory of the H-bomb's powers had been finally absorbed, the
crew's activities began to indicate that the ship was coming into the crucial
phase of its journey. Haines and Boulton were going over the list of military
supplies with sharp, calculating eyes and slight grins at the thought of
retribution to come. Ferrati was overhauling the rocket planes and land
traveling devices, making them shipshape.
Russell Clyde and Burl surveyed the sky, anxious to be the first to spot what
they hoped would be the limping body of the battered and fleeing dumbbell
ship, a little atingle at the hope of spotting another such ship—feeling now
almost like the hunting dog that has finally spotted the fox.
Lockhart himself reflected this mood of growing excitement. He prowled
the ship, examining the mighty purring engines, querying Caton, Shea and
Detmar as to how it could better its performance, how fast it could be made
to shift speed and directions. He studied the orbits and locations of the
remaining planets.
"Uranus is not too far off our path to Pluto," he announced one day. "We'll
make it in time to wipe out their plant there. But Neptune, whose orbit is
Page 112
between those of Uranus and Pluto, is away off our track, a third of the way
around the Sun. We're going to skip it, hit directly for Pluto and their main
base—the end of their line. I don't want to give them too much time to
make repairs or to get any reinforcements. I think they're limited in numbers
—and we ought to slam them while they still are."
There was no dissent at this. And as the days rolled past, the men of the
Magellan began to chafe in their repressed desire to finish the matter. At
last Uranus came into sight—a large globe, very much like Saturn and
Jupiter in that it was of low density and great dimensions. Roughly, sixty-
four times the size of Earth, its density was barely above that of water and it
probably had no solid surface to speak of. An inhospitable mass of
unbreathable gases, at temperatures fantastically lower than the freezing
point of water.
As they drew close to the planet, they could see that it also was banded,
pale green bands alternating with lighter ones—indicating that some
sections of its atmospheric belt moved faster than others. It had five moons
which rotated in the opposite direction from those of any other satellite
system.
It was on the farthest moon, Oberon, a sphere six hundred miles in
diameter, that the Sun-tap station revealed itself. They swung down to
observe it and to place their bomb. Not an H-bomb though—they
recognized that they had erred in thinking they needed such a powerful
explosive.
Oberon was without an atmosphere, a rocky world with streaks of frozen
gases, and here and there the sheen of a lake of ice—ice that would never
melt—that on this world would be a permanent, hard-as-metal material.
There was, nonetheless, something about the surface that seemed to bother
Russ.
"Do you notice what seems to be a sort of shifting movement?" he asked
Burl. Burl looked, and sure enough, he saw that in places there seemed a
flickering of lights.
"Yes," he said, "I see it. What do you suppose it is?"
around the Sun. We're going to skip it, hit directly for Pluto and their main
base—the end of their line. I don't want to give them too much time to
make repairs or to get any reinforcements. I think they're limited in numbers
—and we ought to slam them while they still are."
There was no dissent at this. And as the days rolled past, the men of the
Magellan began to chafe in their repressed desire to finish the matter. At
last Uranus came into sight—a large globe, very much like Saturn and
Jupiter in that it was of low density and great dimensions. Roughly, sixty-
four times the size of Earth, its density was barely above that of water and it
probably had no solid surface to speak of. An inhospitable mass of
unbreathable gases, at temperatures fantastically lower than the freezing
point of water.
As they drew close to the planet, they could see that it also was banded,
pale green bands alternating with lighter ones—indicating that some
sections of its atmospheric belt moved faster than others. It had five moons
which rotated in the opposite direction from those of any other satellite
system.
It was on the farthest moon, Oberon, a sphere six hundred miles in
diameter, that the Sun-tap station revealed itself. They swung down to
observe it and to place their bomb. Not an H-bomb though—they
recognized that they had erred in thinking they needed such a powerful
explosive.
Oberon was without an atmosphere, a rocky world with streaks of frozen
gases, and here and there the sheen of a lake of ice—ice that would never
melt—that on this world would be a permanent, hard-as-metal material.
There was, nonetheless, something about the surface that seemed to bother
Russ.
"Do you notice what seems to be a sort of shifting movement?" he asked
Burl. Burl looked, and sure enough, he saw that in places there seemed a
flickering of lights.
"Yes," he said, "I see it. What do you suppose it is?"
Page 113
"I don't know," said Russ, "But I'm going to ask Lockhart to put the ship
down and let me take a look."
Lockhart at first demurred, but finally decided that they could afford the
brief halt. The Magellan approached the surface, safely distant from the
Sun-tap station.
Burl and Russ descended in the two-man rocket plane, while the teardrop-
shaped ship hung half a mile above them. They landed on a narrow plain,
bordered by low ridges of mountains shining with streaks of frozen
hydrogen. A layer of cosmic dust hung over the rocks.
Wearing insulated space suits, they left the rocket plane. It was Burl who
made the first discovery. He pointed dramatically at the ground. "Look,
Russ. This dust is full of streaks and marks. It hasn't been lying here
undisturbed. Something has crossed over it!"
Russ kneeled in order to look more carefully. The layer of dust, the
consequences of an airless world exposed without protection to the endless
fall of cosmic particles, was indeed not the level, undisturbed surface it
should have been. Here and there were light, low depressions, as if
something had moved across it—like a small snake crawling on its belly. In
one place lay a series of depressions, like the footprints of some light-
bodied creature.
"Impossible," muttered Russ. "Life can't exist here."
But they trudged on, across the barren flat to a ridge of rock. Here they
found what they had thought to be impossible. Clustered along the side of
the ridge, in the faint light of the distant and tiny Sun, was a series of thin,
blue stalks, about half a foot in height. On each stalk was a flat scalloped
top like a little umbrella. It was sometimes bright blue, and sometimes
violet. As they drew nearer, these little stalks began to sway, and turned
their tops toward them.
"They look like plants," said Burl. "Plants made of something glassy and
plastic."
As Russ studied the strange growths, something moved across the dusty
tract behind them. It was long and thin and wiggly, with a ridge of tiny
down and let me take a look."
Lockhart at first demurred, but finally decided that they could afford the
brief halt. The Magellan approached the surface, safely distant from the
Sun-tap station.
Burl and Russ descended in the two-man rocket plane, while the teardrop-
shaped ship hung half a mile above them. They landed on a narrow plain,
bordered by low ridges of mountains shining with streaks of frozen
hydrogen. A layer of cosmic dust hung over the rocks.
Wearing insulated space suits, they left the rocket plane. It was Burl who
made the first discovery. He pointed dramatically at the ground. "Look,
Russ. This dust is full of streaks and marks. It hasn't been lying here
undisturbed. Something has crossed over it!"
Russ kneeled in order to look more carefully. The layer of dust, the
consequences of an airless world exposed without protection to the endless
fall of cosmic particles, was indeed not the level, undisturbed surface it
should have been. Here and there were light, low depressions, as if
something had moved across it—like a small snake crawling on its belly. In
one place lay a series of depressions, like the footprints of some light-
bodied creature.
"Impossible," muttered Russ. "Life can't exist here."
But they trudged on, across the barren flat to a ridge of rock. Here they
found what they had thought to be impossible. Clustered along the side of
the ridge, in the faint light of the distant and tiny Sun, was a series of thin,
blue stalks, about half a foot in height. On each stalk was a flat scalloped
top like a little umbrella. It was sometimes bright blue, and sometimes
violet. As they drew nearer, these little stalks began to sway, and turned
their tops toward them.
"They look like plants," said Burl. "Plants made of something glassy and
plastic."
As Russ studied the strange growths, something moved across the dusty
tract behind them. It was long and thin and wiggly, with a ridge of tiny
Page 114
crystalline hairs along its back. It was like a snake perhaps, but one made of
some unbelievably delicate glasswork.
It slid among the plants and wrapped itself around one. The growth snapped
suddenly, and then was absorbed by the creature.
Russ shook his head in amazement. "This is a great discovery," he said
incredulously. "This is life! It's life of a chemical type utterly different from
the protoplasm of Earth and Mars and Venus. It's life designed to exist
among liquid gases and frozen air—life which can't have anything in
common with protoplasm. Apparently it couldn't exist even on Saturn's
moons—they were too hot for it!"
Russ was carried away with the possibilities. "This hints at great things,
Burl. Out near Pluto, where the system is even colder, there may be other
forms of this frigi-plasmic life, if I may coin a word. This means a whole
new science!"
They returned to the ship with their astonishing news. The Magellan slowly
skimmed over the surface of Oberon. They found whole forests of this
glassy frigid vegetation, but not much evidence of any animal life larger
than the creature the two explorers had seen.
Over the Sun-tap station—a ringed layout like the others, whose cluster of
masts caught the emanations of the distant Sun on the one hand and directed
them outward to the still unseen planet Pluto on the other—the ship halted.
It drew up fifty miles, pointed its tail and blasted forth a rocket-driven,
tactical atomic bomb.
The blast on Oberon was tiny compared to the one which had devastated
Iapetus, but it still left a deep indentation in the surface for future space
fliers to see.
They left it and the Uranian orbit behind them and headed outward once
again. Behind them now lay the worlds of the Sun's family, while far off to
one side lay the tiny light of Neptune. Ahead, between them and the vast
gulf of interstellar space, lay only the dark, mysterious ninth planet, the
enigmatic world named after the lord of the underworld, Pluto.
some unbelievably delicate glasswork.
It slid among the plants and wrapped itself around one. The growth snapped
suddenly, and then was absorbed by the creature.
Russ shook his head in amazement. "This is a great discovery," he said
incredulously. "This is life! It's life of a chemical type utterly different from
the protoplasm of Earth and Mars and Venus. It's life designed to exist
among liquid gases and frozen air—life which can't have anything in
common with protoplasm. Apparently it couldn't exist even on Saturn's
moons—they were too hot for it!"
Russ was carried away with the possibilities. "This hints at great things,
Burl. Out near Pluto, where the system is even colder, there may be other
forms of this frigi-plasmic life, if I may coin a word. This means a whole
new science!"
They returned to the ship with their astonishing news. The Magellan slowly
skimmed over the surface of Oberon. They found whole forests of this
glassy frigid vegetation, but not much evidence of any animal life larger
than the creature the two explorers had seen.
Over the Sun-tap station—a ringed layout like the others, whose cluster of
masts caught the emanations of the distant Sun on the one hand and directed
them outward to the still unseen planet Pluto on the other—the ship halted.
It drew up fifty miles, pointed its tail and blasted forth a rocket-driven,
tactical atomic bomb.
The blast on Oberon was tiny compared to the one which had devastated
Iapetus, but it still left a deep indentation in the surface for future space
fliers to see.
They left it and the Uranian orbit behind them and headed outward once
again. Behind them now lay the worlds of the Sun's family, while far off to
one side lay the tiny light of Neptune. Ahead, between them and the vast
gulf of interstellar space, lay only the dark, mysterious ninth planet, the
enigmatic world named after the lord of the underworld, Pluto.
Page 115
The Magellan plunged on, in constant acceleration, moving outward to the
farthest limit of the solar system. They had traveled almost one billion,
eight hundred million miles from the Sun—and yet they still had two billion
miles more to go. This was the longest stretch—and during it, they would
reach speeds greater than any they had touched before. They shot outward,
faster and faster, eating up the infinite emptiness of space, driving the vast
stretch that divided Pluto from its neighbors.
The Sun, already small, dwindled steadily. It was still the brightest star in
their sky—of all the stars, it alone retained a disclike shape, and the faint
flicker of its coronal flames could occasionally be made out—but it no
longer dominated the heavens. To find the Sun, they now had to look for it
as they would for any other star.
As for Earth, it could not be seen. So close to the tiny Sun it lay that only
their sharpest telescopes could bring it out. Even Jupiter showed up only as
a thin, tiny crescent near the solar point of light.
"Pluto's a mysterious world," said Burl as he and Russ scanned the heavens
for a first glimpse of it. "The accounts in your astronomy books give very
little real information on it—but what they give is strange. They say it's the
only planet beyond Mars that is a small solid world like the inner ones. It
seems to be the same size as Earth—not at all like the big outer worlds. And
they say it seems to be the same mass as Earth—a solid world whose
surface gravity would be the same as our own planet's."
Russ nodded. "It's an odd one, all right. There's now even some belief that
it's not a true planet, but one that was once a satellite of Neptune. Its orbit is
peculiar; it apparently may cut into that of Neptune. In fact, everything
hints at Pluto not being a true child of our Sun. It may be a world captured
from afar—a lonely wanderer cast off from some other star, captured by the
Sun after millions of years of drifting lightless through space."
Beyond them, in their vision, lay only the stars of outer space, the void that
did not belong to our system. And then, finally, they found Pluto—a tiny
point of light shining among the blazing stars. They saw the disc, dimly
reflected in the light of the far-away Sun.
farthest limit of the solar system. They had traveled almost one billion,
eight hundred million miles from the Sun—and yet they still had two billion
miles more to go. This was the longest stretch—and during it, they would
reach speeds greater than any they had touched before. They shot outward,
faster and faster, eating up the infinite emptiness of space, driving the vast
stretch that divided Pluto from its neighbors.
The Sun, already small, dwindled steadily. It was still the brightest star in
their sky—of all the stars, it alone retained a disclike shape, and the faint
flicker of its coronal flames could occasionally be made out—but it no
longer dominated the heavens. To find the Sun, they now had to look for it
as they would for any other star.
As for Earth, it could not be seen. So close to the tiny Sun it lay that only
their sharpest telescopes could bring it out. Even Jupiter showed up only as
a thin, tiny crescent near the solar point of light.
"Pluto's a mysterious world," said Burl as he and Russ scanned the heavens
for a first glimpse of it. "The accounts in your astronomy books give very
little real information on it—but what they give is strange. They say it's the
only planet beyond Mars that is a small solid world like the inner ones. It
seems to be the same size as Earth—not at all like the big outer worlds. And
they say it seems to be the same mass as Earth—a solid world whose
surface gravity would be the same as our own planet's."
Russ nodded. "It's an odd one, all right. There's now even some belief that
it's not a true planet, but one that was once a satellite of Neptune. Its orbit is
peculiar; it apparently may cut into that of Neptune. In fact, everything
hints at Pluto not being a true child of our Sun. It may be a world captured
from afar—a lonely wanderer cast off from some other star, captured by the
Sun after millions of years of drifting lightless through space."
Beyond them, in their vision, lay only the stars of outer space, the void that
did not belong to our system. And then, finally, they found Pluto—a tiny
point of light shining among the blazing stars. They saw the disc, dimly
reflected in the light of the far-away Sun.
Page 116
Even as they were taking their first long look at the dark planet, the general
alarm rang. They had caught up with the fleeing wreck of the Sun-tapper's
scout cruiser.
alarm rang. They had caught up with the fleeing wreck of the Sun-tapper's
scout cruiser.
Page 117
Chapter 16.
In Orbit Around Pluto
There was a mad rush to action stations. Detmar, Ferrati and Oberfield, who
had been in their bunks, dashed to their posts while others tried to pass them
in both directions. Haines and Burl hastily climbed into their space suits,
while Ferrati and Boulton manned the inner defensive controls.
Burl pulled the tight-fitting harness of his insulated space suit over him. The
shape of the Sun-tapper ship came into focus on the tiny screen of the air
lock viewer. It was approaching them at a frighteningly rapid pace. He
could see the broken framework of one of its two globes—the one on which
they had scored their hit. The other globe and the connecting passages were
strikingly clear. Tiny circles of windows were visible in the passage section,
which undoubtedly housed the operators of the vessel. For a fleeting instant
he realized that as yet none of the Earthlings had any inkling of what these
creatures looked like.
While he knew that the scene was telescopic, the ship was undoubtedly
approaching them fast; or rather, they were catching up to it at a perilous
pace! Whether the wrecked enemy had slowed down more than they had, as
it approached its Plutonian base, or whether some other surprise lay ahead,
they had no idea.
Burl felt the jarring impact as Lockhart cut the Magellan's drive. There was
an instant of weightlessness, and then their weight reversed as the A-G
drive strove to slow down the ship. Within the air lock they were outside the
living space of the sphere, suspended beneath the drive chamber. Burl could
see the walls of the inner sphere whirl past him, a foot away, as the living
quarters rotated to shift with the gravitational change. And at that very
moment, while all those inside were temporarily helpless, disaster struck.
Burl had just finished adjusting his airtight helmet, and Haines was already
on his way forward to the outer shell port and the rocket guns, when there
In Orbit Around Pluto
There was a mad rush to action stations. Detmar, Ferrati and Oberfield, who
had been in their bunks, dashed to their posts while others tried to pass them
in both directions. Haines and Burl hastily climbed into their space suits,
while Ferrati and Boulton manned the inner defensive controls.
Burl pulled the tight-fitting harness of his insulated space suit over him. The
shape of the Sun-tapper ship came into focus on the tiny screen of the air
lock viewer. It was approaching them at a frighteningly rapid pace. He
could see the broken framework of one of its two globes—the one on which
they had scored their hit. The other globe and the connecting passages were
strikingly clear. Tiny circles of windows were visible in the passage section,
which undoubtedly housed the operators of the vessel. For a fleeting instant
he realized that as yet none of the Earthlings had any inkling of what these
creatures looked like.
While he knew that the scene was telescopic, the ship was undoubtedly
approaching them fast; or rather, they were catching up to it at a perilous
pace! Whether the wrecked enemy had slowed down more than they had, as
it approached its Plutonian base, or whether some other surprise lay ahead,
they had no idea.
Burl felt the jarring impact as Lockhart cut the Magellan's drive. There was
an instant of weightlessness, and then their weight reversed as the A-G
drive strove to slow down the ship. Within the air lock they were outside the
living space of the sphere, suspended beneath the drive chamber. Burl could
see the walls of the inner sphere whirl past him, a foot away, as the living
quarters rotated to shift with the gravitational change. And at that very
moment, while all those inside were temporarily helpless, disaster struck.
Burl had just finished adjusting his airtight helmet, and Haines was already
on his way forward to the outer shell port and the rocket guns, when there
Page 118
was a flash of lightning from the crippled enemy spaceship. The foe was
still capable of fighting—and it had fired first—alarmingly close.
Within what seemed a split second after Burl's eyes had registered the flash
on the little viewplate, the Magellan received the full force of the mighty
electronic discharge. To Burl it seemed as if a thunderclap had sounded in
his ears, and as if he had been plunged into a bath of white flames. The
walls of the passage sparked brilliantly, blinding light filled the air, and
Burl's body vibrated as it would to an electric shock.
He reeled wildly, catching at the walls and almost falling. In a few seconds
his senses recovered, although his body was still humming from the blow
and his ears were ringing. The viewplate had gone black, the lights in the air
lock corridor were dark, and when he tried to gain his feet he realized that
the ship now had no gravity; it was falling free without power.
Haines was slumped in the end of the corridor, with the port nearly opened.
Burl pushed his way over to him and helped the groggy explorer to his feet.
There was no sound, and Burl suddenly remembered that he hadn't taken
time to switch on his helmet phone. He did so and was relieved to hear
Harness voice asking if he was all right.
"I'm okay," Burl called. "Let's get this port open. Maybe we can hit back at
least once."
Together, they turned the bolts and pushed the thick outer shell door open.
Without the aid of telescopic sights they could see the shape of the Sun-
tapper vessel plainly, outlined against the curtain of distant stars. Struggling
not to think of what might be going on within the Magellan—their
earphones registered nothing except each other—they unlimbered the long
tube of the rocket launcher and aimed point-blank at the foe. Haines
reached into the ammunition locker vault alongside the passageway and
selected the biggest and wickedest of the available shells. He twisted the
dial in the warhead and, while Burl held the aim, shoved in the rocket shell.
With a press of the button, the missile roared out of the tube, racing in an
arc of fire directly toward the faint vision of the other ship.
They watched with bated breath, counting the seconds, hoping not to see
another blast of electrical fire. But apparently the foe had exhausted its
still capable of fighting—and it had fired first—alarmingly close.
Within what seemed a split second after Burl's eyes had registered the flash
on the little viewplate, the Magellan received the full force of the mighty
electronic discharge. To Burl it seemed as if a thunderclap had sounded in
his ears, and as if he had been plunged into a bath of white flames. The
walls of the passage sparked brilliantly, blinding light filled the air, and
Burl's body vibrated as it would to an electric shock.
He reeled wildly, catching at the walls and almost falling. In a few seconds
his senses recovered, although his body was still humming from the blow
and his ears were ringing. The viewplate had gone black, the lights in the air
lock corridor were dark, and when he tried to gain his feet he realized that
the ship now had no gravity; it was falling free without power.
Haines was slumped in the end of the corridor, with the port nearly opened.
Burl pushed his way over to him and helped the groggy explorer to his feet.
There was no sound, and Burl suddenly remembered that he hadn't taken
time to switch on his helmet phone. He did so and was relieved to hear
Harness voice asking if he was all right.
"I'm okay," Burl called. "Let's get this port open. Maybe we can hit back at
least once."
Together, they turned the bolts and pushed the thick outer shell door open.
Without the aid of telescopic sights they could see the shape of the Sun-
tapper vessel plainly, outlined against the curtain of distant stars. Struggling
not to think of what might be going on within the Magellan—their
earphones registered nothing except each other—they unlimbered the long
tube of the rocket launcher and aimed point-blank at the foe. Haines
reached into the ammunition locker vault alongside the passageway and
selected the biggest and wickedest of the available shells. He twisted the
dial in the warhead and, while Burl held the aim, shoved in the rocket shell.
With a press of the button, the missile roared out of the tube, racing in an
arc of fire directly toward the faint vision of the other ship.
They watched with bated breath, counting the seconds, hoping not to see
another blast of electrical fire. But apparently the foe had exhausted its
Page 119
limited resources, for the thin spidery line of rocket sparks reached out,
farther and farther, until it seemed to touch the surface of the golden globe.
There was a great flare in the sky now, an outpouring of fire and hot metal.
When it cleared away, the sky was empty.
Haines wearily drew the outer port shut. "Now, let's see if we're goners,
too," he said quietly. They sealed the outer shell and made their way along
the dark passage.
Even as they were unlocking the toggles of the inner hatch, the corridor
lights started to flicker. They would light up dimly, and then flicker out,
light up again, flare for an instant, then die down. Someone was alive
within the ship.
They got the hatch open. In the central section of the living sphere, the
lights were also dim and in a few places they were completely out. They
emerged and closed the hatch behind them. Only after Haines had tested the
inner atmosphere and found it still pressurized, did they open their helmets
and climb stiffly out of the space suits, wincing at bruises they had
sustained but had not noticed until then.
The air pressure was all right, but there was a smell of burned rubber and
insulation in the air. Now that their helmets were off, they could hear voices
somewhere above. They found Oberfield lying unconscious, thrown to the
floor by the sudden shift of the ship. They climbed into the control room.
Lockhart was floating in the air near the open hatchway leading to the
engine room overhead. He was calling out orders to someone who was
within.
Russ was working over the navigation desk, a bandage around his head,
trying to figure out where they would be and where they were heading,
without having access to the still dark viewplates.
Lockhart twisted in the weightless air when he saw them. He seemed both
relieved and distressed. "I'm glad you're okay, but I had hoped you'd be able
to put in a blow for us."
Burl realized that inside the ship they had no way of knowing that
vengeance had been served. Hastily, he explained. His words cheered
farther and farther, until it seemed to touch the surface of the golden globe.
There was a great flare in the sky now, an outpouring of fire and hot metal.
When it cleared away, the sky was empty.
Haines wearily drew the outer port shut. "Now, let's see if we're goners,
too," he said quietly. They sealed the outer shell and made their way along
the dark passage.
Even as they were unlocking the toggles of the inner hatch, the corridor
lights started to flicker. They would light up dimly, and then flicker out,
light up again, flare for an instant, then die down. Someone was alive
within the ship.
They got the hatch open. In the central section of the living sphere, the
lights were also dim and in a few places they were completely out. They
emerged and closed the hatch behind them. Only after Haines had tested the
inner atmosphere and found it still pressurized, did they open their helmets
and climb stiffly out of the space suits, wincing at bruises they had
sustained but had not noticed until then.
The air pressure was all right, but there was a smell of burned rubber and
insulation in the air. Now that their helmets were off, they could hear voices
somewhere above. They found Oberfield lying unconscious, thrown to the
floor by the sudden shift of the ship. They climbed into the control room.
Lockhart was floating in the air near the open hatchway leading to the
engine room overhead. He was calling out orders to someone who was
within.
Russ was working over the navigation desk, a bandage around his head,
trying to figure out where they would be and where they were heading,
without having access to the still dark viewplates.
Lockhart twisted in the weightless air when he saw them. He seemed both
relieved and distressed. "I'm glad you're okay, but I had hoped you'd be able
to put in a blow for us."
Burl realized that inside the ship they had no way of knowing that
vengeance had been served. Hastily, he explained. His words cheered
Page 120
everyone. Russ and Lockhart shouted joyously. Detmar poked his head
down the hatch and called the news back to his two fellows who were
struggling to get the A-G generators functioning.
The bolt of energy, whatever it may have been designed to do to a ship of
the Sun-tapper build, did not have the totally disastrous effect on the
Magellan that it was intended to have. It had knocked out their electrical
system temporarily, burned out some of its parts and caused the A-G system
to fail, although the atomic piles were impervious to such currents.
Oberfield, Ferrati and Shea were badly hurt.
There now followed an anxious period during which more and more of the
electrical system began to function as the men labored to rig up emergency
wires, and to replace burned out bulbs and lines. There was a general cheer
when the viewplates flickered into life again, though not all functioned.
They again had access to the sky about them—even though not all sectors
were covered.
The humming in the engine room started up, rose and fell uneasily a couple
of times, and then they felt a surge of force. Lockhart fell gently to the floor
as the ship began to drive ahead, and then in a few minutes the A-G drive
was back on, and the Magellan was again under control.
"We took what they had to give, and it wasn't enough," exulted Haines.
"Now wait till we reach their main works. We'll show them!"
Lockhart shook his head wearily as he and Russ worked over the controls.
"Let's hope we don't have to show them soon. Our ship is running on
emergency rigging. Caton says he's going to have to rest the ship and rewire
a good part of the system. Meanwhile, we will be able to reach Pluto safely
enough."
Pluto was visible in the forward viewplates. They could see lighter and
darker patches on it, almost like the markings of continents and oceans, but
there was no evidence of an atmosphere, nor had they expected any.
Readings showed that the average surface temperature was about 200°
Fahrenheit below zero, even lower in many places. They searched the
surface for signs of their foe.
down the hatch and called the news back to his two fellows who were
struggling to get the A-G generators functioning.
The bolt of energy, whatever it may have been designed to do to a ship of
the Sun-tapper build, did not have the totally disastrous effect on the
Magellan that it was intended to have. It had knocked out their electrical
system temporarily, burned out some of its parts and caused the A-G system
to fail, although the atomic piles were impervious to such currents.
Oberfield, Ferrati and Shea were badly hurt.
There now followed an anxious period during which more and more of the
electrical system began to function as the men labored to rig up emergency
wires, and to replace burned out bulbs and lines. There was a general cheer
when the viewplates flickered into life again, though not all functioned.
They again had access to the sky about them—even though not all sectors
were covered.
The humming in the engine room started up, rose and fell uneasily a couple
of times, and then they felt a surge of force. Lockhart fell gently to the floor
as the ship began to drive ahead, and then in a few minutes the A-G drive
was back on, and the Magellan was again under control.
"We took what they had to give, and it wasn't enough," exulted Haines.
"Now wait till we reach their main works. We'll show them!"
Lockhart shook his head wearily as he and Russ worked over the controls.
"Let's hope we don't have to show them soon. Our ship is running on
emergency rigging. Caton says he's going to have to rest the ship and rewire
a good part of the system. Meanwhile, we will be able to reach Pluto safely
enough."
Pluto was visible in the forward viewplates. They could see lighter and
darker patches on it, almost like the markings of continents and oceans, but
there was no evidence of an atmosphere, nor had they expected any.
Readings showed that the average surface temperature was about 200°
Fahrenheit below zero, even lower in many places. They searched the
surface for signs of their foe.
Page 121
They found what they wanted on the north polar depression, a basin in the
oblate sphere of Pluto. There was no ringed station. There rose a vast pile of
dark masonry—a mighty structure covering at least a square mile, a fortress
building whose roofs bristled with an array of masts and reflectors. And
hanging on patrol over this polar basin were two more of the dumbbell
ships.
"We're in no position to come to grips with them," said Lockhart. "I'm going
to take the Magellan into a low orbit around Pluto's equator. We'll be out of
their sight, yet near enough to do some probing and exploring while we're
making repairs."
This they proceeded to do, swinging the ship down to within a few hundred
miles of the Plutonian surface, setting on a fixed orbit around the equator,
exactly as the sputniks of years past had first circled the bulk of the Earth.
Staying far enough up to maintain orbit, they were close enough to be
below the planet's radiation belt.
Taking stock of the ship's condition showed that they dearly needed this
delay. Repairs would not be completed for several days. Practically
everyone had been bruised or shaken up; Oberfield had a fractured skull
and was in serious condition; Ferrati had broken his leg and pelvis; Shea
had a couple of cracked ribs. The men were given emergency medical
treatment and confined to quarters.
The Magellan quietly circled Pluto once every hour and a half and the ship
tried to resume its normal life. Russ studied the surface beneath them,
Haines and Burl at his elbow. Then, after conferring, the three approached
Lockhart.
"We want permission to make a landing," Russ said. "If we take the four-
man rocket plane we can make the ground safely. We've got to reconnoiter
before we can figure out how to put this master Sun-tap station out of
business."
Lockhart agreed. "I was planning as much. Now that we're here, we can't
delay just because we're injured. Go ahead."
The three got ready quickly. They donned their space suits, loaded the
larger rocket plane with equipment, arms, and plenty of extra fuel. Just
oblate sphere of Pluto. There was no ringed station. There rose a vast pile of
dark masonry—a mighty structure covering at least a square mile, a fortress
building whose roofs bristled with an array of masts and reflectors. And
hanging on patrol over this polar basin were two more of the dumbbell
ships.
"We're in no position to come to grips with them," said Lockhart. "I'm going
to take the Magellan into a low orbit around Pluto's equator. We'll be out of
their sight, yet near enough to do some probing and exploring while we're
making repairs."
This they proceeded to do, swinging the ship down to within a few hundred
miles of the Plutonian surface, setting on a fixed orbit around the equator,
exactly as the sputniks of years past had first circled the bulk of the Earth.
Staying far enough up to maintain orbit, they were close enough to be
below the planet's radiation belt.
Taking stock of the ship's condition showed that they dearly needed this
delay. Repairs would not be completed for several days. Practically
everyone had been bruised or shaken up; Oberfield had a fractured skull
and was in serious condition; Ferrati had broken his leg and pelvis; Shea
had a couple of cracked ribs. The men were given emergency medical
treatment and confined to quarters.
The Magellan quietly circled Pluto once every hour and a half and the ship
tried to resume its normal life. Russ studied the surface beneath them,
Haines and Burl at his elbow. Then, after conferring, the three approached
Lockhart.
"We want permission to make a landing," Russ said. "If we take the four-
man rocket plane we can make the ground safely. We've got to reconnoiter
before we can figure out how to put this master Sun-tap station out of
business."
Lockhart agreed. "I was planning as much. Now that we're here, we can't
delay just because we're injured. Go ahead."
The three got ready quickly. They donned their space suits, loaded the
larger rocket plane with equipment, arms, and plenty of extra fuel. Just
Page 122
before they left, Lockhart gave them a word of caution. "Do not attempt to
communicate with the Magellan by radio. If Pluto is the Sun-tappers' home
world, you may find yourselves surrounded by enemies, and overheard.
Don't reveal our existence or position. If you have to talk to us, do not
expect a reply unless it's an absolute emergency."
Burl strapped himself into his seat within the rocket plane and glanced
through the thick window. Below them was a world the size of Earth—a
world which, if it had air and warmth, could most nearly be Earth's twin of
all the planets in the system. This rocket plane had touched on the hot
surface of Mercury, the first planet, In a little while it would set down on
the frigid surface of the last planet. They had come a long way.
communicate with the Magellan by radio. If Pluto is the Sun-tappers' home
world, you may find yourselves surrounded by enemies, and overheard.
Don't reveal our existence or position. If you have to talk to us, do not
expect a reply unless it's an absolute emergency."
Burl strapped himself into his seat within the rocket plane and glanced
through the thick window. Below them was a world the size of Earth—a
world which, if it had air and warmth, could most nearly be Earth's twin of
all the planets in the system. This rocket plane had touched on the hot
surface of Mercury, the first planet, In a little while it would set down on
the frigid surface of the last planet. They had come a long way.
Page 123
Chapter 17.
Stronghold of the Lost Planet
With a jolt that shoved the three men back in their seats, the rocket plane
pushed out the cargo hatch, and slid into the dark of space on its own
power. Behind them, the metallic surface of the Magellan gleamed briefly,
and then swung away on its orbit. Riding the red fire of their rockets, they
headed on a long low dive for the mysterious surface below.
Pluto was a vast hemisphere, half lighted in the faint, dim glow of the tiny
Sun, half in the total darkness of outer space. Here and there wound a silent,
frozen river of glistening white. They passed over a gulf of some frigid sea
of liquid gases, from which islands of subzero rock projected, and moved
inland over a continent of lifeless grays and blacks. Haines gently drew the
ship lower and lower, and at last the rocket plane bumped to the ground.
It rolled a few yards and stopped. The three men crowded to the door,
tightened their face plates, and forced open the exit. There was a rush of air
as the ship exhausted its atmosphere. Then, one by one, they stepped onto
the bleak surface of the Sun's farthest planet.
"I feel peculiar," whispered Burl. "This planet reminds me of something."
"I have the feeling I've been here before," Russ said slowly.
Burl felt an odd chill. "Yes, that's it!"
Haines grumbled. "I know what you mean. I can make a guess. We've never
really been the right weight since we left Earth. Even under acceleration
there were differences one way or the other. But I feel now exactly as I did
on Earth. That's what gives you the odd sensation of return."
The two younger men realized Haines was right. For the first time since
they had left their home world, they were on a planet whose gravity was
normal to them. It felt good and yet it felt—in these fearful surroundings—
disconcerting.
Stronghold of the Lost Planet
With a jolt that shoved the three men back in their seats, the rocket plane
pushed out the cargo hatch, and slid into the dark of space on its own
power. Behind them, the metallic surface of the Magellan gleamed briefly,
and then swung away on its orbit. Riding the red fire of their rockets, they
headed on a long low dive for the mysterious surface below.
Pluto was a vast hemisphere, half lighted in the faint, dim glow of the tiny
Sun, half in the total darkness of outer space. Here and there wound a silent,
frozen river of glistening white. They passed over a gulf of some frigid sea
of liquid gases, from which islands of subzero rock projected, and moved
inland over a continent of lifeless grays and blacks. Haines gently drew the
ship lower and lower, and at last the rocket plane bumped to the ground.
It rolled a few yards and stopped. The three men crowded to the door,
tightened their face plates, and forced open the exit. There was a rush of air
as the ship exhausted its atmosphere. Then, one by one, they stepped onto
the bleak surface of the Sun's farthest planet.
"I feel peculiar," whispered Burl. "This planet reminds me of something."
"I have the feeling I've been here before," Russ said slowly.
Burl felt an odd chill. "Yes, that's it!"
Haines grumbled. "I know what you mean. I can make a guess. We've never
really been the right weight since we left Earth. Even under acceleration
there were differences one way or the other. But I feel now exactly as I did
on Earth. That's what gives you the odd sensation of return."
The two younger men realized Haines was right. For the first time since
they had left their home world, they were on a planet whose gravity was
normal to them. It felt good and yet it felt—in these fearful surroundings—
disconcerting.
Page 124
Above them was the familiar black, unyielding sky of outer space. No
breath of air moved. Yet somehow the scene resembled Earth. "It's like a
black-and-white photo of a Terrestrial landscape," said Burl.
There was a field, some hills, a tiny frozen creek and the dark shapes of
rounded mountains in the distance. All without color except for the cold,
faint glow of the star that was the Sun.
A thin layer of cosmic dust lay over the surface, such as would be found on
any airless world. Russ scooped beneath it and came up with a hard chip.
He squeezed it between his gauntleted fingers. It cracked and broke into
powder. He whistled softly. "You know what this feels and looks like?" he
said as they came close to the frozen creek on the little hillside. "It feels like
dirt—common, Earthly dirt. Like soil. And you know what ... I can already
tell you one of Pluto's secrets."
They stopped at the creek. It was a layer of frozen crystalline gases. Haines
pushed the alpenstock he was carrying into it and scraped away the gas
crystals. "I think I can guess," he said, "and I'll bet there is ice under this
gas."
"Pluto was once a warm world with a thick atmosphere," said Russ. "Notice
the rounded hills and the worn away peaks of the mountains. Those are old
mountains—weather-beaten. This hill is round—weather-beaten. This
creek, those rivers of frozen gas—they follow beds that could only be made
by real rivers of warm water. The soil that lies beneath this dust—it could
only happen on a world that knew night and day, warmth and light, and rain
and wind. Pluto was once a living world, a place we'd have called
homelike."
Burl shivered a bit. "Out here? So far from the Sun? How and when?"
Russ shrugged. "We'll find that out. But the evidence is unmistakable."
They walked on.
There was a low, cracked wall on the other side of the hill, and beyond the
wall stood the roofless ruins of a stone house, silent and gray in the airless
scene.
breath of air moved. Yet somehow the scene resembled Earth. "It's like a
black-and-white photo of a Terrestrial landscape," said Burl.
There was a field, some hills, a tiny frozen creek and the dark shapes of
rounded mountains in the distance. All without color except for the cold,
faint glow of the star that was the Sun.
A thin layer of cosmic dust lay over the surface, such as would be found on
any airless world. Russ scooped beneath it and came up with a hard chip.
He squeezed it between his gauntleted fingers. It cracked and broke into
powder. He whistled softly. "You know what this feels and looks like?" he
said as they came close to the frozen creek on the little hillside. "It feels like
dirt—common, Earthly dirt. Like soil. And you know what ... I can already
tell you one of Pluto's secrets."
They stopped at the creek. It was a layer of frozen crystalline gases. Haines
pushed the alpenstock he was carrying into it and scraped away the gas
crystals. "I think I can guess," he said, "and I'll bet there is ice under this
gas."
"Pluto was once a warm world with a thick atmosphere," said Russ. "Notice
the rounded hills and the worn away peaks of the mountains. Those are old
mountains—weather-beaten. This hill is round—weather-beaten. This
creek, those rivers of frozen gas—they follow beds that could only be made
by real rivers of warm water. The soil that lies beneath this dust—it could
only happen on a world that knew night and day, warmth and light, and rain
and wind. Pluto was once a living world, a place we'd have called
homelike."
Burl shivered a bit. "Out here? So far from the Sun? How and when?"
Russ shrugged. "We'll find that out. But the evidence is unmistakable."
They walked on.
There was a low, cracked wall on the other side of the hill, and beyond the
wall stood the roofless ruins of a stone house, silent and gray in the airless
scene.
Page 125
They waited with surprise and uncertainty. Haines drew his compressed air
pistol, but there was no movement. The scene remained dead and still—the
windows of the house were dark.
They advanced on it and flashed a light inside. It was an empty shell. There
was no glass within the unusually wide and low window openings, and no
door.
"They went in and out the windows," commented Burl, ducking through
one of the openings. "And they weren't built like us."
"No," said Russ, "there's no reason to suppose the inhabitants would have
been built like human beings."
Inside there was nothing to see, and they left. Beyond, they found a straight
depression in the ground filled with flat swirls of cosmic dust. "This looks
like a road," said Haines.
They returned to the rocket plane in order to follow the dead roadway more
easily. Passing between the low, dark cliffs of rocky mountains, they came
to a plain marked by thousands of columns of rock, pieces of crumbling
walls, and many straight depressions that must have been streets. It was the
remains of a world that had died.
They found, as they traveled northward and made intermittent landings, that
there had been many cities. Now all lay in ruins. There had been great
roadways, now covered with the debris of outer space. There had been
mighty forests, now miles of petrified black stumps. It was a gloomy sight.
In their landings, they had found inscriptions on walls and bas-reliefs
carved on mountains. They knew from these what the Plutonians had
looked like, and they had a suspicion of what had happened.
The Plutonians had been vaguely like men and vaguely like spiders. They
had stood upright on four thin, wide-spread legs and had two short arms.
Their bodies were wide and squat, and they seemed to have been
mammalian and probably warm-blooded. They breathed air out of flat, thin
nostrils and their heads joined their bodies without necks. Two oval eyes
were set below a jutting bald brow. They had worn clothes, they had driven
vehicles, they had flown planes.
pistol, but there was no movement. The scene remained dead and still—the
windows of the house were dark.
They advanced on it and flashed a light inside. It was an empty shell. There
was no glass within the unusually wide and low window openings, and no
door.
"They went in and out the windows," commented Burl, ducking through
one of the openings. "And they weren't built like us."
"No," said Russ, "there's no reason to suppose the inhabitants would have
been built like human beings."
Inside there was nothing to see, and they left. Beyond, they found a straight
depression in the ground filled with flat swirls of cosmic dust. "This looks
like a road," said Haines.
They returned to the rocket plane in order to follow the dead roadway more
easily. Passing between the low, dark cliffs of rocky mountains, they came
to a plain marked by thousands of columns of rock, pieces of crumbling
walls, and many straight depressions that must have been streets. It was the
remains of a world that had died.
They found, as they traveled northward and made intermittent landings, that
there had been many cities. Now all lay in ruins. There had been great
roadways, now covered with the debris of outer space. There had been
mighty forests, now miles of petrified black stumps. It was a gloomy sight.
In their landings, they had found inscriptions on walls and bas-reliefs
carved on mountains. They knew from these what the Plutonians had
looked like, and they had a suspicion of what had happened.
The Plutonians had been vaguely like men and vaguely like spiders. They
had stood upright on four thin, wide-spread legs and had two short arms.
Their bodies were wide and squat, and they seemed to have been
mammalian and probably warm-blooded. They breathed air out of flat, thin
nostrils and their heads joined their bodies without necks. Two oval eyes
were set below a jutting bald brow. They had worn clothes, they had driven
vehicles, they had flown planes.
Page 126
Their vehicles had globe-shaped power plants. Their airplanes had globes
where wings should have been. Their cities and their engines—which
existed now only on wall pictures that were probably once advertisements
—were built along globe-and-rod principles.
"There's no doubt," said Russ, "that the Sun-tapper culture and the
Plutonian culture are the same. It's the descendants of the Plutonians that we
are fighting."
"But how could they have survived?" Burl asked. "This world was never
part of the solar system when it was warm."
"We'll soon know," said Russ. "Tomorrow we're going to see how far we
can get into their polar redoubt. Somehow we've got to blow up that last
station."
"And I think we three are going to do it," said Haines. "The Magellan will
never take the place from the sky. We'll have to do it from the ground."
Now they were reminded of Earth again. For the first time since they had
departed from the United States, night fell. They had not been on any other
planet long enough for such an experience. But the effect here on Pluto was
mild.
Day was like a bright, moonlight night. Night then meant that the dim Sun
had set and, in effect, it merely made the landscape slightly darker.
They compared notes late into the night in the rocket plane. By dawn, when
again the dim glow shone, they had come to some very definite conclusions
about the planet.
A number of the drawings on the walls seemed to have some religious
significance. They focused on the phases of a moon. There were symbolic
representations of this moon, passing through its phases; presumably
Plutonian religious and social practices were related to it.
"But where is this moon?" Burl had asked.
"I think," Russ answered, "that what some astronomers had suspected about
Pluto was right. It did not originate in the solar system, but was captured
from outer space. Originally it revolved around another sun, some star
where wings should have been. Their cities and their engines—which
existed now only on wall pictures that were probably once advertisements
—were built along globe-and-rod principles.
"There's no doubt," said Russ, "that the Sun-tapper culture and the
Plutonian culture are the same. It's the descendants of the Plutonians that we
are fighting."
"But how could they have survived?" Burl asked. "This world was never
part of the solar system when it was warm."
"We'll soon know," said Russ. "Tomorrow we're going to see how far we
can get into their polar redoubt. Somehow we've got to blow up that last
station."
"And I think we three are going to do it," said Haines. "The Magellan will
never take the place from the sky. We'll have to do it from the ground."
Now they were reminded of Earth again. For the first time since they had
departed from the United States, night fell. They had not been on any other
planet long enough for such an experience. But the effect here on Pluto was
mild.
Day was like a bright, moonlight night. Night then meant that the dim Sun
had set and, in effect, it merely made the landscape slightly darker.
They compared notes late into the night in the rocket plane. By dawn, when
again the dim glow shone, they had come to some very definite conclusions
about the planet.
A number of the drawings on the walls seemed to have some religious
significance. They focused on the phases of a moon. There were symbolic
representations of this moon, passing through its phases; presumably
Plutonian religious and social practices were related to it.
"But where is this moon?" Burl had asked.
"I think," Russ answered, "that what some astronomers had suspected about
Pluto was right. It did not originate in the solar system, but was captured
from outer space. Originally it revolved around another sun, some star
Page 127
which was light-years away. How it tore loose from that star we'll probably
never know—the star might have simply become too dim, their planet
might have been on a shaky orbit, an experiment of theirs might have jarred
it loose, many things could have happened.
"Once beyond the gravitational grip of its parent sun, the planet wandered
through the darkness of interstellar space until it came within the influence
of our own Sun. How long this took would again be a guess. Possibly not
more than a few thousand years, I'd say, since somehow a remnant of the
population managed to survive. This suggests that they had some warning.
Enough time passed for them to build the big structure we noticed at the
north pole, probably to store food, build underground greenhouses and
make sealed homes for a few families. Inside this giant building the last of
the Plutonian people kept going.
"Then came the moment when their planet fell into an orbit around our Sun.
I'd guess they emerged to find that the new Sun was too far away ever to
heat up Pluto again, or to permit the rebuilding of an atmosphere. So they
worked out a new scheme. This was to blow up the Sun into a nova—make
it a giant and thereby bring its heat all the way out to Pluto—warming this
world again, lighting it again, unfreezing its gases and waters. So they set
up the Sun-tap stations."
"That also accounts," added Haines, "for their limited number of spaceships
and their need for secret operations."
"Yes," said Burl, "but there are two things that don't fit in. What happened
to their moon—surely it would have gone along with Pluto since it revolved
around it? And second, why the thirty-year delay between the first Sun-tap
stations and the completion and operation of them?"
There was no answer to these questions yet. The three began the morning's
expedition.
As they neared the pole, they stayed close to the surface, for, any moment,
they expected to see the dumbbell ships that patrolled the sky above it.
At last they set down the rocket plane on the edge of the polar plateau and
got out. Not more than a mile away, the black ramparts of the building—a
wall running miles across the horizon—rose hundreds of feet into the sky.
never know—the star might have simply become too dim, their planet
might have been on a shaky orbit, an experiment of theirs might have jarred
it loose, many things could have happened.
"Once beyond the gravitational grip of its parent sun, the planet wandered
through the darkness of interstellar space until it came within the influence
of our own Sun. How long this took would again be a guess. Possibly not
more than a few thousand years, I'd say, since somehow a remnant of the
population managed to survive. This suggests that they had some warning.
Enough time passed for them to build the big structure we noticed at the
north pole, probably to store food, build underground greenhouses and
make sealed homes for a few families. Inside this giant building the last of
the Plutonian people kept going.
"Then came the moment when their planet fell into an orbit around our Sun.
I'd guess they emerged to find that the new Sun was too far away ever to
heat up Pluto again, or to permit the rebuilding of an atmosphere. So they
worked out a new scheme. This was to blow up the Sun into a nova—make
it a giant and thereby bring its heat all the way out to Pluto—warming this
world again, lighting it again, unfreezing its gases and waters. So they set
up the Sun-tap stations."
"That also accounts," added Haines, "for their limited number of spaceships
and their need for secret operations."
"Yes," said Burl, "but there are two things that don't fit in. What happened
to their moon—surely it would have gone along with Pluto since it revolved
around it? And second, why the thirty-year delay between the first Sun-tap
stations and the completion and operation of them?"
There was no answer to these questions yet. The three began the morning's
expedition.
As they neared the pole, they stayed close to the surface, for, any moment,
they expected to see the dumbbell ships that patrolled the sky above it.
At last they set down the rocket plane on the edge of the polar plateau and
got out. Not more than a mile away, the black ramparts of the building—a
wall running miles across the horizon—rose hundreds of feet into the sky.
Page 128
Above it, they caught a flicker from the forest of masts and the glint from a
dumbbell ship. They moved silently forward, carrying the rocket launcher
on their backs and a small load of shells and several hand bombs. These
made heavy baggage, but the distance was not far, and the purpose great.
Burl felt like an ant about to creep into a human house. But he reflected that
no ant ever had such dangerous intentions. An ant enters a house to steal a
crumb of food. But if an ant had intelligence and evil intentions, it could
cripple such a house.
Such was the situation for the three of them as they neared the precipitous
walls. On arrival, they found that entry would be easier than they expected.
The Plutonian refuge had not been built to offset attack from the surface of
the planet itself. It was no thick rampart of unbroken plastic as the walls of
the other Sun-tap stations had been. Close up, it proved to have many
doorless entryways, ramps running up to higher floors, even wiry monorail
scaffolding, probably left behind by the builders.
They entered an opening in the base. Once inside, dim lights set in the
ceiling lighted the path before them. They walked down this culvert like
rats in a giant sewer until they came to a wall studded with several doors.
The doors were shut, but a tiny globe set on the surface of each one reacted
to Burl's charged touch. Two opened upon dark airless passages. The third
resisted a moment, and when it did open, there was a whoosh of air which
raised a momentary cloud of dust on the stone floor of the culvert. This was
obviously the entrance to the inhabited portion of the refuge.
The men closed the door behind them. They were in a small chamber. A
door on the other side was opening automatically. "An air lock system,"
muttered Russ as they went through.
They were now inside the vast building itself. There was air, and, after
testing it, they opened their helmets. The air was almost as thick as that of
Earth, and they experienced no difficulty in breathing. It was stale and
somewhat metallic in flavor, probably because it had been enclosed and
used over and over for thousands of years.
dumbbell ship. They moved silently forward, carrying the rocket launcher
on their backs and a small load of shells and several hand bombs. These
made heavy baggage, but the distance was not far, and the purpose great.
Burl felt like an ant about to creep into a human house. But he reflected that
no ant ever had such dangerous intentions. An ant enters a house to steal a
crumb of food. But if an ant had intelligence and evil intentions, it could
cripple such a house.
Such was the situation for the three of them as they neared the precipitous
walls. On arrival, they found that entry would be easier than they expected.
The Plutonian refuge had not been built to offset attack from the surface of
the planet itself. It was no thick rampart of unbroken plastic as the walls of
the other Sun-tap stations had been. Close up, it proved to have many
doorless entryways, ramps running up to higher floors, even wiry monorail
scaffolding, probably left behind by the builders.
They entered an opening in the base. Once inside, dim lights set in the
ceiling lighted the path before them. They walked down this culvert like
rats in a giant sewer until they came to a wall studded with several doors.
The doors were shut, but a tiny globe set on the surface of each one reacted
to Burl's charged touch. Two opened upon dark airless passages. The third
resisted a moment, and when it did open, there was a whoosh of air which
raised a momentary cloud of dust on the stone floor of the culvert. This was
obviously the entrance to the inhabited portion of the refuge.
The men closed the door behind them. They were in a small chamber. A
door on the other side was opening automatically. "An air lock system,"
muttered Russ as they went through.
They were now inside the vast building itself. There was air, and, after
testing it, they opened their helmets. The air was almost as thick as that of
Earth, and they experienced no difficulty in breathing. It was stale and
somewhat metallic in flavor, probably because it had been enclosed and
used over and over for thousands of years.
Page 129
They saw no living beings, which seemed strange. "Apparently these people
really are at their last gasp," remarked Russ as they passed through an area
that had obviously once been a large dormitory. They heard distant
humming sounds somewhere in the floors above, but all that was visible on
the lower level seemed to be maintenance machinery.
They walked through great storerooms which were piled high with sealed
drums. They saw factories lying silent—curious lofts of odd machines
powered by globes that were idle. They skirted an unlighted reservoir of
water in a circular chamber far in the interior. And here and there in the
gloom, they spotted huge ramps leading spirally upward.
Finally they turned their steps up a sloping ramp, mounting one floor and
then another, and another. They were tired, but curiously exhilarated. They
felt that they were about to strike at the heart of the foe, and that his days
were numbered at last.
They emerged on a higher level, lighted more brightly than the others. Here
they saw globes that glowed with the same intensity as those in the Sun-tap
stations had. They moved carefully now, keeping out of sight, and several
times they saw shadows in the distance or heard the thump of something
moving.
They worked their way by instinct to what they guessed was the center of
operations. They peered, at last, through a low, wide doorway into a large
chamber. Here was a mass of mighty globes and rods, some revolving as
they circled the metal masts that came through the room from the ceiling
above.
"It must be the base of the Sun-tap receiver line," whispered Haines. "This
should be a good enough place to set up our time bomb."
They stole over to a cluster of globes and unpacked the powerful little
atomic bomb they had carried with them. They carefully put it together,
inserted the explosive fuse, and set the timer. "I'm giving it four hours," said
Haines. "Time for us to get out of here and radio the Magellan to get into
action. That should take care of this station."
They moved carefully out again, scarcely breathing for fear of some
Plutonian entering and discovering them. They made their exit safely
really are at their last gasp," remarked Russ as they passed through an area
that had obviously once been a large dormitory. They heard distant
humming sounds somewhere in the floors above, but all that was visible on
the lower level seemed to be maintenance machinery.
They walked through great storerooms which were piled high with sealed
drums. They saw factories lying silent—curious lofts of odd machines
powered by globes that were idle. They skirted an unlighted reservoir of
water in a circular chamber far in the interior. And here and there in the
gloom, they spotted huge ramps leading spirally upward.
Finally they turned their steps up a sloping ramp, mounting one floor and
then another, and another. They were tired, but curiously exhilarated. They
felt that they were about to strike at the heart of the foe, and that his days
were numbered at last.
They emerged on a higher level, lighted more brightly than the others. Here
they saw globes that glowed with the same intensity as those in the Sun-tap
stations had. They moved carefully now, keeping out of sight, and several
times they saw shadows in the distance or heard the thump of something
moving.
They worked their way by instinct to what they guessed was the center of
operations. They peered, at last, through a low, wide doorway into a large
chamber. Here was a mass of mighty globes and rods, some revolving as
they circled the metal masts that came through the room from the ceiling
above.
"It must be the base of the Sun-tap receiver line," whispered Haines. "This
should be a good enough place to set up our time bomb."
They stole over to a cluster of globes and unpacked the powerful little
atomic bomb they had carried with them. They carefully put it together,
inserted the explosive fuse, and set the timer. "I'm giving it four hours," said
Haines. "Time for us to get out of here and radio the Magellan to get into
action. That should take care of this station."
They moved carefully out again, scarcely breathing for fear of some
Plutonian entering and discovering them. They made their exit safely
Page 130
enough and started to retrace their steps.
Back down through corridors and strange chambers they moved, stopping
every little while as something that sounded like footsteps passed over
them. "Where," Burl whispered, suddenly troubled, "is the stolen heat and
power of the Sun going? It isn't heating up Pluto. Surely they can't simply
store it."
"Something we haven't solved," Russ replied hurriedly. "From what I
remember of the masts, it looked as if they were relaying it somewhere else
again."
"Can't imagine where," said Haines. "Not back into space, surely?"
They fell silent, concentrating all their energies on not losing the way. "Are
you sure we came through here?" Burl asked nervously. "I don't remember
this at all."
"I don't, either," said Russ. "It looks queer. Are you sure we're on the right
path?" He turned to Haines.
The explorer shook his head. "We must have made a wrong turn. I think
we've lost our direction."
They hastily conferred, and decided the best thing to do was to make their
way to the lowest level and then outward—but suddenly they realized they
could not tell which way was outward. There were no windows, and the
wall markings and direction signs were unintelligible.
To make matters worse, they heard new noises, and, just as they dodged
into a corner, five Plutonians shambled through.
These creatures were as the ancient wall sculptures had depicted them,
though a bit smaller than their ancestors. They were pale, almost white in
skin color, and their eyes were tiny sparks of red. They wore light harnesses
around their bodies, and two of them were carrying tools. They spoke
together in clacking bass voices. They shuffled loosely over the ground on
their four thin legs. Burl thought of them as ugly caricatures of semi-
humans.
Back down through corridors and strange chambers they moved, stopping
every little while as something that sounded like footsteps passed over
them. "Where," Burl whispered, suddenly troubled, "is the stolen heat and
power of the Sun going? It isn't heating up Pluto. Surely they can't simply
store it."
"Something we haven't solved," Russ replied hurriedly. "From what I
remember of the masts, it looked as if they were relaying it somewhere else
again."
"Can't imagine where," said Haines. "Not back into space, surely?"
They fell silent, concentrating all their energies on not losing the way. "Are
you sure we came through here?" Burl asked nervously. "I don't remember
this at all."
"I don't, either," said Russ. "It looks queer. Are you sure we're on the right
path?" He turned to Haines.
The explorer shook his head. "We must have made a wrong turn. I think
we've lost our direction."
They hastily conferred, and decided the best thing to do was to make their
way to the lowest level and then outward—but suddenly they realized they
could not tell which way was outward. There were no windows, and the
wall markings and direction signs were unintelligible.
To make matters worse, they heard new noises, and, just as they dodged
into a corner, five Plutonians shambled through.
These creatures were as the ancient wall sculptures had depicted them,
though a bit smaller than their ancestors. They were pale, almost white in
skin color, and their eyes were tiny sparks of red. They wore light harnesses
around their bodies, and two of them were carrying tools. They spoke
together in clacking bass voices. They shuffled loosely over the ground on
their four thin legs. Burl thought of them as ugly caricatures of semi-
humans.
Page 131
When the creatures had passed, the three explorers darted out to where a
ramp spiraled to the lower levels. They started down in single file, but it
was too late.
Staring directly at them were two Plutonians who had come up from below.
The men pushed past, but not before a barking voice had cracked out an
order.
The Earthmen started to run down, followed by the scrabbling sounds of
their pursuers. The barking calls increased in volume.
From somewhere a booming sound began, repeated over and over. As the
men emerged on the floor below, they heard it repeated on every level. "The
alarm's out for us," called Haines, making no effort to keep his voice down.
"We've got to run for it!"
Laden with the remaining weapons and equipment, the three human beings
hurried on, but it soon became clear that four legs were better than two, for
the creatures were gaining on them.
They had forgotten they were lost. Now they sought only to get out of sight
and hide. They dropped their equipment as they ran, down halls, through
tunnels, skittering along sloping ramps, heading for what they hoped would
prove to be an exit.
Behind them an increasing crowd of Plutonians had collected, and several
times a spark of electronic power crackled and blazed against the wall over
their heads. The pursuers were armed.
Burl's lungs began to ache painfully. Close on the heels of his companions
he dashed into one room only to find a group of Plutonians coming at him
from the other side. His ears were deafened by the barking noises and alarm
boomings. He jumped to one side to avoid a Plutonian standing directly in
his path, and ran into a narrow tunnel. There was an excited barking as the
creatures followed him.
With a sinking heart, he realized that he was now alone. Haines and Russ
must have been cut off. He gasped for breath. Running in a tight space suit,
carrying his oxygen tanks, was hot and hard work. He did not dare drop the
tanks, for his only chance was to escape outside.
ramp spiraled to the lower levels. They started down in single file, but it
was too late.
Staring directly at them were two Plutonians who had come up from below.
The men pushed past, but not before a barking voice had cracked out an
order.
The Earthmen started to run down, followed by the scrabbling sounds of
their pursuers. The barking calls increased in volume.
From somewhere a booming sound began, repeated over and over. As the
men emerged on the floor below, they heard it repeated on every level. "The
alarm's out for us," called Haines, making no effort to keep his voice down.
"We've got to run for it!"
Laden with the remaining weapons and equipment, the three human beings
hurried on, but it soon became clear that four legs were better than two, for
the creatures were gaining on them.
They had forgotten they were lost. Now they sought only to get out of sight
and hide. They dropped their equipment as they ran, down halls, through
tunnels, skittering along sloping ramps, heading for what they hoped would
prove to be an exit.
Behind them an increasing crowd of Plutonians had collected, and several
times a spark of electronic power crackled and blazed against the wall over
their heads. The pursuers were armed.
Burl's lungs began to ache painfully. Close on the heels of his companions
he dashed into one room only to find a group of Plutonians coming at him
from the other side. His ears were deafened by the barking noises and alarm
boomings. He jumped to one side to avoid a Plutonian standing directly in
his path, and ran into a narrow tunnel. There was an excited barking as the
creatures followed him.
With a sinking heart, he realized that he was now alone. Haines and Russ
must have been cut off. He gasped for breath. Running in a tight space suit,
carrying his oxygen tanks, was hot and hard work. He did not dare drop the
tanks, for his only chance was to escape outside.
Page 132
He ran wildly on, hoping to reach an outer door. But he seemed now to be
in a maze, for nothing was familiar to him. He could no longer remember
how many times he had run into groups of Plutonians, nor could he guess
how many followed on his heels.
Then he stumbled into a small, round chamber out of which led three
tunnels. As he looked around quickly to select his next means of escape,
barking Plutonians erupted from each opening. Burl backed up against the
wall, knowing that this time he was trapped.
A blaze of sparks broke over his head as a blast banged across the room.
The red-eyed, scrabbling figures charged, their chinless mouths opening to
emit barking calls of bestial anger. One aimed a rodlike contrivance at him,
and there was another flare of light.
The room dissolved around him in a glare of brilliant green. As he slipped
helplessly to the floor, he lost consciousness.
in a maze, for nothing was familiar to him. He could no longer remember
how many times he had run into groups of Plutonians, nor could he guess
how many followed on his heels.
Then he stumbled into a small, round chamber out of which led three
tunnels. As he looked around quickly to select his next means of escape,
barking Plutonians erupted from each opening. Burl backed up against the
wall, knowing that this time he was trapped.
A blaze of sparks broke over his head as a blast banged across the room.
The red-eyed, scrabbling figures charged, their chinless mouths opening to
emit barking calls of bestial anger. One aimed a rodlike contrivance at him,
and there was another flare of light.
The room dissolved around him in a glare of brilliant green. As he slipped
helplessly to the floor, he lost consciousness.
Page 133
Chapter 18.
Sacrifice on the Sacred Moon
"Burl Denning! Can you hear me, Burl Denning?" A thin, tinny voice
somewhere was calling him. But the darkness was all around, and Burl felt
a great sleepiness and a desire only to sink deeper into the cottony nothing
in which he seemed to be cradled.
"Burl Denning! If you can hear me, speak up!" Again the faint, scratchy
voice nagged at Burl's mind. He really ought to answer. He tried to open his
mouth. Something hard and cold was pressing against his back. He tossed
and squirmed.
Once more the voice called, and this time he decided that he must be asleep.
He struggled to open his eyes, then finally blinked them wide in an effort to
adjust himself to his surroundings.
He was apparently out in the open, and it was night. The sky was dark, not
black, but almost so—a deep, blue-black. There was a pale blue saucer
hanging in the sky. It blotted out most of the view. Gradually, he became
aware of a shiny barrier between him and that sky—he was not out of
doors. Something like a glass dome seemed to be overhead.
Burl raised his head. There was no one in sight. He felt dizzy and confused.
He lifted a hand to his brow, and felt the cold glass of his space helmet. He
was still wearing his space suit then. The voice—it must be in his helmet
phone.
"Hello," he ventured weakly. "Who's calling?"
Quickly the faint voice replied, growing stronger. "Burl, are you all right?
Where are you?"
Burl looked around. He was sitting on the floor of an isolated enclosure
with a transparent dome. There were no walls, just the rounded dome like a
Sacrifice on the Sacred Moon
"Burl Denning! Can you hear me, Burl Denning?" A thin, tinny voice
somewhere was calling him. But the darkness was all around, and Burl felt
a great sleepiness and a desire only to sink deeper into the cottony nothing
in which he seemed to be cradled.
"Burl Denning! If you can hear me, speak up!" Again the faint, scratchy
voice nagged at Burl's mind. He really ought to answer. He tried to open his
mouth. Something hard and cold was pressing against his back. He tossed
and squirmed.
Once more the voice called, and this time he decided that he must be asleep.
He struggled to open his eyes, then finally blinked them wide in an effort to
adjust himself to his surroundings.
He was apparently out in the open, and it was night. The sky was dark, not
black, but almost so—a deep, blue-black. There was a pale blue saucer
hanging in the sky. It blotted out most of the view. Gradually, he became
aware of a shiny barrier between him and that sky—he was not out of
doors. Something like a glass dome seemed to be overhead.
Burl raised his head. There was no one in sight. He felt dizzy and confused.
He lifted a hand to his brow, and felt the cold glass of his space helmet. He
was still wearing his space suit then. The voice—it must be in his helmet
phone.
"Hello," he ventured weakly. "Who's calling?"
Quickly the faint voice replied, growing stronger. "Burl, are you all right?
Where are you?"
Burl looked around. He was sitting on the floor of an isolated enclosure
with a transparent dome. There were no walls, just the rounded dome like a
Page 134
fishbowl turned upside down on him. The flooring beneath his feet was
plastic.
"I'm all right, I think," said Burl. "Is that you, Russ? Sounds a little like you,
but you must be far away."
"Yes, it's me, Russell Clyde," confirmed the voice. "You're coming in weak,
too. Where are you?"
Burl described his surroundings. There was a silence for a moment, then
Russ's voice again. "I kind of suspected it, but what you say confirms it. We
must be on the only planet we haven't visited ... or rather, not on it, but near
it. I mean Neptune. I knew from the gravity I wasn't on Pluto any more.
Judging from our weight, and your description of the bluish planet in the
sky, we must be on Triton, Neptune's bigger moon."
Burl found that his dizziness was disappearing. "I feel light," he
commented, as he got to his feet. "Should Neptune look sort of like Uranus,
only more bluish in color?" he asked.
"That's it," said Russ. "Neptune is pretty much of a twin for Uranus, only
it's denser, a little bit smaller, and perhaps more substantial than the other
giant worlds in our system. It should have a second moon, smaller and way
out."
Burl walked around the little enclosed space. "I guess I'm a prisoner here,"
he said. "This dome is on the surface. Most of the area is just a sort of rocky
plain with patches of liquid gases, but there are a couple of big buildings
nearby. Funny sort of structures—they have fancy tops with symbols on
them that look like the phases of the moon."
"I think I'm inside one of those buildings," Russ guessed. "I'm in a big hall
with a lot of exhibits in glass cases. And they've got the strangest creatures
I've ever seen in them. There are lunar markings here, too—they remind me
of the ones we saw on Pluto. You know what I suspect?"
Burl paced around, regaining his senses as he walked. It was obvious that,
after he'd been knocked out by the Plutonians, he had been taken by them to
this moon of Neptune. For what purpose?
plastic.
"I'm all right, I think," said Burl. "Is that you, Russ? Sounds a little like you,
but you must be far away."
"Yes, it's me, Russell Clyde," confirmed the voice. "You're coming in weak,
too. Where are you?"
Burl described his surroundings. There was a silence for a moment, then
Russ's voice again. "I kind of suspected it, but what you say confirms it. We
must be on the only planet we haven't visited ... or rather, not on it, but near
it. I mean Neptune. I knew from the gravity I wasn't on Pluto any more.
Judging from our weight, and your description of the bluish planet in the
sky, we must be on Triton, Neptune's bigger moon."
Burl found that his dizziness was disappearing. "I feel light," he
commented, as he got to his feet. "Should Neptune look sort of like Uranus,
only more bluish in color?" he asked.
"That's it," said Russ. "Neptune is pretty much of a twin for Uranus, only
it's denser, a little bit smaller, and perhaps more substantial than the other
giant worlds in our system. It should have a second moon, smaller and way
out."
Burl walked around the little enclosed space. "I guess I'm a prisoner here,"
he said. "This dome is on the surface. Most of the area is just a sort of rocky
plain with patches of liquid gases, but there are a couple of big buildings
nearby. Funny sort of structures—they have fancy tops with symbols on
them that look like the phases of the moon."
"I think I'm inside one of those buildings," Russ guessed. "I'm in a big hall
with a lot of exhibits in glass cases. And they've got the strangest creatures
I've ever seen in them. There are lunar markings here, too—they remind me
of the ones we saw on Pluto. You know what I suspect?"
Burl paced around, regaining his senses as he walked. It was obvious that,
after he'd been knocked out by the Plutonians, he had been taken by them to
this moon of Neptune. For what purpose?
Page 135
Russ continued to murmur his thoughts, his voice ringing tinnily in Burl's
earphones. "I think that Triton was originally Pluto's moon. When Pluto
wandered into the solar system, it crossed Neptune's orbit and was held. Its
moon came closer to Neptune and was captured completely. But Pluto,
having a greater mass, didn't stick. It established an eccentric orbit of its
own which took it far out from Neptune for hundreds of years at a stretch
and brought it back only rarely. Pluto lost its moon. And that moon was the
spiritual home of the Sun-tappers' religion."
Burl glanced across the landscape. There were some funny things growing
nearby. They looked a little like thin, glassy trees with big, blue coconuts on
top.
"What happened to you and Haines after we got separated?" he asked, still
talking through his helmet phone.
"I don't know what happened to Haines," said Russ. "I hope he got away.
But they trapped me. I was taken aboard one of their dumbbell ships, and
brought here. The trip took days. I guess you were unconscious for all that
time. If it's any comfort to you, the Pluto building was destroyed. Our
atomic bomb went off. I saw the flare from a window in the ship. I think
this moon is the last stronghold of the Sun-tappers, and I think it is our final
objective."
The strange crystalline vegetation seemed to be moving closer to Burl. He
watched it carefully. It was moving! There were living beings out there!
They glided oddly over the ground, and he saw that their bases were a mass
of crystalline fringes, moving feelers which crawled over the surface
bearing the upper structures with them. They had thin, trunklike bodies with
two long, pencil-like branches that were used as arms. And the coconut
objects were heads!
They circled the dome now, and Burl could see that each round blue knob
had a central black spot that apparently served as an eye. There was no sign
of nostrils or mouth. Burl stared at the creatures in wonder.
The beings were clearly gesturing to him, trying to signal with their odd
arms. He waved back, wondering how he could establish communication.
As he did so, he described the creatures to Russ.
earphones. "I think that Triton was originally Pluto's moon. When Pluto
wandered into the solar system, it crossed Neptune's orbit and was held. Its
moon came closer to Neptune and was captured completely. But Pluto,
having a greater mass, didn't stick. It established an eccentric orbit of its
own which took it far out from Neptune for hundreds of years at a stretch
and brought it back only rarely. Pluto lost its moon. And that moon was the
spiritual home of the Sun-tappers' religion."
Burl glanced across the landscape. There were some funny things growing
nearby. They looked a little like thin, glassy trees with big, blue coconuts on
top.
"What happened to you and Haines after we got separated?" he asked, still
talking through his helmet phone.
"I don't know what happened to Haines," said Russ. "I hope he got away.
But they trapped me. I was taken aboard one of their dumbbell ships, and
brought here. The trip took days. I guess you were unconscious for all that
time. If it's any comfort to you, the Pluto building was destroyed. Our
atomic bomb went off. I saw the flare from a window in the ship. I think
this moon is the last stronghold of the Sun-tappers, and I think it is our final
objective."
The strange crystalline vegetation seemed to be moving closer to Burl. He
watched it carefully. It was moving! There were living beings out there!
They glided oddly over the ground, and he saw that their bases were a mass
of crystalline fringes, moving feelers which crawled over the surface
bearing the upper structures with them. They had thin, trunklike bodies with
two long, pencil-like branches that were used as arms. And the coconut
objects were heads!
They circled the dome now, and Burl could see that each round blue knob
had a central black spot that apparently served as an eye. There was no sign
of nostrils or mouth. Burl stared at the creatures in wonder.
The beings were clearly gesturing to him, trying to signal with their odd
arms. He waved back, wondering how he could establish communication.
As he did so, he described the creatures to Russ.
Page 136
Russ's voice was excited. "Say! I think I've figured out what sort of place
I'm in. This is a museum of galactic life! Each of these glass cases contains
a specimen of the highest form of life of its particular world. In one of the
cases, opposite me, there's one of the Martian creatures—a big, antlike
fellow. He's standing there, looking perfectly alive, but absolutely
motionless. Next to him is something else that looks like an intelligent
form. It's sort of a man, covered with short red hair. Around its waist it's got
a belt, and there are pouches on it, and something like a short sword. It must
be a humanoid type from some world out among the stars. Some of the
others look like intelligent forms, too, because they are wearing clothing.
"I think that collecting these specimens and setting them up here is part of
the religion of the Sun-tappers."
While Russ was talking, Burl thought of a way he might communicate with
the stick-men. He wanted to draw a diagram of the solar system on the floor
of his enclosure. He gestured futilely with his hand, but there was nothing
with which to make a marking. The stick-men outside watched his hand,
then one of them reached around to something hanging across its back and
withdrew a thin tablet and a wedge of red. Holding the tablet up so that Burl
could see, the creature quickly sketched a recognizable map of the Sun and
its planets!
Burl realized then that he was dealing with highly intelligent beings—no
savages, these, but the products of a high civilization. He indicated the third
world as his own. The stick-man drew back as if surprised, then pointed
upward.
They came from Neptune!
During the next few hours, a most curious three-way discussion went on—
Burl signaling to the Neptunians outside and describing his discoveries to
Russ over the phone of his space suit; Russ suggesting answers to some of
the more difficult diagrams. It was a curious experience. Gradually, by
means of simple drawings and gestures, and even charadelike playlets acted
out by the weird vegetable-crystal beings, there emerged the general story
of the Neptunians and the invaders from Pluto.
I'm in. This is a museum of galactic life! Each of these glass cases contains
a specimen of the highest form of life of its particular world. In one of the
cases, opposite me, there's one of the Martian creatures—a big, antlike
fellow. He's standing there, looking perfectly alive, but absolutely
motionless. Next to him is something else that looks like an intelligent
form. It's sort of a man, covered with short red hair. Around its waist it's got
a belt, and there are pouches on it, and something like a short sword. It must
be a humanoid type from some world out among the stars. Some of the
others look like intelligent forms, too, because they are wearing clothing.
"I think that collecting these specimens and setting them up here is part of
the religion of the Sun-tappers."
While Russ was talking, Burl thought of a way he might communicate with
the stick-men. He wanted to draw a diagram of the solar system on the floor
of his enclosure. He gestured futilely with his hand, but there was nothing
with which to make a marking. The stick-men outside watched his hand,
then one of them reached around to something hanging across its back and
withdrew a thin tablet and a wedge of red. Holding the tablet up so that Burl
could see, the creature quickly sketched a recognizable map of the Sun and
its planets!
Burl realized then that he was dealing with highly intelligent beings—no
savages, these, but the products of a high civilization. He indicated the third
world as his own. The stick-man drew back as if surprised, then pointed
upward.
They came from Neptune!
During the next few hours, a most curious three-way discussion went on—
Burl signaling to the Neptunians outside and describing his discoveries to
Russ over the phone of his space suit; Russ suggesting answers to some of
the more difficult diagrams. It was a curious experience. Gradually, by
means of simple drawings and gestures, and even charadelike playlets acted
out by the weird vegetable-crystal beings, there emerged the general story
of the Neptunians and the invaders from Pluto.
Page 137
On Neptune there had been a great civilization covering the entire world, a
hard surface lying deep beneath its thick methane atmosphere. There were
forests and there were animals and intelligent beings. They did not breathe,
but absorbed both their food and liquid gas through rootlike feelers on
which they stood and moved.
Then one day, about thirty years ago, they had been invaded by creatures
that came in dumbbell-shaped spaceships, and which had destroyed their
cities, and attempted to conquer the planet. They learned that these ships
had come from Triton, the strange new moon that Neptune had acquired
about a thousand years earlier, and from the new planet, Pluto, their
astronomers had observed at that time.
For thirty years the Neptunians had fought against the invaders. For a while
they almost succeeded, but then something new had developed. Their world
grew hotter. Great structures had been erected on the poles, the areas first
conquered by the Plutonians and still held by them. From these spots, vast
amounts of heat surged over the planet and changed it.
Heat meant death and doom to every living frigi-plasmic thing on Neptune.
Desperately, they increased their warfare, but the heat sapped their strength,
destroying them, until now they knew it was but a matter of time before the
Neptunians, beast and vegetable alike, would vanish totally.
"So that's it," breathed Burl. "That's where the Sun-tap energy is going. The
Plutonians want Neptune because it's near their old moon, and they have to
warm it up to live on it. Of course! And Neptune's too far from the Sun to
explode when it novas, it will just get comfortable for the Plutonians!"
The Neptunians continued their strange tale. They had built a crude
spaceship and manned it with a suicide battalion of the most desperate
warriors of their race. They had journeyed to Triton in hopes of seizing it
and destroying the foe from there. The stick-men had attacked and had been
beaten back.
Now there were only a few dozen of them left—the last soldiers of their
invasion and ignored by the enemy. And here they were, explaining this to
Burl whom they recognized as an ally.
hard surface lying deep beneath its thick methane atmosphere. There were
forests and there were animals and intelligent beings. They did not breathe,
but absorbed both their food and liquid gas through rootlike feelers on
which they stood and moved.
Then one day, about thirty years ago, they had been invaded by creatures
that came in dumbbell-shaped spaceships, and which had destroyed their
cities, and attempted to conquer the planet. They learned that these ships
had come from Triton, the strange new moon that Neptune had acquired
about a thousand years earlier, and from the new planet, Pluto, their
astronomers had observed at that time.
For thirty years the Neptunians had fought against the invaders. For a while
they almost succeeded, but then something new had developed. Their world
grew hotter. Great structures had been erected on the poles, the areas first
conquered by the Plutonians and still held by them. From these spots, vast
amounts of heat surged over the planet and changed it.
Heat meant death and doom to every living frigi-plasmic thing on Neptune.
Desperately, they increased their warfare, but the heat sapped their strength,
destroying them, until now they knew it was but a matter of time before the
Neptunians, beast and vegetable alike, would vanish totally.
"So that's it," breathed Burl. "That's where the Sun-tap energy is going. The
Plutonians want Neptune because it's near their old moon, and they have to
warm it up to live on it. Of course! And Neptune's too far from the Sun to
explode when it novas, it will just get comfortable for the Plutonians!"
The Neptunians continued their strange tale. They had built a crude
spaceship and manned it with a suicide battalion of the most desperate
warriors of their race. They had journeyed to Triton in hopes of seizing it
and destroying the foe from there. The stick-men had attacked and had been
beaten back.
Now there were only a few dozen of them left—the last soldiers of their
invasion and ignored by the enemy. And here they were, explaining this to
Burl whom they recognized as an ally.
Page 138
Russ's voice suddenly broke into Burl's thoughts, "There's some sort of
ceremony beginning here. There's a procession of Plutonians dressed in
golden robes marching down the center of the hall, carrying staffs with
moon pictures on them.... They're chanting in unison, though it sounds like
barking. Can you hear it?"
Burl could. It sounded faintly in his earphones like the noises in a dog
pound.
"Now they're circling around. They're opening one of the cases. The glass
slides back.... Say! The exhibits aren't dead. I see something moving.... It's a
man!"
Russ's voice stopped suddenly. Faintly, Burl could hear the barking and then
Russ's terrified voice. "It is a man, Burl. He's dark-skinned and wearing
white cotton pants and a homespun shirt. He looks like an Indian, maybe a
South American Indian. When they lifted the glass, he just walked out and
stood as if he were all mixed up. Then he got scared and started to run."
The voice was silent a moment. "They grabbed him, Burl. They sacrificed
him! And now they're coming for me."
"Stop them!" Burl yelled wildly. "Do something!"
"I can't stop them." Russ was resigned. "They're taking me to the empty
glass case. I guess I'm elected to be the next exhibit. They're shoving me
in!"
Outside Burl's enclosure the stick-men sensed something unusual in his
strained attitude. They stared in at him, while he remained tense, listening.
Now Russ's voice came again. "They're going to take off my helmet and
throw in the suspended animation gas, Burl. Good-by. I can see them still.
Oh ... oh, I feel strange, I feel stiff, faint ... here ... I ... go...."
His voice faded out, thin and weak. Then there was only silence.
Burl threw himself against the restraining transparent wall of his dome
prison and hammered on it with his fists. The dome would not give way.
ceremony beginning here. There's a procession of Plutonians dressed in
golden robes marching down the center of the hall, carrying staffs with
moon pictures on them.... They're chanting in unison, though it sounds like
barking. Can you hear it?"
Burl could. It sounded faintly in his earphones like the noises in a dog
pound.
"Now they're circling around. They're opening one of the cases. The glass
slides back.... Say! The exhibits aren't dead. I see something moving.... It's a
man!"
Russ's voice stopped suddenly. Faintly, Burl could hear the barking and then
Russ's terrified voice. "It is a man, Burl. He's dark-skinned and wearing
white cotton pants and a homespun shirt. He looks like an Indian, maybe a
South American Indian. When they lifted the glass, he just walked out and
stood as if he were all mixed up. Then he got scared and started to run."
The voice was silent a moment. "They grabbed him, Burl. They sacrificed
him! And now they're coming for me."
"Stop them!" Burl yelled wildly. "Do something!"
"I can't stop them." Russ was resigned. "They're taking me to the empty
glass case. I guess I'm elected to be the next exhibit. They're shoving me
in!"
Outside Burl's enclosure the stick-men sensed something unusual in his
strained attitude. They stared in at him, while he remained tense, listening.
Now Russ's voice came again. "They're going to take off my helmet and
throw in the suspended animation gas, Burl. Good-by. I can see them still.
Oh ... oh, I feel strange, I feel stiff, faint ... here ... I ... go...."
His voice faded out, thin and weak. Then there was only silence.
Burl threw himself against the restraining transparent wall of his dome
prison and hammered on it with his fists. The dome would not give way.
Page 139
He looked around desperately, determined to escape, wondering what
surprise the Plutonians were holding him for—suspecting he would be the
next victim. They would be coming for him soon, he knew.
He searched the enclosure for some way of leaving. He looked at the stick-
men and wondered if they knew. One of them, the one who seemed to be
the leader, gestured to him. His arm pointed to a spot in the floor.
Sure enough, there was a crack there, an outline like a small trap cover. He
worked at it with his fingers and, finding a dent, he pushed. A lid came off.
Below was a cleared space, a few inches deep, in which were set the levers
of a typical Plutonian control board.
Burl wondered if he were still carrying the charge that attuned him to such
controls. The shock he had received on Pluto could have blanked it out.
He pushed at the levers with his gloved hands. They did not obey him.
Desperately, he removed the glove from one of his hands. It was bitter cold
in the little enclosure, but there was some atmosphere. The lever almost
froze to his fingers, but he turned it again.
This time it worked. The top of the dome that entrapped him suddenly
opened, and the sides slid back. Burl replaced his glove on his hand and
dashed outside to the freedom of the frigid surface of Triton.
Then he was among the Neptunian stick-men, and they were actually
patting him on the back, waving toward the building, hurrying him on.
They were prepared to die in one last desperate assault on the foe. Could
Burl do less?
surprise the Plutonians were holding him for—suspecting he would be the
next victim. They would be coming for him soon, he knew.
He searched the enclosure for some way of leaving. He looked at the stick-
men and wondered if they knew. One of them, the one who seemed to be
the leader, gestured to him. His arm pointed to a spot in the floor.
Sure enough, there was a crack there, an outline like a small trap cover. He
worked at it with his fingers and, finding a dent, he pushed. A lid came off.
Below was a cleared space, a few inches deep, in which were set the levers
of a typical Plutonian control board.
Burl wondered if he were still carrying the charge that attuned him to such
controls. The shock he had received on Pluto could have blanked it out.
He pushed at the levers with his gloved hands. They did not obey him.
Desperately, he removed the glove from one of his hands. It was bitter cold
in the little enclosure, but there was some atmosphere. The lever almost
froze to his fingers, but he turned it again.
This time it worked. The top of the dome that entrapped him suddenly
opened, and the sides slid back. Burl replaced his glove on his hand and
dashed outside to the freedom of the frigid surface of Triton.
Then he was among the Neptunian stick-men, and they were actually
patting him on the back, waving toward the building, hurrying him on.
They were prepared to die in one last desperate assault on the foe. Could
Burl do less?
Page 140
Chapter 19.
The Museum of Galactic Life
There were a number of structures laid out on the plain under the blue glow
of Neptune. Burl saw that only one of them was a true building in the
design he had come to know was that of an ancient Plutonian temple except
that it was far, far larger than any of the ruined shells he had seen on Pluto.
The other structures turned out to be walls and pillars arranged around the
central building, evidently in relation to their religious significance. This
main building, ornately decorated, was windowless, and the several closed
doors represented metallic and forbidding barriers. It must have covered
thirty acres, rising about thirty feet from the ground.
As Burl frantically examined it, the leaders of the Neptunians moved
discreetly with him. They gestured at the doors, indicating their own
inability to open them. Apparently they thought that Burl might succeed
where they had failed.
Burl wasn't sure he could. He supposed there might be controls similar to
those that released him from the dome, but he thought first he had better
determine a plan of action. Somewhere within, Russ was sealed up—an
exhibit among the living dead of many planets.
He managed to convey this thought to the three stick-men. There was an
unmistakable nod of assent from one of them, and a twiglike arm indicated
that Burl should follow him. They rapidly crossed the area to the outlying
fringes of a frigi-plasmic forest.
Here towering crystalline masses pushed up from the dark ground. It
seemed to be a weird jumble of broken glass—broken glass ten and fifteen
feet high! The Neptunians led Burl into this amazing landscape through a
narrow path. He walked behind them, feeling thick and heavy in
comparison with their fragile bodies. But, in spite of appearances, they were
not fragile, nor were the growths that made up the fantastic Neptune-
transplanted vegetation of Triton.
The Museum of Galactic Life
There were a number of structures laid out on the plain under the blue glow
of Neptune. Burl saw that only one of them was a true building in the
design he had come to know was that of an ancient Plutonian temple except
that it was far, far larger than any of the ruined shells he had seen on Pluto.
The other structures turned out to be walls and pillars arranged around the
central building, evidently in relation to their religious significance. This
main building, ornately decorated, was windowless, and the several closed
doors represented metallic and forbidding barriers. It must have covered
thirty acres, rising about thirty feet from the ground.
As Burl frantically examined it, the leaders of the Neptunians moved
discreetly with him. They gestured at the doors, indicating their own
inability to open them. Apparently they thought that Burl might succeed
where they had failed.
Burl wasn't sure he could. He supposed there might be controls similar to
those that released him from the dome, but he thought first he had better
determine a plan of action. Somewhere within, Russ was sealed up—an
exhibit among the living dead of many planets.
He managed to convey this thought to the three stick-men. There was an
unmistakable nod of assent from one of them, and a twiglike arm indicated
that Burl should follow him. They rapidly crossed the area to the outlying
fringes of a frigi-plasmic forest.
Here towering crystalline masses pushed up from the dark ground. It
seemed to be a weird jumble of broken glass—broken glass ten and fifteen
feet high! The Neptunians led Burl into this amazing landscape through a
narrow path. He walked behind them, feeling thick and heavy in
comparison with their fragile bodies. But, in spite of appearances, they were
not fragile, nor were the growths that made up the fantastic Neptune-
transplanted vegetation of Triton.
Page 141
They came to a clearing amid the forest of blue and green and orange
crystals, and there were the rest of the Neptunian survivors. Burl counted
about forty, rooted in pools of liquid gas, absorbing renewed energy while
waiting for commands. As he entered the clearing, most of them lifted their
root tentacles and crowded around him. He was as strange a being to them
—helmeted and bundled in plastic and rubber and metal—as they seemed to
him.
Burl noticed that many of them must have been wounded—there were signs
of missing arms or of burned roots, and a few had odd poultices smeared
over their round, blue heads.
The Neptunian commander pointed out their store of arms. They had long
spears of some glistening translucent substance, a projector which fired
darts of the same material, and a number of the Plutonian globe-and-rod
instruments—obviously captured from the enemy.
He examined some of the spears and darts, and a suspicion he had held on
first seeing them was confirmed. These were made of ice! On Neptune, ice
was easily obtained—and hard enough to be worked like metal. Its melting
point being far, far above any heat likely outside of a Neptunian laboratory,
it was as permanent as iron for their needs!
Burl studied the captured Plutonian hand weapons, and was pleased to have
one of the Neptunian soldiers pick up one and demonstrate how it was fired.
It had apparently simpler controls than most Plutonian products, for it easily
blazed forth a bolt of electronic fire that blasted a tall, crystalline tree to
shards.
The Neptunian leader began to gesture again, and conveyed to Burl that
they wanted to attack as soon as possible. He gathered that conditions on
Triton were not the best for these people—that their ability to hold out was
limited and that they desired to make their final assault without delay. They
wanted to know now what Burl could contribute.
Burl realized that as far as he was concerned, he was not in any better shape
than his allies. His oxygen tanks were slowly but surely emptying. He
examined his gauges and was startled to see he had only two more hours
crystals, and there were the rest of the Neptunian survivors. Burl counted
about forty, rooted in pools of liquid gas, absorbing renewed energy while
waiting for commands. As he entered the clearing, most of them lifted their
root tentacles and crowded around him. He was as strange a being to them
—helmeted and bundled in plastic and rubber and metal—as they seemed to
him.
Burl noticed that many of them must have been wounded—there were signs
of missing arms or of burned roots, and a few had odd poultices smeared
over their round, blue heads.
The Neptunian commander pointed out their store of arms. They had long
spears of some glistening translucent substance, a projector which fired
darts of the same material, and a number of the Plutonian globe-and-rod
instruments—obviously captured from the enemy.
He examined some of the spears and darts, and a suspicion he had held on
first seeing them was confirmed. These were made of ice! On Neptune, ice
was easily obtained—and hard enough to be worked like metal. Its melting
point being far, far above any heat likely outside of a Neptunian laboratory,
it was as permanent as iron for their needs!
Burl studied the captured Plutonian hand weapons, and was pleased to have
one of the Neptunian soldiers pick up one and demonstrate how it was fired.
It had apparently simpler controls than most Plutonian products, for it easily
blazed forth a bolt of electronic fire that blasted a tall, crystalline tree to
shards.
The Neptunian leader began to gesture again, and conveyed to Burl that
they wanted to attack as soon as possible. He gathered that conditions on
Triton were not the best for these people—that their ability to hold out was
limited and that they desired to make their final assault without delay. They
wanted to know now what Burl could contribute.
Burl realized that as far as he was concerned, he was not in any better shape
than his allies. His oxygen tanks were slowly but surely emptying. He
examined his gauges and was startled to see he had only two more hours
Page 142
before suffocation would set in. The suit was warmed by batteries which
would last several days longer, but by that time it would be too late.
Somewhere inside his suit he had a pocket knife, but he could not get at it in
the frigid near-airlessness of the outer surface. His holster still hung at his
side, but it was empty.
There was nothing to do then but to join the Neptunian assault. He would
try to open the door by the electronic charge that still remained in his body.
If he did, they could break in and do what they could. If he could not, who
knew what would happen?
Burl picked up one of the Plutonian weapons and gestured to the rest to
prepare to attack. Immediately, they fell into orderly ranks. They were,
indeed, soldiers, Burl thought—the cream of their planet's armies—
whatever that meant in Terrestrial terms.
Then, following the lead of the Neptunian captain, they marched out of the
forest. As they crossed the open plain, Burl knew that they were probably in
sight of the defenders. But he realized quickly that that had been true when
he was released and nothing had happened. So perhaps he was wrong.
Perhaps the Plutonians were limited—perhaps they had not bothered to
keep a watch.
That left only the Plutonian spaceships to worry about. Burl hastily
searched the sky and located two glowing spots—four really—undoubtedly
two of the double-sphere ships. The Neptunians behind bumped into him,
then the whole column came to a halt.
Burl pointed to the ships. The commander waved his arms helplessly. They
had been there all along, Burl gathered, and what could he do about it?
More gestures. Yes, the ships were dangerous. In fact, they had been the
ones that had defeated the main Neptunian attack, blasted them from the
sky and destroyed the ship in which the stick-man army had arrived. The
Neptunians were going to attack, regardless.
Again, Burl realized the essentially suicidal mood that moved these beings.
They were attacking against odds before which they were utterly helpless.
would last several days longer, but by that time it would be too late.
Somewhere inside his suit he had a pocket knife, but he could not get at it in
the frigid near-airlessness of the outer surface. His holster still hung at his
side, but it was empty.
There was nothing to do then but to join the Neptunian assault. He would
try to open the door by the electronic charge that still remained in his body.
If he did, they could break in and do what they could. If he could not, who
knew what would happen?
Burl picked up one of the Plutonian weapons and gestured to the rest to
prepare to attack. Immediately, they fell into orderly ranks. They were,
indeed, soldiers, Burl thought—the cream of their planet's armies—
whatever that meant in Terrestrial terms.
Then, following the lead of the Neptunian captain, they marched out of the
forest. As they crossed the open plain, Burl knew that they were probably in
sight of the defenders. But he realized quickly that that had been true when
he was released and nothing had happened. So perhaps he was wrong.
Perhaps the Plutonians were limited—perhaps they had not bothered to
keep a watch.
That left only the Plutonian spaceships to worry about. Burl hastily
searched the sky and located two glowing spots—four really—undoubtedly
two of the double-sphere ships. The Neptunians behind bumped into him,
then the whole column came to a halt.
Burl pointed to the ships. The commander waved his arms helplessly. They
had been there all along, Burl gathered, and what could he do about it?
More gestures. Yes, the ships were dangerous. In fact, they had been the
ones that had defeated the main Neptunian attack, blasted them from the
sky and destroyed the ship in which the stick-man army had arrived. The
Neptunians were going to attack, regardless.
Again, Burl realized the essentially suicidal mood that moved these beings.
They were attacking against odds before which they were utterly helpless.
Page 143
Even as Burl stared at the far-off lights of the Plutonian ships, he noticed
them swing away, moving off toward the horizon. As he watched, he
thought for an instant that something else had blinked like a star, far in the
distance.
Struck by a sudden thought, he activated his helmet radio. "Burl Denning
calling the Magellan! He spoke at maximum power into his throat mike.
Calling the Magellan! If you can hear me, reply!"
Then, to his joy, a faint, far-away voice answered, "Burl Denning! This is
Lockhart. Give us your location."
"Lockhart! There are two Pluto ships approaching you from the direction in
which you can hear my voice. Be careful!"
The voice came faintly again, "We see them. We'll take care of them.
Haines made it back to the ship. The Pluto base is destroyed. There are only
those two ships left. We followed them here as fast as we could. Can you
hold out until we draw them out and crack them? We will need a little
time."
Burl called, "Don't worry about me. Go to it. Russ may be alive in their
building here. Don't bomb it. I'm going to try to get in."
"Okay," called Lockhart's voice, already growing weak as the Magellan and
the two pursuing foes drew away.
Burl turned to the Neptunian captain. He drew his hand across the sky to
show that the ships had gone, drawn away from their protection of the
temple. He pointed at the walls of the building with a "let's go" gesture.
Burl noticed that though the Neptunians were apparently featureless, he
could sense a distinct tightening up in their actions. They were tensed, ready
for the final battle.
They marched up to the main door of the temple. The captain loosed a bolt
of electronic fire at it, but it left no mark.
There was no sound from within. Evidently the Plutonians were either busy
about their own business, or did not regard the Neptunians as worth their
attention.
them swing away, moving off toward the horizon. As he watched, he
thought for an instant that something else had blinked like a star, far in the
distance.
Struck by a sudden thought, he activated his helmet radio. "Burl Denning
calling the Magellan! He spoke at maximum power into his throat mike.
Calling the Magellan! If you can hear me, reply!"
Then, to his joy, a faint, far-away voice answered, "Burl Denning! This is
Lockhart. Give us your location."
"Lockhart! There are two Pluto ships approaching you from the direction in
which you can hear my voice. Be careful!"
The voice came faintly again, "We see them. We'll take care of them.
Haines made it back to the ship. The Pluto base is destroyed. There are only
those two ships left. We followed them here as fast as we could. Can you
hold out until we draw them out and crack them? We will need a little
time."
Burl called, "Don't worry about me. Go to it. Russ may be alive in their
building here. Don't bomb it. I'm going to try to get in."
"Okay," called Lockhart's voice, already growing weak as the Magellan and
the two pursuing foes drew away.
Burl turned to the Neptunian captain. He drew his hand across the sky to
show that the ships had gone, drawn away from their protection of the
temple. He pointed at the walls of the building with a "let's go" gesture.
Burl noticed that though the Neptunians were apparently featureless, he
could sense a distinct tightening up in their actions. They were tensed, ready
for the final battle.
They marched up to the main door of the temple. The captain loosed a bolt
of electronic fire at it, but it left no mark.
There was no sound from within. Evidently the Plutonians were either busy
about their own business, or did not regard the Neptunians as worth their
attention.
Page 144
In a covered panel right next to the door, Burl found the typical Sun-tap
controls. He tried to work them, but they would not function through his
gloves.
He hesitated, knowing that removing his glove this time might prove very
risky. Then he hastily drew off his left gauntlet and the thin nylon glove that
was the inner protection of his suit. He placed his hand on the control. The
icy cold bit into it. He twisted, the control worked, and he tore his hand
away, replacing the gloves.
The door slid open. Burl ran inside, followed by half a dozen Neptunians.
They were in a small antechamber, evidently an air lock.
The Neptunians, leaping with excitement, did not bother to activate the
inner door, which would have meant closing the outer door. Instead, they
attacked it with heavy ice axes. The strange tools, chilled to a hardness
unthinkable on Earth, bit into the fragile plastic.
After a few hard blows, the plastic split, and there was a small explosion as
the air within the temple burst through. A gale of escaping gases roared
through the little chamber, ripping the rest of the door to shards and hurling
the Neptunians right and left. Outside, the flow began to congeal, and a thin
snow of liquid air began to fall.
When the blast subsided after several minutes, the Neptunians jumped up,
shook off the new gas-snow, and charged through the doorway into the
temple itself.
Burl held his Plutonian flashgun at the ready. Inside, they found chaos and
disaster. In the great rooms and halls Plutonians writhed on the floors, in the
last throes of suffocation and freezing, now that the air had been ripped
from their stronghold.
The walls bore brilliant paintings and sharply defined sculptures.
Advancing with the ranks of stick-men, Burl caught glimpses of strange
scenes on distant planets, of landscapes that must have been Pluto at one
time, beneath a double sun that probably was its original parent.
Burl became faintly aware of a distant clanging. Not all the air was gone, he
thought; it must be pouring out in slower volume as the pressure
controls. He tried to work them, but they would not function through his
gloves.
He hesitated, knowing that removing his glove this time might prove very
risky. Then he hastily drew off his left gauntlet and the thin nylon glove that
was the inner protection of his suit. He placed his hand on the control. The
icy cold bit into it. He twisted, the control worked, and he tore his hand
away, replacing the gloves.
The door slid open. Burl ran inside, followed by half a dozen Neptunians.
They were in a small antechamber, evidently an air lock.
The Neptunians, leaping with excitement, did not bother to activate the
inner door, which would have meant closing the outer door. Instead, they
attacked it with heavy ice axes. The strange tools, chilled to a hardness
unthinkable on Earth, bit into the fragile plastic.
After a few hard blows, the plastic split, and there was a small explosion as
the air within the temple burst through. A gale of escaping gases roared
through the little chamber, ripping the rest of the door to shards and hurling
the Neptunians right and left. Outside, the flow began to congeal, and a thin
snow of liquid air began to fall.
When the blast subsided after several minutes, the Neptunians jumped up,
shook off the new gas-snow, and charged through the doorway into the
temple itself.
Burl held his Plutonian flashgun at the ready. Inside, they found chaos and
disaster. In the great rooms and halls Plutonians writhed on the floors, in the
last throes of suffocation and freezing, now that the air had been ripped
from their stronghold.
The walls bore brilliant paintings and sharply defined sculptures.
Advancing with the ranks of stick-men, Burl caught glimpses of strange
scenes on distant planets, of landscapes that must have been Pluto at one
time, beneath a double sun that probably was its original parent.
Burl became faintly aware of a distant clanging. Not all the air was gone, he
thought; it must be pouring out in slower volume as the pressure
Page 145
diminished. Somewhere an alarm was ringing.
The Neptunians fell behind; he saw now that the floor and walls of the
temple were still too hot for them. They began to withdraw, regrouping,
blazing away with ice darts and spears at Plutonians who had appeared in
hastily-donned space garments.
Burl fired, then plunged on. He had to get to the hall where Russ was
imprisoned.
Finally he was out of sight and sound of the Neptunians and their
adversaries. Behind him a door swung down. He was nearing the heart of
the building now. The remaining Plutonians were sealing it off, rallying for
their final defense.
He was now cut off from support. But he still counted on confusion and
surprise to aid him. He ran down a long hall to a vast central chamber and
arrived a split second before the door slammed shut after him. The museum
of galactic life!
It was a huge hall, oval in shape. In its center was a block that might be an
altar. Lining the walls on each side, ranging from the great door on the far
end to the equally ornate one through which Burl had come, were floor-to-
ceiling niches with gently curved, transparent fronts. He could see dark
shapes standing motionless within each of these exhibition cases.
There were also about two dozen Plutonians in the hall, most of them
grouped around the central altar. They wore gaudy harnesses and carried
sharp, swordlike wands.
Two of them started for Burl, and he leveled his weapon and fired. There
was a flash of light and one of the creatures dropped senseless. The other
turned and scuttled away, uttering barking cries.
Burl glanced hastily around. The rest of the Plutonians—priests or curators
or executioners, whatever they were—advanced slowly on Burl. He couldn't
get them all, but he'd try. He fired it again.
This time the weapon failed to go off. Its charge was used up. The
Plutonians yelped with delight and pressed forward, flourishing their
The Neptunians fell behind; he saw now that the floor and walls of the
temple were still too hot for them. They began to withdraw, regrouping,
blazing away with ice darts and spears at Plutonians who had appeared in
hastily-donned space garments.
Burl fired, then plunged on. He had to get to the hall where Russ was
imprisoned.
Finally he was out of sight and sound of the Neptunians and their
adversaries. Behind him a door swung down. He was nearing the heart of
the building now. The remaining Plutonians were sealing it off, rallying for
their final defense.
He was now cut off from support. But he still counted on confusion and
surprise to aid him. He ran down a long hall to a vast central chamber and
arrived a split second before the door slammed shut after him. The museum
of galactic life!
It was a huge hall, oval in shape. In its center was a block that might be an
altar. Lining the walls on each side, ranging from the great door on the far
end to the equally ornate one through which Burl had come, were floor-to-
ceiling niches with gently curved, transparent fronts. He could see dark
shapes standing motionless within each of these exhibition cases.
There were also about two dozen Plutonians in the hall, most of them
grouped around the central altar. They wore gaudy harnesses and carried
sharp, swordlike wands.
Two of them started for Burl, and he leveled his weapon and fired. There
was a flash of light and one of the creatures dropped senseless. The other
turned and scuttled away, uttering barking cries.
Burl glanced hastily around. The rest of the Plutonians—priests or curators
or executioners, whatever they were—advanced slowly on Burl. He couldn't
get them all, but he'd try. He fired it again.
This time the weapon failed to go off. Its charge was used up. The
Plutonians yelped with delight and pressed forward, flourishing their
Page 146
swords.
Burl desperately hurled a globe-and-rod at them, meanwhile looking around
for a new weapon, But he saw only the shining glass fronts of the exhibits.
In the nearest case was a manlike being, dark purple in color, a thing with a
fixed but intelligent stare in its slanted yellow eyes. It had two tall ears, a
wide chest, and a curling tail, and was wearing a belt with pouches and a
short kilt that only about half covered his two long, hairy legs.
Burl spun on his heel, swooped upon the gleaming swordlike wand that had
fallen from the dead Plutonian, and racing back to the exhibit, brought it up
with all his might against the transparent surface.
The glassy stuff cracked. Another blow with all the strength of an Earth-
muscled body on a light gravity world, and the front shattered open.
There was a puff of a greenish gas. The creature inside suddenly blinked
and moved a hand. Then, without waiting, Burl dashed to the next exhibit
and swung his metal sword again.
The barking calls of the Plutonians increased in frenzy, and they charged
him, screaming. As the second exhibit crashed open, Burl turned to fend off
his attackers, swinging his sword. It clashed against the sword of the nearest
curator-priest, who slipped and went bowling over against his fellows. Burl
reached the third exhibit and smashed it.
He turned to meet a renewed attack, and this time, out of the corner of his
eye, he saw that a purple humanoid was in action beside him. The purple
one had picked up a Plutonian, apparently with great ease, and was using its
body as a bludgeon.
Something furry and green leaped high in the air and came down in the
middle of the Plutonians. There was a wild, unearthly screech as it landed,
and exhibit number two, from heaven knew what starry world, was in the
fray.
Now Burl found himself momentarily unhampered, and rapidly he opened
exhibit after exhibit. The battle became wilder and fiercer, as star-being
after star-being joined in.
Burl desperately hurled a globe-and-rod at them, meanwhile looking around
for a new weapon, But he saw only the shining glass fronts of the exhibits.
In the nearest case was a manlike being, dark purple in color, a thing with a
fixed but intelligent stare in its slanted yellow eyes. It had two tall ears, a
wide chest, and a curling tail, and was wearing a belt with pouches and a
short kilt that only about half covered his two long, hairy legs.
Burl spun on his heel, swooped upon the gleaming swordlike wand that had
fallen from the dead Plutonian, and racing back to the exhibit, brought it up
with all his might against the transparent surface.
The glassy stuff cracked. Another blow with all the strength of an Earth-
muscled body on a light gravity world, and the front shattered open.
There was a puff of a greenish gas. The creature inside suddenly blinked
and moved a hand. Then, without waiting, Burl dashed to the next exhibit
and swung his metal sword again.
The barking calls of the Plutonians increased in frenzy, and they charged
him, screaming. As the second exhibit crashed open, Burl turned to fend off
his attackers, swinging his sword. It clashed against the sword of the nearest
curator-priest, who slipped and went bowling over against his fellows. Burl
reached the third exhibit and smashed it.
He turned to meet a renewed attack, and this time, out of the corner of his
eye, he saw that a purple humanoid was in action beside him. The purple
one had picked up a Plutonian, apparently with great ease, and was using its
body as a bludgeon.
Something furry and green leaped high in the air and came down in the
middle of the Plutonians. There was a wild, unearthly screech as it landed,
and exhibit number two, from heaven knew what starry world, was in the
fray.
Now Burl found himself momentarily unhampered, and rapidly he opened
exhibit after exhibit. The battle became wilder and fiercer, as star-being
after star-being joined in.
Page 147
The Plutonians swung away in all directions with their wands. Their
barking voices were drowned out by a rising chorus of sounds—roaring,
inhuman voices, calling curses in languages of worlds that lay many light-
years distant—wild, birdlike calls from a winged being whose intelligent
eyes and wide brow belied the ferocity of its beaked and taloned attack.
There was a clanking, ringing sound, as a thing of half jointed shining
metal, half soft, velvety-white flesh, whirred among the foe, doing damage
with a razor-edged arm that shot out from the metallic part of its body.
There was something like a cloud of insects—a mad thing which seemed to
be a single hive of tiny winged cells that moved and bit and stood its ground
like a single united being.
There was a Martian that had at first stood stupidly, as if unaware of what
was going on, and then had gone berserk at the first sight of a Plutonian
running past him.
And in the next case was Russ, still space-suited, staring out through the
glass. With a joyous crash, Burl smashed the front of the niche.
Russ moved, his eyes opening wide as he saw Burl. He reached down
quickly and picked up the helmet which had been taken from his head. As
soon as he had it in place, he activated the phones. "Wow!" his voice came
in Burl's earphones loud and clear, "Let's go!"
He jumped down and grabbed Burl. Together, the two danced a wild jig of
joy. Then they both remembered the Plutonians and turned, realizing that
they had momentarily left themselves wide open to attack.
But there was nothing to be afraid of. The Plutonians were all torn, beaten,
lifeless. Moving among them were their former victims—the exhibits
gathered from worlds undreamed of by human astronomers. What hopes of
vengeance had been stored in those inhuman hearts when each had been
torn from his native world, had been caught in helpless paralysis and carried
trillions of miles across trackless space as living trophies!
Although their forms were many and strange, there seemed to be no fear of
one another among the survivors. What they had been through had united
them forever. One by one, they began to gather around Burl and Russ,
recognizing in them their saviors, grateful for their delivery.
barking voices were drowned out by a rising chorus of sounds—roaring,
inhuman voices, calling curses in languages of worlds that lay many light-
years distant—wild, birdlike calls from a winged being whose intelligent
eyes and wide brow belied the ferocity of its beaked and taloned attack.
There was a clanking, ringing sound, as a thing of half jointed shining
metal, half soft, velvety-white flesh, whirred among the foe, doing damage
with a razor-edged arm that shot out from the metallic part of its body.
There was something like a cloud of insects—a mad thing which seemed to
be a single hive of tiny winged cells that moved and bit and stood its ground
like a single united being.
There was a Martian that had at first stood stupidly, as if unaware of what
was going on, and then had gone berserk at the first sight of a Plutonian
running past him.
And in the next case was Russ, still space-suited, staring out through the
glass. With a joyous crash, Burl smashed the front of the niche.
Russ moved, his eyes opening wide as he saw Burl. He reached down
quickly and picked up the helmet which had been taken from his head. As
soon as he had it in place, he activated the phones. "Wow!" his voice came
in Burl's earphones loud and clear, "Let's go!"
He jumped down and grabbed Burl. Together, the two danced a wild jig of
joy. Then they both remembered the Plutonians and turned, realizing that
they had momentarily left themselves wide open to attack.
But there was nothing to be afraid of. The Plutonians were all torn, beaten,
lifeless. Moving among them were their former victims—the exhibits
gathered from worlds undreamed of by human astronomers. What hopes of
vengeance had been stored in those inhuman hearts when each had been
torn from his native world, had been caught in helpless paralysis and carried
trillions of miles across trackless space as living trophies!
Although their forms were many and strange, there seemed to be no fear of
one another among the survivors. What they had been through had united
them forever. One by one, they began to gather around Burl and Russ,
recognizing in them their saviors, grateful for their delivery.
Page 148
Burl's helmet radio spoke up. "The Magellan calling Burl Denning! We
have eliminated the last two enemy ships. Give us your location. We intend
to A-bomb the installations on Triton as soon as we can pick you up!"
Burl spoke into the phone. "Hold up the explosions, colonel. We've taken
the place intact. You can land the Magellan outside the main temple and
come and see. We've got allies, lots of them."
"Yes," said Russ into his phone, "we've got the secret of Pluto, we've got a
friendly, fellow world on Neptune, and we have a whole crowd of the
strangest refugees you'll ever hope to see. Bring extra space suits with you.
We have the makings here of friendship and trade with dozens of distant
star planets—a treasure in itself worth a dozen trips around the solar
system."
Burl looked around him, thoughtful at these words. Visions of the marvels
that future A-G ships would find, as, manned by Earthly crews and carrying
each star-being back to its galactic world, they opened up on each planet
new vistas of achievement, science, and artistic marvel.
He found himself staring into the yellow eyes of the big, purple humanoid.
His hand was grasped by the other's strangely shaped hand while a yellow,
powdery creature like a human moth tried to touch Burl in fondness.
Burl smiled widely and began to grasp the proffered tentacles, pincers and
grippers.
"Welcome," he said to them all. "Welcome to the solar system. We've got a
lot to talk about."
have eliminated the last two enemy ships. Give us your location. We intend
to A-bomb the installations on Triton as soon as we can pick you up!"
Burl spoke into the phone. "Hold up the explosions, colonel. We've taken
the place intact. You can land the Magellan outside the main temple and
come and see. We've got allies, lots of them."
"Yes," said Russ into his phone, "we've got the secret of Pluto, we've got a
friendly, fellow world on Neptune, and we have a whole crowd of the
strangest refugees you'll ever hope to see. Bring extra space suits with you.
We have the makings here of friendship and trade with dozens of distant
star planets—a treasure in itself worth a dozen trips around the solar
system."
Burl looked around him, thoughtful at these words. Visions of the marvels
that future A-G ships would find, as, manned by Earthly crews and carrying
each star-being back to its galactic world, they opened up on each planet
new vistas of achievement, science, and artistic marvel.
He found himself staring into the yellow eyes of the big, purple humanoid.
His hand was grasped by the other's strangely shaped hand while a yellow,
powdery creature like a human moth tried to touch Burl in fondness.
Burl smiled widely and began to grasp the proffered tentacles, pincers and
grippers.
"Welcome," he said to them all. "Welcome to the solar system. We've got a
lot to talk about."
Page 149
About the Author
Donald A. Wollheim was bitten early by the science-fiction bug. As a boy,
he filled many thick notebooks and scrapbooks with clippings, pictures, and
facts about the planets, and astronomy in general.
He grew up in New York, graduating from New York University, and at
once began a successful career as a free-lance writer of science fiction.
Since 1946 he has been editor of a publishing house specializing in
paperback books. A number of anthologies of the fantastic are the result of
his editing.
Aware of the wide-spread interest in this subject, Mr. Wollheim decided to
inaugurate science fiction conventions, and founded the Fantasy Amateur
Press Association as well. He considers himself a true science fiction
pioneer.
Among his hobbies are model soldiers. He is considered an authority on
them and has a fabulous collection.
Other Winston Science Fiction Novels by the Author
THE SECRET of the MARTIAN MOONS
THE SECRET of SATURN'S RINGS
The Secret of the Ninth Planet
On the day that the theft of the solar system's light begins. Burl Denning is
with an archaeological expedition in the Andes, only a few miles from the
source of the "disturbance." Within hours the United States Air Force has
ordered the expedition to investigate the strange phenomenon that is
causing a dimness and a drop in temperature throughout the world.
This is the start of a fantastic adventure that eventually takes Burl, a high-
school senior, on the first circumnavigation of the solar system. On planet
after planet, he and the crew of the Magellan, a gleaming, powerful, and
virtually untested spaceship, discover the weird trappings of a brilliantly-
Donald A. Wollheim was bitten early by the science-fiction bug. As a boy,
he filled many thick notebooks and scrapbooks with clippings, pictures, and
facts about the planets, and astronomy in general.
He grew up in New York, graduating from New York University, and at
once began a successful career as a free-lance writer of science fiction.
Since 1946 he has been editor of a publishing house specializing in
paperback books. A number of anthologies of the fantastic are the result of
his editing.
Aware of the wide-spread interest in this subject, Mr. Wollheim decided to
inaugurate science fiction conventions, and founded the Fantasy Amateur
Press Association as well. He considers himself a true science fiction
pioneer.
Among his hobbies are model soldiers. He is considered an authority on
them and has a fabulous collection.
Other Winston Science Fiction Novels by the Author
THE SECRET of the MARTIAN MOONS
THE SECRET of SATURN'S RINGS
The Secret of the Ninth Planet
On the day that the theft of the solar system's light begins. Burl Denning is
with an archaeological expedition in the Andes, only a few miles from the
source of the "disturbance." Within hours the United States Air Force has
ordered the expedition to investigate the strange phenomenon that is
causing a dimness and a drop in temperature throughout the world.
This is the start of a fantastic adventure that eventually takes Burl, a high-
school senior, on the first circumnavigation of the solar system. On planet
after planet, he and the crew of the Magellan, a gleaming, powerful, and
virtually untested spaceship, discover the weird trappings of a brilliantly-
Page 150
designed Sun-tap station. Each planetfall brings unexpected hazards, as the
ship draws closer and closer to solving the mystery of the theft.
The author has based his story on science fact. Researchers are actually at
work on the possibilities of just such a circumnavigation, and on another
surprising theory brought out in this book.
ship draws closer and closer to solving the mystery of the theft.
The author has based his story on science fact. Researchers are actually at
work on the possibilities of just such a circumnavigation, and on another
surprising theory brought out in this book.
Page 151
Other Winston Science Fiction Novels
ANT MEN, THE by Eric North—Geologists find living fossils in the
badlands of Central Australia
ATTACK FROM ATLANTIS by Lester del Rey—An atomic submarine
crew discovers the lost city of Atlantis
BATTLE ON MERCURY by Erik Van Lhin—Sun storms sweep Mercury
and threaten man's existence
DANGER: DINOSAURS! by Richard Marsten—A treacherous big-game
hunter leads an expedition back to the Age of Reptiles
EARTHBOUND by Milton Lesser—An ex-space cadet is forced to plunder
ships he was trained to protect
FIVE AGAINST VENUS by Philip Latham—A Moon-bound rocket
crashes in the misty wilds of Venus
ISLANDS IN THE SKY by Arthur C. Clarke—A teen-ager's adventures
aboard a space station
LOST PLANET, THE by Paul Dallas—Two worlds on the verge of war
MAROONED ON MARS by Lester del Rey—A teen-ager on the first
Moon-to-Mars expedition
MISSING MEN OF SATURN by Philip Latham—A space crew is held
prisoner by froglike men on Saturn
MISSION TO THE MOON by Lester del Rey—Scientists make man's first
journey to the Moon
MISTS OF DAWN by Chad Oliver—A space-time machine hurls a 20th-
century boy back to 50,000 B. C.
ANT MEN, THE by Eric North—Geologists find living fossils in the
badlands of Central Australia
ATTACK FROM ATLANTIS by Lester del Rey—An atomic submarine
crew discovers the lost city of Atlantis
BATTLE ON MERCURY by Erik Van Lhin—Sun storms sweep Mercury
and threaten man's existence
DANGER: DINOSAURS! by Richard Marsten—A treacherous big-game
hunter leads an expedition back to the Age of Reptiles
EARTHBOUND by Milton Lesser—An ex-space cadet is forced to plunder
ships he was trained to protect
FIVE AGAINST VENUS by Philip Latham—A Moon-bound rocket
crashes in the misty wilds of Venus
ISLANDS IN THE SKY by Arthur C. Clarke—A teen-ager's adventures
aboard a space station
LOST PLANET, THE by Paul Dallas—Two worlds on the verge of war
MAROONED ON MARS by Lester del Rey—A teen-ager on the first
Moon-to-Mars expedition
MISSING MEN OF SATURN by Philip Latham—A space crew is held
prisoner by froglike men on Saturn
MISSION TO THE MOON by Lester del Rey—Scientists make man's first
journey to the Moon
MISTS OF DAWN by Chad Oliver—A space-time machine hurls a 20th-
century boy back to 50,000 B. C.
Page 152
MYSTERIOUS PLANT, THE by Kenneth Wright—A young captive on
Planet X prevents Earth's destruction
MYSTERY OF THE THIRD MINE by R.W. Lowndes—Prospecting in the
dangerous asteroid belt
PLANET OF LIGHT by Raymond F. Jones—A trip to another planet
shows how the universe can be saved from destruction
ROCKET JOCKEY by Philip St. John—A space pilot battles Martians in
rocket race
ROCKET TO LUNA by Richard Marsten—A stowaway on a Moon-bound
rocket proves his worth
ROCKETS TO NOWHERE by Philip St. John—Scientists establish a
colony on the Moon
SECRET OF THE NINTH PLANET, THE by Donald A. Wollheim—A
high-school senior investigates the theft of the solar system's light
SECRET OF SATURN'S RINGS, THE by Donald A. Wollheim—A
scientist proves his theories by means of a unique invention
SECRET OF THE MARTIAN MOONS, THE by Donald A. Wollheim—
Scientists discover the secrets of Martian civilization
SON OF THE STARS by Raymond F. Jones—An interplanetary friendship
brings Earth to the brink of destruction
SONS OF THE OCEAN DEEPS by Bryce Walton—Undersea terrors
nearly thwart a project aimed at saving a continent
STAR CONQUERORS, THE by Ben Bova—The Terran Confederation
battles for its existence against the all-powerful rulers of the Milky Way
Galaxy
STAR SEEKERS, THE by Milton Lesser—A tale of a spaceship doomed to
crash
STEP TO THE STARS by Lester del Rey—The U. S. builds a space station
Planet X prevents Earth's destruction
MYSTERY OF THE THIRD MINE by R.W. Lowndes—Prospecting in the
dangerous asteroid belt
PLANET OF LIGHT by Raymond F. Jones—A trip to another planet
shows how the universe can be saved from destruction
ROCKET JOCKEY by Philip St. John—A space pilot battles Martians in
rocket race
ROCKET TO LUNA by Richard Marsten—A stowaway on a Moon-bound
rocket proves his worth
ROCKETS TO NOWHERE by Philip St. John—Scientists establish a
colony on the Moon
SECRET OF THE NINTH PLANET, THE by Donald A. Wollheim—A
high-school senior investigates the theft of the solar system's light
SECRET OF SATURN'S RINGS, THE by Donald A. Wollheim—A
scientist proves his theories by means of a unique invention
SECRET OF THE MARTIAN MOONS, THE by Donald A. Wollheim—
Scientists discover the secrets of Martian civilization
SON OF THE STARS by Raymond F. Jones—An interplanetary friendship
brings Earth to the brink of destruction
SONS OF THE OCEAN DEEPS by Bryce Walton—Undersea terrors
nearly thwart a project aimed at saving a continent
STAR CONQUERORS, THE by Ben Bova—The Terran Confederation
battles for its existence against the all-powerful rulers of the Milky Way
Galaxy
STAR SEEKERS, THE by Milton Lesser—A tale of a spaceship doomed to
crash
STEP TO THE STARS by Lester del Rey—The U. S. builds a space station
Page 153
TROUBLE ON TITAN by Alan E. Nourse—A rocket experimenter
discovers a plot threatening Earth's existence
VANDALS OF THE VOID by Jack Vance—A tale of space pirates
VAULT OF THE AGES by Poul Anderson—Life 500 years after the
flaming collapse of 20th-century civilization
WORLD AT BAY, THE by Paul Capon—Men from another planet attack
Earth
YEAR WHEN STARDUST FELL, THE by Raymond Jones—A mysterious
"fall-out" paralyzes civilization
discovers a plot threatening Earth's existence
VANDALS OF THE VOID by Jack Vance—A tale of space pirates
VAULT OF THE AGES by Poul Anderson—Life 500 years after the
flaming collapse of 20th-century civilization
WORLD AT BAY, THE by Paul Capon—Men from another planet attack
Earth
YEAR WHEN STARDUST FELL, THE by Raymond Jones—A mysterious
"fall-out" paralyzes civilization
Page 154
*** END OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE SECRET OF
THE NINTH PLANET ***
Updated editions will replace the previous one—the old editions will be
renamed.
Creating the works from print editions not protected by U.S. copyright law
means that no one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the
Foundation (and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States
without permission and without paying copyright royalties. Special rules,
set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to copying
and distributing Project Gutenberg™ electronic works to protect the
PROJECT GUTENBERG™ concept and trademark. Project Gutenberg is a
registered trademark, and may not be used if you charge for an eBook,
except by following the terms of the trademark license, including paying
royalties for use of the Project Gutenberg trademark. If you do not charge
anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the trademark license is
very easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose such as creation
of derivative works, reports, performances and research. Project Gutenberg
eBooks may be modified and printed and given away—you may do
practically ANYTHING in the United States with eBooks not protected by
U.S. copyright law. Redistribution is subject to the trademark license,
especially commercial redistribution.
START: FULL LICENSE
THE NINTH PLANET ***
Updated editions will replace the previous one—the old editions will be
renamed.
Creating the works from print editions not protected by U.S. copyright law
means that no one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the
Foundation (and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States
without permission and without paying copyright royalties. Special rules,
set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to copying
and distributing Project Gutenberg™ electronic works to protect the
PROJECT GUTENBERG™ concept and trademark. Project Gutenberg is a
registered trademark, and may not be used if you charge for an eBook,
except by following the terms of the trademark license, including paying
royalties for use of the Project Gutenberg trademark. If you do not charge
anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the trademark license is
very easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose such as creation
of derivative works, reports, performances and research. Project Gutenberg
eBooks may be modified and printed and given away—you may do
practically ANYTHING in the United States with eBooks not protected by
U.S. copyright law. Redistribution is subject to the trademark license,
especially commercial redistribution.
START: FULL LICENSE
Page 155
THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG™ LICENSE
PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK
To protect the Project Gutenberg™ mission of promoting the free
distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work (or any
other work associated in any way with the phrase “Project Gutenberg”), you
agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project Gutenberg License
available with this file or online at www.gutenberg.org/license.
Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing
Project Gutenberg electronic works
1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg electronic work,
you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to and accept all the
terms of this license and intellectual property (trademark/copyright)
agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all the terms of this agreement,
you must cease using and return or destroy all copies of Project Gutenberg
electronic works in your possession. If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy
of or access to a Project Gutenberg electronic work and you do not agree to
be bound by the terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the
person or entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8.
1.B. “Project Gutenberg” is a registered trademark. It may only be used on
or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who agree to be
bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few things that you can
do with most Project Gutenberg electronic works even without complying
with the full terms of this agreement. See paragraph 1.C below. There are a
lot of things you can do with Project Gutenberg electronic works if you
follow the terms of this agreement and help preserve free future access to
Project Gutenberg electronic works. See paragraph 1.E below.
1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation (“the Foundation”
or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project
Gutenberg electronic works. Nearly all the individual works in the
collection are in the public domain in the United States. If an individual
work is unprotected by copyright law in the United States and you are
PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK
To protect the Project Gutenberg™ mission of promoting the free
distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work (or any
other work associated in any way with the phrase “Project Gutenberg”), you
agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project Gutenberg License
available with this file or online at www.gutenberg.org/license.
Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing
Project Gutenberg electronic works
1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg electronic work,
you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to and accept all the
terms of this license and intellectual property (trademark/copyright)
agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all the terms of this agreement,
you must cease using and return or destroy all copies of Project Gutenberg
electronic works in your possession. If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy
of or access to a Project Gutenberg electronic work and you do not agree to
be bound by the terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the
person or entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8.
1.B. “Project Gutenberg” is a registered trademark. It may only be used on
or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who agree to be
bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few things that you can
do with most Project Gutenberg electronic works even without complying
with the full terms of this agreement. See paragraph 1.C below. There are a
lot of things you can do with Project Gutenberg electronic works if you
follow the terms of this agreement and help preserve free future access to
Project Gutenberg electronic works. See paragraph 1.E below.
1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation (“the Foundation”
or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project
Gutenberg electronic works. Nearly all the individual works in the
collection are in the public domain in the United States. If an individual
work is unprotected by copyright law in the United States and you are
Page 156
located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from
copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative works
based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg are
removed. Of course, we hope that you will support the Project Gutenberg
mission of promoting free access to electronic works by freely sharing
Project Gutenberg works in compliance with the terms of this agreement for
keeping the Project Gutenberg name associated with the work. You can
easily comply with the terms of this agreement by keeping this work in the
same format with its attached full Project Gutenberg License when you
share it without charge with others.
1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern
what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are in a
constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, check the
laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement before
downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or creating
derivative works based on this work or any other Project Gutenberg work.
The Foundation makes no representations concerning the copyright status
of any work in any country other than the United States.
1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg:
1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate
access to, the full Project Gutenberg License must appear prominently
whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg work (any work on which the
phrase “Project Gutenberg” appears, or with which the phrase “Project
Gutenberg” is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed, copied
or distributed:
This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere in the United States
and most other parts of the world at no cost and with almost no
restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or re-use it
under the terms of the Project Gutenberg™ License included with
this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org. If you are not located in
the United States, you will have to check the laws of the country
where you are located before using this eBook.
copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative works
based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg are
removed. Of course, we hope that you will support the Project Gutenberg
mission of promoting free access to electronic works by freely sharing
Project Gutenberg works in compliance with the terms of this agreement for
keeping the Project Gutenberg name associated with the work. You can
easily comply with the terms of this agreement by keeping this work in the
same format with its attached full Project Gutenberg License when you
share it without charge with others.
1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern
what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are in a
constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, check the
laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement before
downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or creating
derivative works based on this work or any other Project Gutenberg work.
The Foundation makes no representations concerning the copyright status
of any work in any country other than the United States.
1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg:
1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate
access to, the full Project Gutenberg License must appear prominently
whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg work (any work on which the
phrase “Project Gutenberg” appears, or with which the phrase “Project
Gutenberg” is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed, copied
or distributed:
This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere in the United States
and most other parts of the world at no cost and with almost no
restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or re-use it
under the terms of the Project Gutenberg™ License included with
this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org. If you are not located in
the United States, you will have to check the laws of the country
where you are located before using this eBook.
Page 157
1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg electronic work is derived from
texts not protected by U.S. copyright law (does not contain a notice
indicating that it is posted with permission of the copyright holder), the
work can be copied and distributed to anyone in the United States without
paying any fees or charges. If you are redistributing or providing access to a
work with the phrase “Project Gutenberg” associated with or appearing on
the work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs
1.E.1 through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the
Project Gutenberg trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or 1.E.9.
1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg electronic work is posted with the
permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution must comply
with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional terms imposed
by the copyright holder. Additional terms will be linked to the Project
Gutenberg License for all works posted with the permission of the
copyright holder found at the beginning of this work.
1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg License
terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this work or any
other work associated with Project Gutenberg.
1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this
electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without prominently
displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with active links or
immediate access to the full terms of the Project Gutenberg License.
1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary,
compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any
word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access to or
distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg work in a format other than “Plain
Vanilla ASCII” or other format used in the official version posted on the
official Project Gutenberg website (www.gutenberg.org), you must, at no
additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a copy, a means of
exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon request, of the work
in its original “Plain Vanilla ASCII” or other form. Any alternate format
must include the full Project Gutenberg License as specified in paragraph
1.E.1.
texts not protected by U.S. copyright law (does not contain a notice
indicating that it is posted with permission of the copyright holder), the
work can be copied and distributed to anyone in the United States without
paying any fees or charges. If you are redistributing or providing access to a
work with the phrase “Project Gutenberg” associated with or appearing on
the work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs
1.E.1 through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the
Project Gutenberg trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or 1.E.9.
1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg electronic work is posted with the
permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution must comply
with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional terms imposed
by the copyright holder. Additional terms will be linked to the Project
Gutenberg License for all works posted with the permission of the
copyright holder found at the beginning of this work.
1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg License
terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this work or any
other work associated with Project Gutenberg.
1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this
electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without prominently
displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with active links or
immediate access to the full terms of the Project Gutenberg License.
1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary,
compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any
word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access to or
distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg work in a format other than “Plain
Vanilla ASCII” or other format used in the official version posted on the
official Project Gutenberg website (www.gutenberg.org), you must, at no
additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a copy, a means of
exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon request, of the work
in its original “Plain Vanilla ASCII” or other form. Any alternate format
must include the full Project Gutenberg License as specified in paragraph
1.E.1.
Page 158
1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying, performing,
copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg works unless you comply
with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9.
1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing access to
or distributing Project Gutenberg electronic works provided that:
• You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from the
use of Project Gutenberg works calculated using the method you
already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is owed to the
owner of the Project Gutenberg trademark, but he has agreed to donate
royalties under this paragraph to the Project Gutenberg Literary
Archive Foundation. Royalty payments must be paid within 60 days
following each date on which you prepare (or are legally required to
prepare) your periodic tax returns. Royalty payments should be clearly
marked as such and sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive
Foundation at the address specified in Section 4, “Information about
donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation.”
• You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies
you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he does
not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg™ License. You
must require such a user to return or destroy all copies of the works
possessed in a physical medium and discontinue all use of and all
access to other copies of Project Gutenberg™ works.
• You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any
money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the
electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days of
receipt of the work.
• You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free distribution
of Project Gutenberg™ works.
1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg™
electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set forth in
this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from the Project
Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the manager of the Project
copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg works unless you comply
with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9.
1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing access to
or distributing Project Gutenberg electronic works provided that:
• You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from the
use of Project Gutenberg works calculated using the method you
already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is owed to the
owner of the Project Gutenberg trademark, but he has agreed to donate
royalties under this paragraph to the Project Gutenberg Literary
Archive Foundation. Royalty payments must be paid within 60 days
following each date on which you prepare (or are legally required to
prepare) your periodic tax returns. Royalty payments should be clearly
marked as such and sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive
Foundation at the address specified in Section 4, “Information about
donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation.”
• You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies
you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he does
not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg™ License. You
must require such a user to return or destroy all copies of the works
possessed in a physical medium and discontinue all use of and all
access to other copies of Project Gutenberg™ works.
• You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any
money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the
electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days of
receipt of the work.
• You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free distribution
of Project Gutenberg™ works.
1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg™
electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set forth in
this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from the Project
Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the manager of the Project
Page 159
Gutenberg™ trademark. Contact the Foundation as set forth in Section 3
below.
1.F.
1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable
effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread works
not protected by U.S. copyright law in creating the Project Gutenberg™
collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg™ electronic works, and
the medium on which they may be stored, may contain “Defects,” such as,
but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or corrupt data, transcription
errors, a copyright or other intellectual property infringement, a defective or
damaged disk or other medium, a computer virus, or computer codes that
damage or cannot be read by your equipment.
1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except
for the “Right of Replacement or Refund” described in paragraph 1.F.3, the
Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project
Gutenberg™ trademark, and any other party distributing a Project
Gutenberg™ electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all liability to
you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal fees. YOU AGREE
THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT
LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT
EXCEPT THOSE PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH 1.F.3. YOU AGREE
THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY
DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE LIABLE
TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL,
PUNITIVE OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE
NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you
discover a defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you
can receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a
written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you
received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with
your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you with the
defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a refund.
If you received the work electronically, the person or entity providing it to
below.
1.F.
1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable
effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread works
not protected by U.S. copyright law in creating the Project Gutenberg™
collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg™ electronic works, and
the medium on which they may be stored, may contain “Defects,” such as,
but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or corrupt data, transcription
errors, a copyright or other intellectual property infringement, a defective or
damaged disk or other medium, a computer virus, or computer codes that
damage or cannot be read by your equipment.
1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except
for the “Right of Replacement or Refund” described in paragraph 1.F.3, the
Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project
Gutenberg™ trademark, and any other party distributing a Project
Gutenberg™ electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all liability to
you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal fees. YOU AGREE
THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT
LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT
EXCEPT THOSE PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH 1.F.3. YOU AGREE
THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY
DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE LIABLE
TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL,
PUNITIVE OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE
NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you
discover a defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you
can receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a
written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you
received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with
your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you with the
defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a refund.
If you received the work electronically, the person or entity providing it to
Page 160
you may choose to give you a second opportunity to receive the work
electronically in lieu of a refund. If the second copy is also defective, you
may demand a refund in writing without further opportunities to fix the
problem.
1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth in
paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you ‘AS-IS’, WITH NO OTHER
WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING
BUT NOT LIMITED TO WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR
FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE.
1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied warranties or
the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages. If any disclaimer or
limitation set forth in this agreement violates the law of the state applicable
to this agreement, the agreement shall be interpreted to make the maximum
disclaimer or limitation permitted by the applicable state law. The invalidity
or unenforceability of any provision of this agreement shall not void the
remaining provisions.
1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the
trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone
providing copies of Project Gutenberg™ electronic works in accordance
with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production,
promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg™ electronic works,
harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees, that
arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do or cause
to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg work, (b)
alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any Project Gutenberg
work, and (c) any Defect you cause.
Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project
Gutenberg
Project Gutenberg is synonymous with the free distribution of electronic
works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers including
obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It exists because of the
electronically in lieu of a refund. If the second copy is also defective, you
may demand a refund in writing without further opportunities to fix the
problem.
1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth in
paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you ‘AS-IS’, WITH NO OTHER
WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING
BUT NOT LIMITED TO WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR
FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE.
1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied warranties or
the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages. If any disclaimer or
limitation set forth in this agreement violates the law of the state applicable
to this agreement, the agreement shall be interpreted to make the maximum
disclaimer or limitation permitted by the applicable state law. The invalidity
or unenforceability of any provision of this agreement shall not void the
remaining provisions.
1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the
trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone
providing copies of Project Gutenberg™ electronic works in accordance
with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production,
promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg™ electronic works,
harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees, that
arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do or cause
to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg work, (b)
alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any Project Gutenberg
work, and (c) any Defect you cause.
Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project
Gutenberg
Project Gutenberg is synonymous with the free distribution of electronic
works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers including
obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It exists because of the
Page 161
efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from people in all walks of
life.
Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the assistance
they need are critical to reaching Project Gutenberg’s goals and ensuring
that the Project Gutenberg collection will remain freely available for
generations to come. In 2001, the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive
Foundation was created to provide a secure and permanent future for
Project Gutenberg and future generations. To learn more about the Project
Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and how your efforts and donations
can help, see Sections 3 and 4 and the Foundation information page at
www.gutenberg.org.
Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg
Literary Archive Foundation
The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non-profit 501(c)
(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the state of
Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal Revenue Service.
The Foundation’s EIN or federal tax identification number is 64-6221541.
Contributions to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation are tax
deductible to the full extent permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state’s
laws.
The Foundation’s business office is located at 41 Watchung Plaza #516,
Montclair NJ 07042, USA, +1 (862) 621-9288. Email contact links and up
to date contact information can be found at the Foundation’s website and
official page at www.gutenberg.org/contact
Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project
Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation
Project Gutenberg™ depends upon and cannot survive without widespread
public support and donations to carry out its mission of increasing the
number of public domain and licensed works that can be freely distributed
in machine-readable form accessible by the widest array of equipment
life.
Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the assistance
they need are critical to reaching Project Gutenberg’s goals and ensuring
that the Project Gutenberg collection will remain freely available for
generations to come. In 2001, the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive
Foundation was created to provide a secure and permanent future for
Project Gutenberg and future generations. To learn more about the Project
Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and how your efforts and donations
can help, see Sections 3 and 4 and the Foundation information page at
www.gutenberg.org.
Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg
Literary Archive Foundation
The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non-profit 501(c)
(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the state of
Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal Revenue Service.
The Foundation’s EIN or federal tax identification number is 64-6221541.
Contributions to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation are tax
deductible to the full extent permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state’s
laws.
The Foundation’s business office is located at 41 Watchung Plaza #516,
Montclair NJ 07042, USA, +1 (862) 621-9288. Email contact links and up
to date contact information can be found at the Foundation’s website and
official page at www.gutenberg.org/contact
Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project
Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation
Project Gutenberg™ depends upon and cannot survive without widespread
public support and donations to carry out its mission of increasing the
number of public domain and licensed works that can be freely distributed
in machine-readable form accessible by the widest array of equipment
Page 162
including outdated equipment. Many small donations ($1 to $5,000) are
particularly important to maintaining tax exempt status with the IRS.
The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating
charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United States.
Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a considerable effort,
much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up with these
requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations where we have not
received written confirmation of compliance. To SEND DONATIONS or
determine the status of compliance for any particular state visit
www.gutenberg.org/donate.
While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we have
not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition against
accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who approach us
with offers to donate.
International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make any
statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from outside the
United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff.
Please check the Project Gutenberg web pages for current donation methods
and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other ways including
checks, online payments and credit card donations. To donate, please visit:
www.gutenberg.org/donate.
Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg
electronic works
Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project Gutenberg
concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared with
anyone. For forty years, he produced and distributed Project Gutenberg
eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support.
Project Gutenberg eBooks are often created from several printed editions,
all of which are confirmed as not protected by copyright in the U.S. unless a
particularly important to maintaining tax exempt status with the IRS.
The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating
charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United States.
Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a considerable effort,
much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up with these
requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations where we have not
received written confirmation of compliance. To SEND DONATIONS or
determine the status of compliance for any particular state visit
www.gutenberg.org/donate.
While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we have
not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition against
accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who approach us
with offers to donate.
International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make any
statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from outside the
United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff.
Please check the Project Gutenberg web pages for current donation methods
and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other ways including
checks, online payments and credit card donations. To donate, please visit:
www.gutenberg.org/donate.
Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg
electronic works
Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project Gutenberg
concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared with
anyone. For forty years, he produced and distributed Project Gutenberg
eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support.
Project Gutenberg eBooks are often created from several printed editions,
all of which are confirmed as not protected by copyright in the U.S. unless a
Page 163
copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not necessarily keep eBooks in
compliance with any particular paper edition.
Most people start at our website which has the main PG search facility:
www.gutenberg.org.
This website includes information about Project Gutenberg, including how
to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation,
how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to subscribe to our email
newsletter to hear about new eBooks.
compliance with any particular paper edition.
Most people start at our website which has the main PG search facility:
www.gutenberg.org.
This website includes information about Project Gutenberg, including how
to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation,
how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to subscribe to our email
newsletter to hear about new eBooks.